Home

P7000 Cartridge Ribbon Printer User`s Manual

1. IPDS Font Size Print Quality Graphics Barcode Barcode Barcode Quality Quality Speed Size Select By Host Select By Host High High High 4234 Standard Default Font Select By Host Select By Host Select By Host 67XX Compressed Low Low Low 64XX 4224 Early Print Graphics Graphic 12 5 Default Code Comp Scaling Charsize Checksum Pag Off Rounded 4234 Standard 1 3 Internat Set 5 Icelandic On Exact 67XX Special 4 9 English USA Can Turkish Latin 5 Austrian German Latin 2 ROECE Belgian Old Cyrillic Old Brazilian Thai Canadian French Hebrew Danish Norw Farsi Finnish Swedish Yugoslavian French Azerty Latin 9 Italian Euro US Can Japanese Eng Euro Aust Germ Katakana Euro Dan Norw Portuguese Euro Fin Swed Spanish Euro Italian Spanish Speak Euro Spanish English UK Euro UK Ireland Arabic Euro French Greek Euro Internat Euro Icelandic B Code Page Default VPA Check Hexdump Print IPDS Subset Font Mode Fonts Thai DRAFT 10 NLQ 10 Enable Disable Version 0 DRAFT 12 NLQ 12 Disable Enable Version 1 DRAFT 13 NLQ 13 Version 2 DRAFT 15 NLQ 15 DRAFT 17 NLQ 17 DRAFT 18 NLQ 18 DP 10 OCRA DP 12 OCRB DP 13 PSM DP 15 DP 17 DP 18 225 Chapter 4 226 IPDS Emulation Your IPDS printer emulates the IBM 4234 twinax models 008 and 012 IPDS Twinax printers can only print IPDS data streams and not
2. Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets see page 178 ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852 ELOT 928 Greek ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek Sakr CP714 7 bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 Arabic CP 864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 Arabic CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 818 EURO Arabic Lam 1 CP 1048 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 Hebrew Turkish Misc UTF 8 Sets Sets Sets Hebrew Old Data Gen Turk Block set 10cpi Hebrew New DEC Turkish Italics Set Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi Latin 1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set Win CP 1255 PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Azeri 177 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II Character Set Serial from p
3. Form Form Margins Perforation Length Width Skip Abs Length IN Abs Width IN Left Margin Disable 11 0 inches 13 6 inches 0 columns 1 2 Inch 0 1 24 0 1 13 6 0 369 2 3 Inch Abs Length MM Abs Width MM Right Margin 5 6 Inch 279 4 mm 345 4 mm 0 columns 1 inch 0 1 609 6 0 1 345 4 0 369 Funct of Lines Function of CPI Bottom Margin 88 lines 136 characters 0 lines 1 192 1 272 0 451 158 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II EMULATION from page 123 LinePrinter NOTE When the printer is set to SPC Twx Params or SPC Coax Params no LP menu items will take effect on the same offline The LP Emulation resets when the printer is taken offline Factory Default Printer Print Char CPI LPI Font Page Reset Cmd Protocol Set Select Attributes Format CFG Ld see page 158 Select CPI Typeface Disable 10 0 CPI Data Processing Power up config 12 0 CPI NLQ Current config 13 3 CPI OCR A Factory config 15 0 CPI OCR B 17 1 CPI High Speed 20 0 CPI NLQ San Serif Select LPI Prop Spacing 6 0 LPI Disable 8 0 LPI Enable 10 3 LPI Bold Print Disable Enable Italic Print Disable Forward Slant Backward Slant Slashed Zero Disable Enable Printer Protocol Select the LinePrinter protocol you wish to use Refer to the LinePrinter Plus Pro
4. Control Code see page 177 Even dot plot Printable Double high 174 Serial Matrix Emulation Control Code 06 Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 ACK You can select an alternate line spacing of 6 8 or 10 3 LPI Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer e CR CR default Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return e CRz CR LF Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Auto LF The Auto LF option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Enable default Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width e Disable Discards any data past the forms width Overstrike This option enables you to print bold characters e Enable default Turns on bold print When enabled overstrike printing slows down the printer e Disable Turns off bold print Define LF Code e LFz LF default Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed command is rece
5. Data Bit 8 PI Ignored Data Resp Busy On Latch Polarity Polarity Strobe Data On Enable Enable Standard Standard Enable Leading Disable Disable Inverted Inverted Disable Trailing Prime TOF Action Buffer Size Auto Trickle Signal ink Trickle Time Enable Reset 16 Disable 1 4 sec Disable Do Nothing 1 16 Enable 1 2 sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec Off Data Bit 8 e Enable default Allows access to the extended ASCII character set Disable The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a zero regardless of its actual setting PI Ignored The PI Paper Instruction signal is used to control vertical paper motion e Enable default Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control codes e Disable Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU commands when the PI signal is true Data Polarity The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your host computer e Standard default Does not expect the host computer to invert the data Inverted Expects the data received on the data lines from the host computer to be inverted Ones become zeros and vice versa 92 Centronics Parallel Submenu Resp Polarity The Resp Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity of your host computer e Standard default Does not invert the response signal e Inverted Inverts the response signal sent to the host c
6. seesesssss 271 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface ssseeeeeeee 272 Compatibility Mode sssssseeeeeeeeneeneeneennneennenenn nnn 272 Nibble Mode i e esses 3 x ete enm ecd edet 272 Byte Mode tette een ehe ee nd o teg genet 272 SIgrials Ate eerie E Att aeter ot 273 Terminating Resistor Configurations eseeeeeees 275 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interfaces ssssssssessssss 276 AS 282 a a taie i qi te dale docet sd 277 RHS8 422 cg eh ehe dirae oreet Pre Tee ee eee RD eel 278 6 Reprogramming the Security Key 279 Reprogramming The Security Key ssssesseseseeeee 279 How To Program The Security Key sss 279 Troubleshooting sirsa 281 Cleaning Requirements sssssssssseeeeeeneneeneee enne 281 Exterior Cleaning eissa e e aa A R oi noa aa Eoaea ak 281 Interior Cleaning sesssesssseeseeeeeeeennne enne 282 Diagnosing Problems sssssseeeeeeneeenn nennen 284 Bar Code Verification sassanidien diet aes iiaa 284 Printing A Hex Dumper rnia aa a ARSS 285 Fault Messages oaiue niee reae nE N AEN E rennes 286 A Printer Specifications esses 317 Ribbon Cartridge Specifications ssseesese 317 Paper Specifications sessssssseseseeeeeeeeee nennen 317 Ere 318 Printer Wei
7. r Outer Paper aa Guide Leaf 2 Paper Tractor 2 s a wu vf i NA Lul Fh P 5 e olg lo o b Mount Lee Mount Block Block 2 Figure 28 Adjusting Paper Guide Leaves 4 Slide the left outboard mount block so that the left outer paper guide leaf is 5 inches from the left tractor See Figure 28 5 Slide the right outboard mount block so that the right outer paper guide leaf is 5 inches from the right tractor 6 Slide the center mount block so that the center paper guide leaf is centered between the left and right outer paper guide leaves 7 Install the paper guide knobs and front paper guide leaves See Figure 27 327 Appendix C Operation Load Paper Outer Paper 328 Guide Leaf 2 CM Guide Leaf Center Paper Front Paper Guide Leaf 3 RS A Edge of sd Paper Boxe Label Paper Paper Supply Box 183487b Figure 29 Loading Paper Onto The Printer Align the paper supply box with the label on the bottom left side of the modesty panel See Figure 29 on page 328 Unlock and open the tractor doors and slide the paper from below through the black paper out sensor slot on the left side and up between all front and rear paper guides Load the paper on the left tractor sprockets and close the tractor door Load the paper onto the right tractor sprockets and
8. amr Cabinet Model Pedestal Model Figure 6 Paper Slot Location 1 Raise the printer cover Raise the platen lever as far as it will go See Figure 4 on page 21 for the location of the lever 2 Press ON LINE CLEAR to turn off the alarm Do not open the tractor doors or remove the existing paper 3 For cabinet models open the front door Align the paper supply with the label on the floor Ensure the paper pulls freely from the box 4 Feed the paper up through the paper slot see Figure 6 It may be easier to feed one corner of the new paper up through the slot first When this corner can be grasped from the top rotate the paper back to the normal position NOTE If you are using thick multi part forms and are unable to load the new paper over the existing paper go to step 15 5 Hold the paper to prevent it from slipping down and through the paper slot 29 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures New Paper Existing Paper Figure 7 Loading New Paper into the Printer 6 Pull the new paper above and behind the ribbon mask but in front of the existing paper See Figure 4 on page 21 for the ribbon mask location If necessary gently press the existing paper back 7 Align the top edge of the new paper with the top perforation of the existing paper 8 Load the new paper over the existing paper Open and load the tractors one at a time to prevent the paper from slipping NOTE Make sure that the top edg
9. not communicating with the PCI card in PCI slot J13 This could indicate a bad PCI card poor connection or problem in the PCI bus Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution FRAMING ERROR Yes The printed output may Make a configuation printout Set contain random printer serial interface parameters to exclamation point match host configuration settings characters for Data Protocol Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Data Terminal Ready and Request to Send FREEFORM OFF Yes A control panel key is Press the key again stuck in the down position FREEFORM ON OFF No This message appears if Contact your authorized service HOLD KEY PWRUP the freeform feature is representative enabled This feature is for manufacturing use only and is never used by the customer or field maintenance personnel GRF CHK ERROR Yes Graphic Check Error in Press ON LINE CLEAR PRESS STOP the CT emulation over a twinax interface the printer received a non printable character HOO PCI SLOT No The controller board is Contact your authorized service See User Manual not communicating witha representative PCI card This could indicate a bad PCI card poor connection or problem in the PCI bus H01 PCI J12 No The controller board is Contact your authorized service See User Manual not communicating with representative the PCI card in PCI slot J12 This could indicate a bad PCI card poor connection or problem in the PCI
10. Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User CLEAR FLASH sucessfully loaded in RAM Old program being deleted from flash memory i Explanation lution Displayed Message Correct planatio Solutio B40 ERROR SDRAM No Flash memory has not Cycle power to see if the message EEPROM CKSUM passed boot initialization clears if not contact your BAD tests authorized service representative B41 ERROR DIM No The DRAM DIMM Cycle power to see if the message MEMORY NOT installed on the controller clears if not contact your SDRAM board is not Synchronous authorized service representative DRAM SDRAM B42 ERROR SDRAM No Printer boot initialization Cycle power to see if the message ROWS NOT tests detect incorrect clears if not contact your ALLOWED SDRAM authorized service representative B43 ERROR SDRAM No Printer boot initialization Cycle power to see if the message TOO MANY BANKS tests detect incorrect clears if not contact your SDRAM authorized service representative B44 ERROR SDRAM No Printer boot initialization Cycle power to see if the message NOT 64 BITS WIDE tests detect incorrect clears if not contact your SDRAM authorized service representative B45 ERROR SDRAM No Printer boot initialization Cycle power to see if the message IS WRONG VOLTAGE tests detect incorrect clears if not contact your SDRAM authorized service
11. 7 Troubleshooting Cleaning Requirements WARNING Clean the printer every six months or after every 1000 hours of operation whichever occurs first If the printer is located in a dusty area or is used for heavy duty printing clean it more often Disconnect the power source before cleaning the printer Vor dem S ubern des Druckers ist die Netzverbindung zu unterbrechen D branchez l alimentation avant de nettoyer l imprimante Desconecte la fuente de energ a antes de limpiar la impresora Staccare la fonte di energia prima della pulitura della stampante Exterior Cleaning Clean the outside of the cabinet with a soft lint free cloth and mild detergent soap Dishwashing liquid works well Do not use abrasive powders or chemical solvents Clean the windows with plain water or mild window cleaner Always apply the cleaning solution to the cloth never pour cleaning solution directly onto the printer 281 Chapter 7 Cleaning Requirements Interior Cleaning Over time particles of paper and ink accumulate inside the printer This is normal Paper dust and ink build up must be periodically removed to avoid degraded print quality Most paper dust accumulates around the ends of the platen and ribbon path Ribbon Cartridge Tab 2 Ribbon S A BS Tractor 2 OF Tension Knob Blue Tractor Lock 2 Splined Shaft Hammer Bank Cover and Paper Ribbon Mask Support 2 Tab Slot 2 eLL8
12. Has a standard power outlet that supplies 88 135 Volts AC or 178 270 Volts AC power at 47 to 63 Hz Is relatively dust free Has a temperature range of 10 C to 40 C 50 F to 104 F anda relative humidity from 1596 to 90 non condensing Is located within the maximum allowable cable length to the host computer This distance depends on the type of interface you plan to use as shown in Table 1 Printer Dimensions Chapter 2 Table 1 Maximum Interface Connection Cable Length Interface Type Maximum Cable Length Centronics Parallel 5 meters 15 feet Dataproducts Parallel 12 meters 40 feet IEEE 1284 Parallel 10 meters 32 feet Serial RS 232 15 meters 50 feet Serial RS 422 1220 meters 4000 feet Coax 1500 meters 4920 feet Twinax 1500 meters 4920 feet Twinax shielded cable 1500 meters 4920 feet Twisted Pair Type 3 300 meters 985 feet Ethernet 10 100Base T 100 meters 328 feet Printer Dimensions lt E 7S 41 0 in 57 5 in p 7x 104cm 146 1 cm p dd 27 0 in SD a dit 68 84cm lt nw we ES 7 29 0 in WC Be S 73 7 cm v SON i E ci in L 83 0 in WI 210 8 cm V 68 6 cm i x Ps J Figure 1 Printer Dimensions Cabinet Model 18 183469b Figure 2 Printer Dimensions Cabinet Model with Paper Stacker 19 Prin
13. e Optimize amp Reboot Reclaims flash space from deleted flash files After pressing ENTER wait for the printer to reboot NOTE When the Optimize amp Reboot option is executed the message Optimizing Flash Files does not display before printer rebooting takes place IMPORTANT ADVANCED USER Menu Print File List Prints a summary of the files stored in flash memory and several statistics on File System usage Do not turn the printer off until it has completely rebooted and is either back online or offline Set Sharing This option allows character sets to be shared between the active LP protocol and the active IGP emulation If CT is installed and active choosing a character set in the CT activates that character set in the active IGP and LP protocols These changes will not be visible on the front panel If Set Sharing is not selected only the LP will share the CT s character set Switching host interfaces from CT to Centronics when the Set Sharing is enabled will cause the LP character set to be activated to the same character set of the active IGP if possible In a non CT system changing characters sets in LP causes the active IGP to change to the same character set if the selected set exists in IGP If the active IGP has no access to the selected set no changes are made Selecting a new character set in the active IGP causes the LP to change to the same character set if the selected character set exists i
14. f LP is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 5 If PCL II is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 6 Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial 7 f Real Time Clock RTC option is installed 8 Available for pedestal printers only 9 Based on WLAN radio installed 10 If a Feature File has been downloaded 69 Chapter 4 Main Menu P7000 LG Firmware OFFLINE QUICK ZTP CONFIG HOST NETWORK SETUP SETTINGS CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP page 77 page 333 page 85 page 87 page 105 HOST INTERFACE ZTP Function Load Config Auto Switching Adapter Address 1 Adapter Address 1 ZTP TearDistance Save Config Centronics Adapter Params 1 Ethernet Address ZTP Data Time Print Config Dataproducts Ethernet Address WLAN Address ZTP Wait Time Delete Config IEEE 1284 Ethernet Params ZTP DataTime 8 ZTP Platen Open Power Up Config Serial WLAN Address ZTP WaitTime 8 Protect Configs E Net Adapter WLAN Params ZTP TearDist Name Configs Ethernet WLAN Kerberos 9 ACTIVE EMULATION Reset Cfg Names WLAN LEAP PGL SFCC Auto Save WLAN EAP VGL SFCC Printer Protocol Form Length d Form Width 4 Select CPI 4 Select LPI P Series SFCC Vert Forms 5 Horiz Forms Ribbon End Point Save Config Power Up Config If installed 70 2 If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 3 f VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 4 If LP is selected f
15. printer is clearing its flash memory where XX represents the percentage completed i Explanation lution Displayed Message Correct planatio Solutio CLEARING No Status message No action is required PROGRAM FROM emulation software FLASH successfully loaded into printer RAM and the checksum matched The old program is now being deleted from flash memory CLOSE PLATEN Yes The platen lever is open Close the platen lever COIL HOT No One or more hammer Contact your authorized service coils are overheating representative CRTG COMM ERR No The hardware cannot 1 Make sure the ribbon cartridge See User Manual communicate properly is seated properly with the cartridge 2 Remove and replace the ribbon cartridge if necessary 3 Contact your authorized service representative CRTG MISSING Yes The ribbon cartridge is 1 Make sure a ribbon cartridge is Install new RBN missing or installed installed in the printer improperly 2 Make sure the ribbon cartridge is seated properly 3 Remove and replace the cartridge if necessary 4 Contact your authorized customer service representative CRTG NOT SETx Yes The ribbon cartridge is 1 Make sure a ribbon cartridge is Re install RBN not properly positioned installed in the printer 2 Make sure the ribbon cartridge is seated properly 3 Remove and replace the cartridge if necessary 4 Contact your authorized customer service representative CTL VOLT FAIL No Controller
16. Select SO Char Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0 through 255 to be used in place of SO Shift Out as the control code This allows access for the alternate set of control function characters See the description of the Code 128 barcodes in the IGP PGL Programmer s Reference Manual for details User Def Ratio e Enable default User defined ratios are accepted for barcodes Disable User defined ratios are ignored and the magnification X1 is used in its place 203 Chapter 4 IGP PGL Emulation C39 Compatbl This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set compatible with the new e Disable default Uses the current way of decoding e Enable Matches the old method of decoding Host Form Length Determines whether the form length specified in the CREATE command changes the form length designated in the LP menu see AweIIpivtep Mvo EuvaAatiov ov nraye 157 when the form is printed by the EXECUTE command Disable default The LP form length is unaffected by the form being printed e Enable The LP form length changes to match the length of the PGL form being printed Var Form Adjust Ranges from 0 30 Default is O This menu value is tenths of inches The value of this menu specifies the amount of distance to add to PGL forms that have variable form lengths Variable length forms are forms that are defined by using a 0 in the CREATE statement CREATE FORM O Variable
17. V er06 8L Platen Lever Figure 18 Completely Removing the Paper 8 To completely remove the paper from the printer a Raise the platen lever as far as it will go and open both tractor doors CAUTION Be careful when pulling any paper backward through the paper path especially when using a label stock If you are not careful labels can detach and adhere to the printer within the paper path where only an authorized service representative can remove them b Open the cabinet front door c Gently pull the paper down through the paper slot Allow the paper to fall into the paper supply area d Remove the paper from the paper supply area 40 Output Darkness Integrated Print Management System The P7000 has a new feature that automatically monitors and communicates the status of the ribbon life to help the operator know when to change ribbons Using an ink delivery system called the Cartridge Ribbon System CRS the printer can automatically detect when a new or used ribbon is loaded and all ribbon properties The ribbon is contained in a plastic box the cartridge and feeds only in one direction The CRS contains an interface board that allows communication between the printer and the cartridge Using the CRS the P7000 automatically detects when a new or used ribbon is installed and determines the ribbon s length ink color and expected yield The ribbon life starting from 10096 when new and decreasing to 096 when deple
18. again If the message appears load the latest emulation software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility 299 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table See User Manual instruction was attempted in the application program Displayed Message rala A Explanation Solution E31F EVENT 5 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E31G EVENT 6 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E31H EVENT 7 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display me
19. e ANSI Programmer s Reference Manual Provides host control codes and character sets for the ANSI emulation e Character Sets Reference Manual Information about and examples of the character sets available in line matrix printers e Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual Covers the host control codes and character sets for the Coax and Twinax emulations e Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual for the Simple Protocol Converter Option Covers the host control codes and character sets for the Coax and Twinax Simple Protocol Converter emulations e External Network Interface Card User s Manual Information about network protocols configuration and operation e IGP PGL Programmer s Reference Manual Provides information used with the optional IGP Printronix emulation enhancement feature e IGP VGL Programmer s Reference Manual Provides information used with the optional Code V emulation enhancement feature e Integrated Network Interface Card User s Manual Information about network protocols configuration and operation e IPDS Twinax Emulation Programmer s Reference Manual Provides an overview of Intelligent Printer Data Stream IPDS features commands and diagnostics e LinePrinter Plus Programmer s Reference Manual Covers the host control codes for the LinePrinter Plus emulation Printronix Customer Support Center Contact Information IMPORTANT Printronix
20. e Enable default When this option is enabled it forces the printer to print if a partial line is in the printer i e line not ending with a LF e Disable When disabled the last partial line of data will not be printed Early Print Cmpl Early Print Complete allows the printer to send Print Complete status to the host before the printer is actually done printing all data Early Print Complete is only available if the IPDS feature is installed e Disable default Means the printer will suppress the Early Print Complete response until all printing is complete Enable Means the printer will send an acknowledgement to the host when it is able to accept more data NOTE When an Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs the data in the printer will remain in the buffer regardless of the setting of the Cancel Buffer option It is recommended that local procedures be followed to recover from the error Do not select Early Print Complete while a print job is in progress If this is done you will need to restart the printer PTX Transparent Lead in Chars You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through standard TN3270 emulations To access these features send text commands in the data stream The commands must have a start and end code Four sets are available e Set 1 start code lt default stop code e Set 2 start code stop code e Set 3 start code 96 sto
21. e Prnt Ribbon Log Prints log of cartridge installed in the printer e Checker For factory use This pattern helps identify marginal printhead elements quality of edge sharpness and uneven print quality Test Width Set this parameter to run the self tests at full width or 80 columns Paper Out Dots Only authorized service representatives should set this parameter This parameter is used to adjust the paper out distance from the perforation you can specify where the last line on the page will print when there is a paper out condition Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen DIAGNOSTICS Menu System Memory Displays the amount of RAM installed Print Statistics You can view various printer statistics and refer to them for preventive maintenance purposes Printer statistics accumulate continuously they do not reset when you turn off the printer All of the printer statistics are set to zero at the factory after burn in testing e On The cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on The range is 0 to 30 000 hours e Print The cumulative time in hours the printer has actually been printing The range is 0 to 30 000 hours e Print Strokes The cumulative number of back and forth shuttle strokes the printer has printed during normal printer operation The range is O to 2 147 483 647 shuttle strokes e Print Lines The cumulative number of lines the printer has printed The range is 0
22. lif installed 2 If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 3 If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 4 If LP is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu Sif Postscript PDF is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 6 Not available if PNE Port is set at Serial 7 f Real Time Clock RTC option is installed 8 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printer only 9 Based on WLAN radio installed 10 if a Feature File has been downloaded OpenPrint P7000 STD Postscript PDF Firmware SURE SCAN ACTIVE EMULATION 4 4 EMULATION page 121 page 123 Postscrip PDF LinePrinter IGP PGL amp LP IGP PGL IGP VGL amp LP IGP VGL 3 Postscript PDF 5 or Postscript PDF LinePrinter page 242 PRINTER CONTROL page 251 ADVANCED USER page 254 Optimize Barcode Alignment Hor Quiet Zone Ver Erase Zone Quiet Zone Fault Update PDF Barcodes On Page Ribbon End Point Open Platen BOF Bar Code Quality Tear Bar Dist View Function 8 Unidirectional Display Language Ptx Setup Option Hex Dump Mode Power up State Downloaded Fonts PMD Fault Power Stacker Auto Elevator if IGP is not installed Bcodes Optimized Accented Chars Auto Locking File System Set Sharing Shuttle Timeout Slow Paper Slew Alarm Power Saver Time Pwr Save Control Cancel Key Rcv Status Port Ret Status Port Set Lock Key RBN Low Warn Q RBN
23. 0290 Japan Kata 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK SFCC Char Logical Not Caret User Defined User Defined HTRN Start Code 1 Start Code 1 Stop Code MODE IBM SPC Char Set 0500 Internat 5 0037 English US 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0290 Japan Kata 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK SFCC Char Logical Not Caret User Defined User Defined HTRN Start Code 1 Start Code 1 Stop Code Allows you to set the device address from 0 through 6 The host directs data and commands on the twinax line to a specific device based on its unique device address After the address has been changed a POR status is sent to the host 155 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation SPC Type Allows you to select a specific type of Simple Protocol Convertor SPC Twinax emulation MODE 219 for Model 219 protocol convertor MODE P5000 for Printronix protocol convertor and MODE IBM for the IBM protocol convertor Printer Type Determines the SPC Twinax emulation Mode When set to Std Centronics IGP VGL or IGP PGL the Set Line Density and Set Print Density commands are translated into a Carriage Return CR and vertical format commands are ignored unless the EVFU is enabled SFCC Char Determines what character is printed when an EBCDIC Logical Not character Hex 5F is recei
24. 109 not all sets are available on the LJ500 printer or you can select pitch symbol set and typeface individually If the combination you choose matches one of the 92 predefined sets the ID submenu will reflect that selection If not the ID menu will display xx to indicate that the current character set does not match a pre defined set Set 0 is the default and its attributes are 10 cpi Data Processing typeface and Roman 8 symbol set Second Char Set Your printer can store an additional character set To toggle between them send the Shift In Decimal 15 to select the Primary character set or Shift Out Decimal 14 to select the Secondary character set Page Length Rep e Inches Page default All page length calculations are based on the inches displayed on the panel e Lines Page All changes in LPI or density will be changed accordingly The length of the page is the number of lines per inch or lpi For example if the form in use is 82 lines at 6 Ipi the page is physically 13 67 inches Since 13 67 inches is not selectable from the Length in Inches menu change the representation to lines then set the number of lines to 82 The inches menu will display 13 6 inches although the printer internally keeps the exact form length of 13 67 inches Max Line Width Set the maximum line width at 13 2 inches default or 13 6 inches Face CPI Delay Allows the combination of different font densities on the same line e En
25. 217 Chapter 4 218 IGP VGL Emulation LP Font e Disable default The IGP VGL uses its default half dot font which is slightly different from the standard bitmap font used by LP at 12 13 15 and 17 cpi e Enable The IGP VGL uses the same font as used by LP at all cpi MSI Check Digit e Print default The check digit is appended at the end of the printable data field for MSI barcodes Don t Print The check digit for MSI barcodes does not print 125 Selection e 125 Odd Data default When an odd number of data is provided the default setting Leading Zero will add a zero to the beginning of the bar code data The setting Check Digit will add a check digit to the end of the bar code data so that the results add up to an even number of data e Convert Alpha Disable is the default When enabled each non digit 125 bar code character will convert to 0 NOTE If you use an Interleaved 2 5 barcode that automatically adds the check digit type code k or l IBARC type code INT2 5CD or INT2 5CDA the check digit is added regardless of how this parameter is set Al 00 Spaces This option is designated for EAN UCC 128 barcodes whose application identifier Al is 00 e Disable default The printable data field is printed with the Al enclosed in parentheses This is the standard EAN UCC 128 format e Enable The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated by spaces This option is
26. Default WEP Key 116 Internat Mode 115 Min Xfer Rate 114 Operation Mode 114 Power Mgmt 115 Preamble 115 Reset SSID Name 114 Reset WEP Keys 116 Reset WPA P Phs 117 Signal Strength 114 SSID Name 114 Transmit Power 115 WEP Key 1 116 WEP Key 2 116 WEP Key 3 116 WEP Key 4 116 WPA Cipher 117 WPA Mode 116 WPA P Phs 117 Word Length Serial submenu 100 WPA Cipher WLAN PARAMS Menu 117 WPA Mode WLAN PARAMS Menu 116 WPA P Phs WLAN PARAMS Menu 117 375 X x y BARCODES Not Found message 291 Y Year DATE Menu 264 Z Zero Tear Pedestal ZTP adjust paper guides 326 clear paper jams 335 forms type 334 load paper 328 menu 333 overview 325 paper jams 335 position paper 326 position paper out sensor 330 Set tear bar distance 331 set top of form 332 ZTP Data Time 333 ZTP Function 333 ZTP Platen Open 334 ZTP TearDistance 333 ZTP Wait Time 333 ZTP Data Time 78 333 ZTP Function 333 ZTP Platen Open 334 ZTP TearDistance 79 333 ZTP Wait Time 78 333 PDF 74 06 HOST REQUEST message 287 08 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT message 287 15 COMM CHECK message 287 15V PWR FAIL message 287 20 CPI Condensed Epson FX Emulation 184 Proprinter XL Emulation 180 22 INVALID ADDR message 287 23 5V PWR FAIL message 287 31 PAPER OUT TIMEOUT message 287 32 PAPER JAM TIMEOUT message 287 3270 Params 141 376 3270 Params menu Active Char Set 143 Change Case 144 Compatibil
27. Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 211 Chapter 4 IGP VGL Emulation 212 IGP VGL Submenu with PCL II EMULATION from page 123 Factory Default IGP VGL SFCC amp LPI Graphics Error Ignore DB8 Pwrup Options Handling Setup Control Char 6 see page 213 Error Msgs Ignore Nulls 5E 7 Enable Disable Ignore Mode 8 Disable Enable Disable 9 Error Markers Data Bit 8 Enable 10 Enable Enable Free Format Disable Disable Disable Offpage Errors Enable Disable Mgnum Conversion Enable Disable Barcode Errors Enable Enable Disable ISO PI Control Char Set 0 Printer PI 1 33 Disable Enable Host PI Disable Enable Max PI 16 Enable Disable IGP VGL Submenu with PCL II IGP VGL with PCL II Graphics Options Factory Default Graphics y Options from page 212 Slashes in Ignore Dots Append Truncate True Vert Absorb After Zeros Rotated Alpha 1 10 APY Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable Absorb All Disable Enable Enable Disable Enable Disable Absorb Motion UPC Rot Char Ignore Midline PY Convert Absorb After Descenders Size Spaces to U C APN Enable Adjusted Disable Disa
28. E32C CND 2 BP message 301 E32D CND 3 BP message 301 E32E CND 4 BP message 301 E32F CND 5 BP message 301 E32G CND 6 BP message 301 E32H CND 7 BP message 302 E33 WRITE BP message 302 E34 TRACE CMPLT message 302 E99 UNKNOWN INT message 302 F Face CPI Delay PCL II Emulation 231 Fault messages 286 A TO D OVERUN 288 ACCESS NULL PTR 288 ACTIVATE LOST 288 BUFFER OVERRUN 291 B00 STATUS SDRAM DETECTION 166MHZ 288 B01 STATUS 8245 SDRAM TEST 32MB 288 360 B10 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED 288 B11 ERROR RAM TEST FAILED 288 B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING 289 B13 ERROR NOT COMPATIBLE 289 B19 ERROR DC RETURNED 289 B20 STATUS 00 DOWNLOAD MODE 289 B21 STATUS PRINTER RESET 289 B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE 289 B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS CKSUM 289 B30 STATUS INITIALZING 289 B35 STATUS WAITING FOR EC STATUS 289 B40 ERROR SDRAMEE PROM CKSUM BAD 290 B41 ERROR DIM MEMORY NOT SDRAM 290 B42 ERROR SDRAM ROWS NOT ALLOWED 290 B43 ERROR SDRAM TOO MANY BANKS 290 B44 ERROR SDRAM NOT 64 BITS WIDE 290 B45 ERROR SDRAM IS WRONG VOLTAGE 290 B46 ERROR SDRAM HAS MIXED SIZES 290 B47 ERROR SDRAM LARGER THAN 256M 290 B49 ERROR SDRAM LOGICAL BANKS 290 B50 ERROR SDRAM LOGIC COMB BANKS 290 B50 XX CLEAR FLASH 290 B51 XX LOADING 291 B53 ERROR 12C NO ARBITRATION 291 B54 ERROR SDA LINE STUCK LOW 291 B55 STATUS SEND PROGRAM TO EC 291 CLEAR PAPER JAM 291 CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH 292 CLOSE PLATEN 2
29. EMULATION from page 76 Factory Default Values for standard printers Values for HD printers Postscript PDF Resolution Paper Size Paper Size Clip Page Move to TOF Gray Adjust Fault 120x144 DPI Custom Ignore Enable Disable 0 90x96 DPI Width Fault Disable At End of Job 10 to 10 180x180 DPI Length At End of Page 180x90 DPI PS CATONE 90x180 DPI Letter 120x120 DPI 2 Legal 90x90 DPI 2 Executive A3 A4 A5 A6 10x14 Inch 12x12 Inch 13 6x12 Inch Tabloid 11x17in JIS B5 US Folio No 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C6 Envelope ISO B5 238 Postscript PDF Interpreter The Postscript PDF data is handled by Ghostscript by Artifex an interpreter compatible with the following e Portable Document Format PDF 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 5 and 1 6 as defined in the Portable Document Format Reference Manual distributed by Adobe Systems Incorporated e PostScript TM Language Level 3 as defined in the PostScript Language Reference Third Edition ISBN 0 201 37922 8 published by Addison Wesley in mid 1999 Postscript PDF Interpreter Ghostscript includes a set of 35 scalable outline fonts in PostScript Type 1 format compatible in appearance and metrics with the fonts commonly distributed under the following names e Bookman demi demi italic light light italic e Courier plain oblique bold bold oblique e Avan
30. IBM host systems System 3x AS 400 and 3270 Mainframes The SPC will support the following third party models for Twinax MODE 219 MODE IBM and MODE PROLINE The printer emulations supported by the SPC are Twinax 5225 and Coax 3287 The SPC also provides a range of interfaces available in your line matrix printer Centronics Dataproducts Serial Coax and Twinax Also supported are Epson Proprinter P Series Serial Matrix IGP VGL and IGP PGL emulations The SPC has the ability to handle multiple print jobs concurrently through Coax Twinax and Parallel and Serial interfaces This is accomplished through the Auto Switching feature see page 88 Because of hardware restrictions Coax and Twinax cannot be selected together For more information consult the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual for the Simple Protocol Converter Option 125 Chapter 4 Coax Emulation Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation CTHI from page 124 Factory Default Valid only when the printer emulates 3287 Standard Coax Params Char Set Translation Active Char Prt Partial PA1 PA2 Select Tbl Set Line see page 127 Secondary Set Enable Primary Set Disable Buffer Early Print SCS Buffer Cancel PTX Cha
31. Print CFG Ld 66 Lines 11 0 Inches Current Config 12 96 Lines 12 0 Inches Factory Config 12 5 Inches Disable 13 0 Inches Power Up Config 15 5 Inches 16 0 Inches 2 0 10 5 Inches 229 Chapter 4 Primary Char set PCL Il Emulation Secondary Char Set from page 229 Symbol Set Roman 8 8U Turkish 8 8T Arab 8 8V Cyrillic 8R PC858 MtLi 13U MC Text 12J Roman 9 4U Latin 9 9N Win3 OLat 1 9U Hebrew Old Japan Postnet Katakana Post ASCII OU Math Sym 0A 0M LineDraw 0B OL ISO Den Nor OD Roman Ext OE ISO UK 1E ISO France OF ISO German 0G Hebrew 0H Japan ASCII OK Katakana 1K Block Char 1L OCR A 0O OCR B 10 ISO Swe Fin 0S ISO Spain 15S ISO Italian Ol ISO Portugu 4S Latin 1 ON Latin 2 2N Latin 5 5N Latin 6 6N Baltic 19L PC8 DanNor 11U PC8 Cd437 10U PC850 MtLi 12U PC851 LtGk 12G PC852 Lat2 17U PC Turkish 9T PC Hebrew 15H PC Lat Ara 10V PC Cyrillic 3R Win3 1Lat1 19U Win3 1Lat 2 9E Win3 1Lat 5 5T 230 from page 229 Symbol Set Math 8 8M same as Primary PS Math 5M Character Set Greek 7 12N Postnet4 15Y Postnet11 25 Greek 8 8G Hebrew 8 8H Katakana 8 8K DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859 7 PCL Il Emulation Primary Char Set You can select one of 92 pre defined character sets by ID although character sets range from 0
32. RESET IN PROGRESS message 311 Plot Mode Opt LG Emulation 237 PMD Paper Motion Detection Fault ADVANCED USER 256 PNE Port Number PRINTER MGMT Menu 265 PNE Port Timeout PRINTER MGMT Menu 265 PNE Port PRINTER MGMT Menu 265 Poll Character Serial submenu 101 Poll Response Serial submenu 101 Port Type Auto Switching submenu 89 Position Aft FF 4234 only 132 145 Postscript PDF Interpreter 238 Postscript PDF submenu Clip Page 241 Gray Adjust 242 Move to TOF 242 Paper Size 240 Paper Size Fault 241 Resolution 239 Pos on BC OvrSz ANSI Emulation menu 194 Power Consumption 320 Power Mgmt WLAN PARAMS Menu 115 Power On IGP PGL 202 Power requirements 17 Power Saver Time ADVANCED USER 258 Power Stacker ADVANCED USER Menu 256 POWER SUPPLY HOT message 311 Power Up F 215 Power Up X 215 Power Up PY 216 Powering on the printer 23 Power on S Mode 206 Power Up Config 84 Power Up Config 86 Power Up State ADVANCED USER Menu 255 Preamble WLAN PARAMS Menu 115 PREV or NEXT key 27 PREV NEXT key 27 Primary Char Set PCL II Emulation 231 Prime Signal Centronics Parallel submenu 93 Dataproducts submenu 96 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 90 Prime Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 271 Print Char Set 163 Print Config 85 Print IPDS Fonts IPDS Emulation 228 Print job cancel 28 Print Mode Opt LG Emulation 237 Print Quality 206 217 optimizing 58 Print speed o
33. The elimination of wasted forms between jobs can yield significant savings An ideal solution for supply chain and back office applications Available in three print speeds 500 line per minute 1000 line per minute 1500 line per minute and HD models Consumable Monitoring With PrintNet Enterprise The Integrated Print Management System works with PrintNet Enterprise PNE PNE allows a system administrator to remotely view the current consumable status of all printers PNE can be configured to deliver alerts on all consumable warnings When a ribbon reaches the low state PNE notifies the system administrator remotely via an automated e mail alert of the low condition This allows corrective action to be taken before the ribbon reaches its end of life If the ribbon is not changed an alert will again be initiated once the ribbon reaches the 096 end point Refer to your PrintNet Enterprise Remote Management Software manual for details Graphics Enhancements The IGP PGL and IGP VGL emulations allow you to create and store forms generate logos bar codes expanded characters and create other graphics Alphanumeric and bar code data are added as the form is printed These emulations are available as factory installed or field installed options For more information contact your authorized service representative Taking Care Of Your Printer Your printer will produce high print quality jobs if it is well taken care of Per
34. This license may be terminated by agreement between you and Printronix Inc or by Printronix Inc If you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not corrected within thirty 30 days after notice When this License is terminated you shall return to the place you obtained them the printer and all copies of the Software and documentation U S Government Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 242 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT NO CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY BY USING THIS PRINTER YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT User s Manual P7000 Cartridge Ribbon Printers PRINTRONIX This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright No part of this document may be reproduced copied translated or
35. Trickle Time Reset 16 Disable 1 4 sec Do Nothing 1 16 Enable 1 2 sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec Off Data Bit 8 e Enable default Allows access to the extended ASCII character set Disable The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a zero regardless of its actual setting PI Ignored The PI Paper Instruction signal is used to control vertical paper motion e Enable default Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as DVFU commands when the PI signal is true e Disable Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control codes Data Polarity The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your host computer e Standard default Does not expect the host computer to invert the data e Inverted Expects the data received on the data lines from the host computer to be inverted Ones become zeros and zeros become ones 95 Chapter 4 96 HOST INTERFACE Menu Resp Polarity The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity of your host computer e Standard default Does not invert the response signal Inverted Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer Latch Data On Specifies whether the data is read on the leading middle or trailing edge of the data strobe signal The default is Middle Prime Signal e Disable default The parallel port will not perform a warm start reboo
36. a LAN or WAN Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets 105 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP Menu Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device gateway that translates data between two incompatible networks which can include protocol translation MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for each printer It is read only DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting The options include Disable default 106 Enable ADAPTER Factory Default PARAMS from page 105 Novell Nest Serv NetBIOS Novell ASCII IPDS Protocol Type Protocol Frame Data Port Data Port Enable Auto Enable Ethernet 802 2 9100 5001 Disable Bindery Disable 802 2 Snap 1023 65535 1023 65535 NDS Auto Sensing Ethernet Il Ethernet 802 3 E Keep Alive Ethernet Job Control Timer Speed 3 Minutes Auto Select Standard 2 10 Minutes 10 Half Duplex Enhanced 10 Full Duplex Off 100 Half Duplex 100 Full Duplex You may enable or disable the Novell or NetBIOS Protocols within this menu as well as selecting which Novell Frame scheme to use in processing Nov
37. beneath the printer blocking cabinet vents Power back on the printer If this message recurs contact your authorized service representative ILL EXT BUS ACC No Illegal External Bus Contact your authorized service Access Firmware error representative on the controller board ILL INST ACCSS No Illegal Instruction Contact your authorized service Accessed Firmware error on the controller board representative 307 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User INTO FLASH the previous program from flash memory and is loading the new program into flash memory i Explanation lution Displayed Message Correct planatio Solutio ILLGL OPR ACCSS No Illegal Operand Contact your authorized service error on controller board INCOMPAT E NET Yes Incompatible network Install a compatible NIC to the Remove NIC interface card NIC is printer then reboot If this message installed still appears contact your authorized service representative INTAKE FAN FAULT Yes Sensors cannot detect Cycle power If the message current in fan circuit appears press ON LINE CLEAR If the message does not clear contact your authorized service representative INTERRUPT UNUSED No The controller board Cycle power If this message VECTOR 00 receives an interrupt it occurred once and never again you does not understand The can ignore it If th
38. modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputation Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all 347 Appendix E Software License Agreement The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter tr
39. 10cpi Latin 1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set Win CP 1255 PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Azeri Features IGP VGL Emulation Code V Graphics language VGL is an Intelligent Graphics Printing IGP software emulation designed for your Line Matrix printer The IGP Code V emulation of the QMS Code V Version II programming language produces online forms barcodes and alphanumeric text generation The graphics processing features are detailed below Features OnLine Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with the preprinted look for each application VGL programs control all graphics functions dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time Graphics capabilities include boxes vertical and horizontal solid and dashed lines with a variety of thickness logos and special alphanumeric print features Variable Barcodes allow the barcode for your application to print with standard or user defined ratios in vertical or horizontal orientations Available barcodes are Codabar Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 with Subsets A B and C and Code EAN UCC 128 EAN 8 EAN 13 Interleaved 2 of 5 MSI UPC A UPC E POSTNET PostBar Royal Mail and UPC Shipping POSTNET is available only in the horizontal direction A dark print mode is included for darker hig
40. 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice Sets English US English UK Austrian German German Alt Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Danish Alt Finnish Swedish Finnish Alt French International Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Portug Alt Spanish Spanish Alt Spanish Speak Swiss Fren Ger Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Turkish Old Latin 2 ROECE Yugoslavian Coax Emulation Factory Default 127 Chapter 4 128 Compatibility Op from page 126 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Factory Default CR At NL At Position Aft FF Last Char FF Null FF Validity MPP 1 MPP 1 4234 only Suppression On On Off On Off Off Off Off On Off On On Auto Skip FF After Job CR EM amp NL At End 3287 only Off Off On On On Off Char Set Select Specifies the print language used by the printer Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual Translation Tbl Prints out SCS and DSC DSE tables of the Coax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the Coax interface is selected as the current interface see HOXT INTEP AXE Mevo ov maye 87 Active Char Set Selects which group of character sets Primary or Secondary
41. 137 Character Set 167 ANSI Emulation menu 193 ASCII 323 Epson FX Emulation 184 Proprinter XL Emulation 180 Serial Matrix Emulation 176 Characteristics environmental 318 Cleaning exterior 281 interior 282 Cleaning requirements 281 CLEAR key 24 CLEAR PAPER JAM message 291 Clear to Send CTS RS 232 277 CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH message 292 Clip Page 241 Clock Skew WLAN KERBEROS Menu 118 CLOSE PLATEN message 292 Coax Emulation menu 126 Active Char Set 128 Buffer Print 134 Buffer Reprint 129 Cancel IGP DCU 129 Change Case 130 Char Set Select 128 Compatibility Op 131 Early Print Cmpl 129 Format Control 133 Host Override 133 Image Buf Size 131 Intervention Req 131 Max Print Width 134 PA1 128 PA2 129 Prt Partial Line 128 PTX Transparent 130 356 SCS Buffer Cntrl 129 Set Text Orientn 131 Translate Table 133 Translation Tbl 128 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation menu 124 Simple Prot Conv 125 Standard 124 Code Page Subset IPDS Emulation 228 COIL HOT message 292 Column 132 Wrap 153 Compatbl Mode 205 Compatibility Mode IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface 272 Compatibility Op 131 Auto Skip At End 132 146 CR at MPP 1 131 145 CR EM and NL 3287 only 146 CR EM amp NL 3287 only 133 FF After Job 133 146 FF Validity 132 146 Last Char FF 132 145 NL At MPP 1 131 145 Null Suppression 132 145 Position Aft FF 4234 only 132
42. 145 Compatibility Op 3270 Params menu 145 Compliance Energy Star 319 Component locations printer 21 Compressed CPI 204 Compressed Print P Series XQ Emulation 173 Config Print PCL II Emulation 233 Configuration Main Menu 47 overview 47 Configurations custom 48 default 48 saving 53 Configuration Auto Save 53 CONFIG CONTROL Menu 85 CONFIG CONTROL menu Delete Config 86 Load Config 85 Name Configs 86 Power Up Config 86 Print Config 85 Protect Configs 86 Reset Cfg Names 86 Save Config 85 Contact information 15 Control Code 06 165 P Series XQ Emulation 172 Serial Matrix Emulation 175 Control Control Code 08 165 Control panel 24 Control panel keys CANCEL 25 CLEAR 24 ENTER 26 JOB SELECT 26 ON LINE 24 PAPER ADVANCE 25 PREV or NEXT 27 PREV NEXT 27 PRT CONFIG 26 SET TOF 26 UP or DOWN 26 UP DOWN 27 VIEW EJECT key 25 Conventions manual 13 CPI LPI Select 159 ANSI Emulation menu 190 CR at MPP 1 131 145 CR Edit 200 CRTG COMM ERR message 292 CRTG MISSING message 292 CRTG NOT SETx message 292 CR EM and NL 3287 only 146 CR EM amp NL 3287 only 133 CR LG Emulation 236 CTL VOLT FAIL message 292 Custom configurations 48 Customer Support Center 15 337 C128 Mode Comp 220 C39 Compatbl 204 220 D Darker print Integrated Print Management System 42 Data Bit 8 222 Centronics Parallel submenu 92 Dataproducts s
43. 152 Buffer Print 153 Buffer Reprint 154 Column 132 Wrap 153 Intervention Req 153 Logical Buf Size 153 NL At MPP 1 154 PA1 153 PA2 154 SPC Null Supp 154 SPC Space Supp 154 Translation Tbl 153 Usr Defined HTRN 153 SPC Null Supp 154 SPC Space Supp 154 SPC Twx Params 155 Buffer Print 156 SPC Type 156 Translation Tbl 156 SPC Type 156 EVFU 156 Printer Type 156 SFCC Char 156 SPC Char Set 156 Usr Defined HTRN 156 Special information 14 Specifications interfaces 321 label 318 paper 317 Speed print 321 SPX FOUND ERROR KEY NOT DETECTED message 314 SPX NOT NEEDED OPTIONS ENABLED message 314 SSID Name WLAN PARAMS Menu 114 STACK FAULT message 314 STACK OVERFLOW message 314 STACK UNDERFLOW message 314 STACKER FULL message 314 STACKER JAM message 314 Standard CTHI 124 Status Port Numb PRINTER MGMT Menu 265 Stop Bits 1 Serial submenu 100 Submenu IGP PGL 197 IGP PGL with LG 199 IGP PGL with PCL II 198 IGP VGL 210 IGP VGL with LG 214 IGP VGL with PCL II 212 373 Subnet mask Adapter Address Menu 105 Ethernet Address Menu 109 WLAN Address Menu 112 Supplies Department 15 337 SURE SCAN menu Quiet Zone Fault 248 Switch Out On Auto Switching submenu 89 Symbol Set Print PCL II Emulation 233 System Memory DIAGNOSTICS 263 T TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN message 314 TCB CORRUPTED message 314 TCP PORT BUSY message 315 Tear Bar Dis
44. 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C Figure 26 Hex Dump Sample 285 Chapter 7 286 Diagnosing Problems Fault Messages If a fault condition occurs in the printer the status indicator on the control panel flashes on and off and the message display indicates the specific fault Fault messages are summarized in Table 17 Displayed faults fall into one of two categories Operator correctable Field service required For the operator correctable faults follow the suggested solution in Table 17 After correcting the displayed fault press the CANCEL key to clear the error message and status indicator and resume printing If the fault message reappears contact your authorized service representative NOTE The Maintenance Manual provides more detailed information and procedures for resolving fault conditions However many of the procedures described there must be performed only by your authorized service representative Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention If a fault is not correctable by the operator the fault message is followed by an asterisk This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is needed You may try two steps to clear the fault before calling your authorized service representative 1 Setthe printer power switch to O Off wait 15 seconds then turn the printer on again Run your print job again If the message does not appear it was a false indication and no further attention i
45. 296 E07 ILLEGAL INS 297 E08 FLOATINGPNT 297 E12 SYSTEM CALL 297 E13 TRACE INT 297 E16 ITRANS MISS 297 E17 DLOAD MISS 298 E18 DSTORE MISS 298 E19 BREAKPOINT 298 E20 SYS MANAGE 298 E30 DEBUGGER 298 E31A EVENT 0 BP 299 E31B EVENT 1 BP 299 E31C EVENT 2 BP 299 E31D EVENT 3 BP 299 E31E EVENT 4 BP 299 E31F EVENT 5 BP 300 E31G EVENT 6 BP 300 E31H EVENT 7 BP 300 E32A CND 0 BP 300 E32B CND 1 BP 300 E32C CND 2 BP 301 E32D CND 3 BP 301 E32E CND 4 BP 301 E32F CND 5 BP 301 E32G CND 6 BP 301 E32H CND 7 BP 302 E33 WRITE BP 302 361 E34 TRACE CMPLT 302 E99 UNKNOWN INT 302 FIRMWARE ERROR 305 FM HEADER ERROR 305 FRAMING ERROR 306 FREEFORM OFF 306 FREEFORM ON OFF HOLD KEY PWRUP 306 GRF CHECK ERROR PRESS STOP 306 HAMMER COIL BAD 307 HAM COIL OPEN 307 HB NOT INSTALLD 307 HMR BANK FAN FLT 307 H00 PCI SLOT 306 H01 PCI J12 306 H02 PCI J13 306 ILL EXT BUS ACC 307 ILLGL OPR ACCSS 308 INCOMPAT E NET 308 INTAKE FAN FAULT 308 INTERRUPT UNUSED VECTOR 00 308 INVALID ACTIVATE 308 INVALID COMMAND 308 LO DRV SHORT 308 LOAD PAPER 308 LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX 308 LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH 308 NEW SPX DETECTED 309 NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED 309 ON LINE 309 ONLINE CU TIMED OUT 309 ONLINE 28 CU NOT ENAB 309 ONLINE 8344 FAILED 309 PAP BAD TABLE 309 PAP BSY TOO LNG 309 PAP FIFO OVERFL 309 PAP FIFO UNDRFL 310 PAP ILLGL ST 310 PAP INCMPL ENER
46. 310 PAP INVLD CMD 310 PAP INVLD PARM 310 PAP NOT SCHED 310 PAP NT AT SPEED 310 PAP UNEXP INT 310 PAPER REQUESTED A4 310 PARAMETER ERROR 310 PARITY ERROR 310 PLAT INV CMD 310 PLAT INV PARM 310 PLAT INV STATE 311 PLEASE WAIT RESET IN PROGRESS 311 POWERSUPPLY HOT 311 PRINTER HOT 311 PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL 311 PROTECTED INSTR 311 PS PDF ERROR JOB ABORTED 311 PWRSUPP VOLT 311 QUEUE OVERRUN 311 RBN AT END POINT 311 REGIONx MISMATCH 312 REMOVE USED SPX 312 RESTORING BOOT CODE 312 RIB INVLD CMD 312 RIBBON DRIVE 312 RIBBON STALL 312 RIBBON UNDER 2 312 RWP DOWNLOAD 312 SCS COMMAND ERROR 312 SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED 313 SECURITY VIOLATION 312 SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR 313 SF ERROR 313 SHTL MISMATCH 313 SHUTL INV CMD 313 SHUTL INV PARM 313 SHUTL OVR SPEED 313 SHUTTLE JAM 313 SHUTTLE STALL 313 SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED 314 SOFTWARE ERROR CYCLE POWER 314 SPX FOUND ERROR KEY NOT DETECTED 314 SPX NOT NEEDED OPTIONS ENABLED 314 SSTACKER JAM 314 STACK OVERFLOW 314 STACK UNDERFLOW 314 STACKER FAULT 314 STACKER FULL 314 TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN 314 TCB CORRUPTED 314 TCP PORT BUSY 315 TIP MISMATCH 315 UNDEF INTERRUPT 315 UNDFNED OPCODE 315 UNKNOWN RBN 1 315 UP DRV SHORT 315 WAITING FOR ETHERNET ADAPTER 315 WELD NOT DETECT 315 WELD RESET ERROR 315 WELD SNSR MISSING
47. 44 48XX ANSI CPI LPI Font Page Define CR Auto LF Define LF Select Attributes Format Code Code Select CPI see page 189 see page 189 CR CR Disable LF CR LF 10 0 CPI CR CR LF Enable LF LF 12 0 CPI 13 3 CPI 15 0 CPI 16 7 CPI 17 1 CPI Select LPI 6 0 LPI 8 0 LPI 3 0 LPI 4 0 LPI Character Printer ESCc Reset Cmd Received Received Set Select Sequence CFG Ld CR DEL see page 189 ON DC1 Enable Disable Observe Observe OFF DC3 Disable Power up config Ignore Ignore Disable Current config Factory config Private Pos on BC Check Barcode PUM Truncate PI Mode BC OvrSz Digit darkmode Default Slew Set 2 Set to top By host Enable Decipoints Truncate at TOF Set 1 Set to bottom By printer Disable Lines columns Disable ETX ACK Disable Immediate After Print 188 Font Attributes from page 188 Typeface Prop Bold Print Slashed Spacing Zero Data Processing Disable Disable Disable Gothic NLQ Enable Enable Enable Char Graphics High Speed Italics NLQ Courier NLQ OCR A OCR B Character Set from page 188 Latin 1 8859 1 Cyrillic 8859 5 IBM PC 2 CP 437 IBM PC 2 CP 850 Page Format Slavic CP 852 from page 188 Cyrillic CP 855 Fr Can CP 863 Russian CP 866 Margins Form Form Width Greek CP 851 Length Turkish CP 853 Portug CP 860 Left Margin Funct of lines Function of CPI Arabic CP 864 0 columns 66 lines 136 Ch
48. Available Firmware Types and Options Firmware Type ACIES capi EMULATION yP EMUL 1 EMULATION 2 y IPDS IGP PGL N A CTHI IPG PGL P7000 STD LinePrinter IPDS IGP VGL N A CTHI IGP VGL LinePrinter IGP PGL N A IGP PGL LinePrinter P7000 TN IGP VGL N A IGP VGL LinePrinter NOTE Default Selection 1 The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL VGL option is installed 2 The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options IGP PGL amp LP and IGP VGL amp LP when the PGL VGL option is installed Otherwise LinePrinter replaces the options The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed 121 Chapter 4 ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS Menus Table 7 Available Firmware Types and Options Firmware Type Ae EC ACIS EMULATION irmw YP EMUL 1 EMULATION 2 H PCL II PCL II IGP PGL amp LP IGP PGL P7000 PCL II N A LinePrinter IGP VGL amp LP IGP VGL LinePrinter LG LG IGP PGL amp LP IGP PGL P7000 LG N A LinePrinter IGP VGL amp LP IGP VGL LinePrinter 44 48XX ANSI 44 48XX ANSI IGP PGL amp LP IGP PGL P7000 ANSI N A LinePrinter IGP VGL amp LP IGP VGL LinePrinter Postscript PDF Postscript PDF IGP PGL amp LP IGP PGL OpenPrint P7000 STD N A LinePrinter IGP VGL amp LP IGP
49. Bar code resolution is set at 60 x 72 Tear Bar Dist Distance Allows fine and course adjustment of the tear bar position For a pedestal model printer using the top paper exit the default 7 46 inches is used You can specify 4 5 to 10 5 inches in 01 inch increments to accommodate variations in cover and form design View Function e Disable default Disables the View Function which allows you to press the VIEW EJECT key to move the last data printed to the tractor area for viewing e Enable Enables the View Function NOTE Default setting is Enable for Indian language printers Unidirectional The Unidirectional feature affects both print quality and printing speed By setting this feature you can configure the printer to print in both directions of the shuttle sweep bidirectional or to print in one direction only unidirectional e Disable default The printer will print all data in both directions of the shuttle sweep bidirectional printing This choice produces higher printing speed e Enable The printer will print all data in only one direction of the shuttle sweep unidirectional printing Although enabling this feature reduces print speed it enhances the vertical alignment of dots and produces cleaner sharper barcodes and text Display Language This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the LCD English German French Italian Spanish or Portuguese The factory default is English
50. Character Set Menu with PCL II Character Set from page 164 IBM PC Primary Subset ASCII USA French German English Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese French Canadian Latin American Danish II Spanish II Latin Am II Extended Subset Code Page 437 Code Page 850 Extended Subset Multinational ASCII USA EBCDIC ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult OCR A OCR B Latin 2 8859 2 Latin 2 852 Bulgarian Latin 9 8859 15 Polish POL1 DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859 7 PC851 LtGk 12G Greek 7 12N Greek 8 8G Hebrew Old Hebrew New Hebrew DEC Factory Default P Series Emulation With LG P Series Character Set Menu with LG Character Set from page 165 IBM PC Primary Subset ASCII USA French German English Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese French Canadian Latin American Danish II Spanish II Latin Am II Extended Subset Code Page 437 Code Page 850 Multinational ASCII USA EBCDIC ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset ASCII USA German Swedish Danish Norweigian Finnish English Dutch French Spanish Italian Turkish Japanese Extended Subset Multinational Barcode 10 CPI Mult DP 10 CPI Mult DP 12 CPI Mult LQ 10 CPI Greek DP 10 CPI Greek DP 12 CPI Greek LQ 10 CPI Grap DP 10 CPI Grap LQ 10 CPI Sci DP 10 CPI Sci DP 12 CPI Sci LQ 10 CPI Factory Default DEC
51. Customer Support Center Please have the following information available prior to calling the Printronix Customer Support Center e Model number e Serial number located on the back of the printer e Installed options i e interface and host type if applicable to the problem e Configuration printout Press PRT CONFIG on the control panel then press ENTER e Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer e Description of the problem be specific e Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem faxing of these samples may be required Americas 714 368 2686 Europe Middle East and Africa 31 24 6489 410 Asia Pacific 65 6548 4114 China 86 800 999 6836 http www printronix com support aspx Printronix Supplies Department Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies Americas 800 733 1900 Europe Middle East and Africa 33 0 1 46 25 19 07 Asia Pacific 65 6548 4116 or 65 6548 4182 China 86 400 886 5598 India 800 102 7869 http www printronix com public supplies default aspx Chapter 1 Contact Information Corporate Offices Printronix Inc 15345 Barranca Parkway Irvine CA 92618 U S A Phone 714 368 2300 Fax 714 368 2600 Printronix Inc c o Printronix Nederland BV Bijsterhuizen 11 38 6546 AS Nijmegen The Netherlands Phone 31 24 6489489 Fax 31 24 6489499 Printronix Schweiz GmbH 42 Changi South Street 1 Changi
52. DEC Technical ISO Katakana 7 Bit Hebrew 7 Bit Turkish Greek Suppl Hebrew Suppl Turkish Suppl GR Char Set DEC Suppl DEC Technical VT100 Graphics ISO Katakana ISO Latin 1 ISO Latin 2 ISO Latin 5 ISO Latin 9 ISO Cyrillic ISO Greek ISO Hebrew Hebrew Suppl Turkish Suppl LG Emulation Font Select a default font style and character set for the LG emulation as follows Style This option allows you to specify a print quality that includes a characters per inch cpi and lines per inch lpi setting in the format Type cpi Ipi The default setting is DP 10 6 Data Processing 10 cpi 6 Ipi The print quality types you may choose from are as follows DP Data Processing standard quality CORESPON Correspondence near letter quality COMPRESS Compressed vertically compressed for printing long graphs and charts OCR A amp OCR B Optical Character Recognition sets A and B HS High Speed Draft quality for high speed printing Character Set This option allows you to select a character set The character set you select can be any of the Digital Multinational sets which include the U S ASCII set and several foreign language and special character sets Vert Forms Bot Frm 66 6 default This option sets the bottom margin for the forms You must specify the bottom margin in lines at 6 lines per inch ranging from 0 to 198 lines 33 inches The default setting is 66 Press the right arrow to increas
53. Driven by the printer A signal from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data transfer Printer Busy Peripheral Acknowledge nWait Driven by the printer Indicates the printer cannot receive data Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble mode Acknowledge Data Request nAcknowledge Reverse Driven by the printer Indicates the printer is in a fault condition Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble mode Xflag Driven by the printer A high true level indicating the printer is ready for data transfer and the printer is on line Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble mode Host Busy Host Acknowledge NDStrobe Driven by the host Activates auto line feed mode Peripheral Logic High Driven by the printer When the line is high the printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state When the line is low the printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state nReverse Request Driven by the host Resets the interface and forces a return to Compatibility mode idle phase 274 Terminating Resistor Configurations nData Available nPeripheral Request Driven by the printer Indicates the printer has encountered an error Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble mode 1284 Active nAStrobe Driven by the host A peripheral device is selected Host Logic High Driven by the host When set to high the host indicates all of its signals are in a valid state When set
54. ENTER Indicator CLEAR ADVANCE V EWEJECT CANCEL Figure 5 Control Panel Control Panel Keys I ON LINE CLEAR Toggles the printer between online and offline modes If a fault condition exists pressing this key will clear the fault message and return the printer from fault mode to offline mode NOTE If the fault condition is not corrected before pressing this key the fault message will reappear when attempting to place the printer online Control Panel Keys o Vic PAPER ADVANCE Performs advance to top of form as defined by the current active form length The key works both online and offline e f online with data in the printer buffer the data will print and then the paper will move to the next top of form e Inthe fault state PAPER ADVANCE will advance the paper The first press moves to the top of the next available form All subsequent presses advances one forms length as defined by the current active forms length 1 VIEW EJECT When the printer is online or offline pressing this key executes the view or eject function depending on whether the printer is a cabinet or a pedestal or zero tear pedestal If online with data in the printer buffer the data prints and the key functions as described below If in a fault state this key will be ignored e View Function for cabinet models pressing the VIEW EJECT key moves the last data printed to the tractor area for viewing While in the view state the
55. Embedded Only No Center 0 to 0 99 inch 0to 0 99 inch Disable Always Test Right Barcodes On Bcodes Page Optimized Auto xxxxxx 1 2 20 242 OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu Optimize Barcode Defines whether the barcode optimization feature is active e Yes default Activates the barcode optimization feature e No Deactiviates the barcode optimization feature e Test Boxes will print around all barcodes that are detected and optimized This provides a simple method to confirm that the software correctly detects and optimizes all the barcodes on any given form NOTE Barcodes will not optimize at densities of 96 dpi or less For densities with one dimension more than 96 and one 96 or less barcodes will only replace in one orientation For instance 180x90 picket fence barcodes will be optimized and 90x180 ladder barcodes will be optimized Alignment Defines how the optimized replacement barcode will be positioned with regard to the original barcode position if no obstacles exist to this placement It defines the first attempted position of the replacement barcode If the first attempted position causes a replacement barcode to interfere with any other form elements text graphics or dots the replacement barcode automatically adjusts away from these interfering elements until requested horizontal quiet zones are observed Selections for this menu are as follows e Left The first attempted position of the leftmost bar o
56. Hold the cartridge at an angle so that the rear side nearest you is lower than the side with the ribbon Find the two tabs on the outside of the cartridge and place them into the corresponding slots on the air shroud assembly see Figure 20 44 Changing Ribbon Cartridge Ribbon Cartridge Ribbon Mask Hammerbank Cover Ribbon e2 8 8L Ribbon Tension Knob Ribbon Cartridge Figure 21 The Ribbon Cartridge Snapped in Place 7 Rockthe cartridge downward making sure that the ribbon goes between the guide and the mask see Figure 21 You will feel it snap into place CAUTION Make sure that the ribbon does not twist or fold over 8 Turn the ribbon tension knob clockwise a few times to make sure the ribbon tracks correctly in the ribbon path 9 Close the platen lever 10 Close the printer top cover 11 Press the I ON LINE CLEAR key twice to return the printer to operation 45 Chapter 3 _ Integrated Print Management System 46 4 The Configuration Menus Configuration Overview IMPORTANT To print data the printer must respond correctly to signals and commands received from the host computer Configuration is the process of matching the printer s operating characteristics to those of the host computer and to specific tasks such as printing labels or printing on different sizes of paper The characteristics which define the printer s response to signals and commands received from the host co
57. If a transition from buffer full to empty or online to offline occurs during a poll delay the new printer state will be sent at the end of the poll delay Serial Submenu The response characters are described in Table 4 Table 4 Series1 1 Char Response Characters Printer State Response Online and Buffer Empty CR Online and Buffer Full 3 Offline and Buffer Empty 0 Offline and Buffer Full 2 SERIES1 2 CHAR This protocol behaves exactly the same as the Series1 Char except there is a two character response to the host The response characters are described in Table 5 Table 5 Series1 2 Char Response Characters Printer State Response Online and Buffer Empty 1 CR Online and Buffer Full 3 CR Offline and Buffer Empty 0 CR Offline and Buffer Full 2 CR ENQ ACK Enquiry Acknowledge The host controls the flow of data by sending an ENQ Enquiry decimal 5 Control E approximately every 80 characters When the printer is ready for more data it replies with an ACK Acknowledge decimal 6 Control F DTR The printer controls the data flow by sending this hardware signal to the host If there is enough room in the printer buffer the printer will send a high signal if the buffer is full the printer will send a low signal DTR tells the host if it is safe to send more data If the host sends data during an unsafe condition data will be lost DTR is not available when RS 422 is se
58. Ignore Ch 1 Disable Offpage Errors 0 0 255 Enable Disable Ignore Ch 2 Power up PY Enable 0 0 255 Disable Barcode Errors Data Bit 8 Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Font Set PI Control Prt to Emulate see page 224 Printer Pl Disable Disable MVP MVP 150B Enable L150 Host Pl P3040 Disable P6000 Enable P9000 Max PI 16 Enable Disable Graphics Options from page 210 IGP VGL Graphics Options Submenu IGP VGL Submenu Factory Default Slash 0 Ignore Dots Append Truncate True Vert Absorb After Rotated Alpha 1 10 APY Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable Absorb Motion Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Absorb All Disable UPC Rot Char Ignore Midline PY Print Expanded Descenders Size Spaces Quality Font Enable Adjusted Disable Disable Data Processing Scalable Disable Not Adjusted Enable Enable High Block LP Font MSI Check 125 Al 00 Width Limit Absorb After Digit Selection Spaces APN Disable Print 125 Odd Data Disable Disable Disable Enable Don t Print Leading Zero Enable Enable Enable Check Digit Convert Alpha Disable Enable IGP110 Auto FF PDF Size C128 Mode C39 Ignore Lxx Compatbl at PN Comp Comp Compatbl Cmd
59. PARAMS Menu 117 Resistor configurations terminating 275 Resistors installation 276 removal 276 Resistors terminating location of 276 371 Resolution 82 239 Resp Polarity Centronics Parallel submenu 93 Dataproducts 96 RESTORING BOOT CODE message 312 Ret Status Port ADVANCED USER Menu 258 RIB INVLD CMD message 312 Ribbon Cartridge changing 43 RIBBON DRIVE message 312 Ribbon End Point 83 Ribbon End Point PRINTER CONTROL 251 RIBBON STALL message 312 RIBBON UNDER 2 message 312 Rot Char Size 217 RS 232 277 Clear to Send CTS 277 Data Carrier Detect DCD 277 Data Set Ready DSR 277 Data Terminal Ready DTR 277 Receive Data RD 277 Request to Send RTS 277 Transmit Data TD 277 RS 232 Serial Interfaces 276 RS 422 278 RS 422 Serial Interfaces 276 RWP DOWNLOAD message 312 S Save Config 84 85 Save Auto 53 Saving new configurations 53 Saving parameter settings 48 Scalable Size 205 SCS Buffer Cntrl 129 SCS COMMAND ERROR message 312 Second Char Set PCL II Emulation 231 SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED message 313 SECURITY VIOLATION message 312 Select CPI 80 Select Font 200 207 Select LPI 80 201 Select SO Char 203 372 SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR message 313 Serial Interfaces RS 232 276 RS 422 276 Serial Matrix Character Set menu 177 Serial Matrix Emulation 174 Alt Set 80 9F 176 Auto LF 175 Character Set 176 Control Code 06 175 Defi
60. PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING 351 Appendix E Software License Agreement REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Artifex Portions Software Copyright Notices Portions Copyright O 2001 2009 Artifex Software Inc This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions Copyrig
61. Shuttle Type File System Set Sharing Shuttle Timeout Slow Paper Slew Alarm Power Saver Time Pwr Save Control Cancel Key Ret Status Port Set Lock Key RBN Low Warn Q RBN Low Action RBN End Action DATE 9 PRINTER MGMT page 264 page 265 Hour PNE Port Minute Mgmt Protocol Year PNE Port Number Month PNE Port Timeout Day Status Port Numb 5 Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial 6 If Real Time Clock RTC option is installed 7 Available for pedestal printers only 8 Based on WLAN radio installed 9 If a Feature File has been downloaded Chapter 4 Main Menu P7000 TN Firmware OFFLINE QUICK ZTP CONFIG HOST NETWORK SETUP SETTINGS CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP page 77 page 333 page 85 page 87 page 105 HOST INTERFACE ZTP Function Load Config Auto Switching Adapter Address 1 Adapter Address 1 ZTP TearDistance Save Config Centronics Adapter Params 1 Ethernet Address ZTP Data Time Print Config Dataproducts Ethernet Address WLAN Address ZTP Wait Time Delete Config IEEE 1284 Ethernet Params ZTP DataTime 9 ZTP Platen Open Power Up Config Serial WLAN Address ZTP WaitTime 9 Protect Configs E Net Adapter WLAN Params ZTP TearDist 9 Name Configs Ethernet WLAN Kerberos 66 ACTIVE IGP EMUL PGL SFCC VGL SFCC Printer Protocol Form Length Form Width Select CPI Select LPI P Series SFCC Ribbon End Point Save Config P
62. The SPX is used at power up only and is not left in the printer during normal operation Because it is a single use disposable item the user is not required to return it to the vendor or manufacturer How To Program The Security Key Power off the printer 2 Oncabinet models open the rear door On pedestal models refer to Figure 24 to locate the debug port at the rear of the printer 3 Insert the SPX into the debug port as shown 279 Chapter 6 Reprogramming The Security Key azavest Debug Port cnc SPX Figure 24 Inserting The SPX into the Debug Port 280 Power on the printer The printer will begin its boot up sequence When the printer detects a valid SPX the control panel displays NEW SPX DETECTED PRESS ENTER NOTE If an error message displays find the message in the Message List in 6 10 11 Chapter 7 and follow the troubleshooting instructions Press the ENTER key to activate the reprogramming sequence The display will read PROGRAMMING PLEASE WAIT When the security key is reprogrammed the display will read REMOVE USED SPX THEN PRESS ENTER Remove the SPX from the debug port at the rear of the printer Press the ENTER key The printer will reboot itself and you may resume normal printing You may need to download a new program file to use the new feature You may need to set additional menu parameters for any new features that have been added or enabled
63. When the printer receives a host data stream reset command ESC Q or ESC K in addition to resetting printer variables the selected configuration is loaded e Disable default The active emulation parameters are loaded when the reset command is executed e Power Up Config The power up configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed e Current Config The currently selected configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed e Factory Config The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed Set Substitution When this option is activated the character set overlay in RAM is activated This can also be accomplished through a host command of SFCC RX In either case a flag is set indicating that the substitution table is active If the power up configuration has Ld Set at Pwrup and Set Substitution both enabled the character set overlay is automatically activated at power up or during a soft reset See the LinePrinter Plus Programmer s Reference Manual for more information Barcode x offset e Disable default e Enable Allows text to print next to a barcode when xxxx and yyyy are not set to the origin Barcode Height Disable default e Enable If Barcode x offset is enabled the barcode height follows P5000 legacy barcode behavior 163 Chapter 4 Printer Protocol from page 164 P Series LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II P Serie
64. a numbered configuration Example 1 on page 54 or a named configuration Example 2 on page 56 that can be stored and loaded later for future use If you do not save your configuration using the Auto Save or this option all of your parameter changes will be erased when you power off the printer Once you have saved a custom configuration using this option it will not be lost if you power off the printer You can load a configuration for a specific print job see Load Config on page 85 You can also modify and resave it You may want to print your configurations see Print Config on page 85 and store them in a safe place such as inside the printer cabinet If the Protect Configs parameter is enabled and you try to resave an existing configuration the new configuration will not be saved until the existing configuration has been deleted see Delete Config on page 86 NOTE Once you change active emulations any changes to the previously selected emulation will be gone unless they have been saved 53 Chapter 4 Example 1 Configuration Overview This example shows how to save a configuration as a numbered configuration then later print it Step Press LCD Notes 1 Make sure the printer is on 2 ON LINE CLEAR OFFLINE i l QUICK SETUP 3 ENTER SWITCH Allows you to make configuration changes lt i UNLOCKED OFFLINE QUICK SETUP OFFLINE 9 ENTER CONFIG CONTROL CONFIG CONTROL Load C
65. able to handle both jobs in the order they were received The user does not have to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs Auto Switching Submenu Port Type Select the types of parallel serial and or C T interfaces which are connected to the printer For example if your printer is attached to one host with a Centronics connection and a second host with an RS 422 serial connection you would select Centronics under the Parallel Hotport menu RS 422 under the Serial Hotport menu and Disable under the C T Hotport menu Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed In order to support this feature the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use For example if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then receives a second print job from the parallel port the data from the parallel port will trickle bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast This function is not applicable
66. and lock it You can also use the paper scale to count columns Reload Paper Tractor Door Figure 12 Loading Paper onto the Sprockets 22 Unlock the right tractor 23 Load the paper onto the sprockets and close the tractor door If necessary slide the right tractor to remove paper slack or to adjust for various paper widths Then lock the tractor SN is Upper Paper N RS Guide S N N x Upper Paper SESS ral Wire 7T Guide 2 Paper Slot Ny E qorve8l T oc Cabinet Model Pedestal Model Figure 13 Using the Paper Guide to Orient the Paper 35 Chapter 3 36 Operational Procedures 24 25 26 Pedestal models Using the vertical position knob to move the paper up guide the paper over the upper paper guide and through the slot to the rear of the top cover For pedestal models with the Quick Access Cover refer to the Quick Setup Guide for paper exiting options Press PAPER ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds properly beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide Feed sufficient paper to ensure the paper stacks correctly Cabinet models Open the cabinet rear door Make sure the paper is aligned with the label in the output area inside the cabinet Close
67. and the space around the character e Disable default Each character cell is printed with the same width Each column in the printed text will line up This example is printed with proportional spacing disabled e Enable The width of each character cell varies with the width of the character For example i takes less space to print than m Using proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed documents which gives text a typeset appearance This example is printed with proportional spacing enabled Bold Print e Disable default Text is printed normally e Enable Text is printed with a heavy line thickness Italic Print Disable default Text is printed normally e Forward Slant Text is printed with a forward slant Backward Slant Text is printed with a backward slant Slashed Zero This parameter allows you to print the numeral O with or without the slash This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B e Disable default Zero is printed without a slash Enable Zero is printed with a slash 161 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II Text Position Specifies where the text will be positioned in the line space When set to Top of Line text will be positioned at the top of the line space When set to Bottom of Line the text will be positioned as if it were at the bottom of a 6 Ipi line space The following example shows both Top of Line and B
68. arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0 so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected e Top Mrg 6 0 This option sets the top margin for the forms You must specify the top margin in lines at 6 lines per inch ranging from 0 to 198 lines 33 inches The default setting is O Press the right arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and bottom margins do not cross each other Horiz Forms e Left Mgr 0 00 default This sets the left margin for the forms You must specify the left margin in 1 10 inch increments from 0 to 13 1 inches The default value is 0 Press the right arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other Right Mrg 13 2 This sets the right margin for the forms You must specify the right margin in 1 10 inch increments from 0 1 to 13 2 inches The default value is 13 2 Press NEXT to increase the value PREV to decrease the value and ENTER to change units The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other Page Length Rep e Inches Page default Allows the user to set the page length in inches e Lines Page Allows the user to set the pa
69. barcode data fields can be identified and automatically incremented or decremented by any amount beginning from a specified reference point Scaling Capability permits graphic elements such as corners or boxes to retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi Multinational Character Sets provide many international character sets each 96 characters in length This feature also allows you to create your own character sets using characters defined and stored in memory 195 Chapter 4 IGP PGL Emulation Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets also containing 96 characters in length These are also stored in memory Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel You can select PGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by control codes as explained in the GP PGL Programmer s Reference Manual The PGL parameters are described on the following pages Parameters marked with an asterisk indicate the default value The printer must be offline to enter the configuration structure Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another level in the configuration or exit the configuration menu completely Configure the IGP PGL according to your specific requirements IMPORTANT BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP PGL print a configuration sheet to see all of the current settings 196 IGP PGL
70. bus H02 PCI J13 No The controller board is Contact your authorized service representative 306 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message E Explanation Solution Online etc No Status message The No action is required If the Half Speed Mode controller samples the message appears often contact operating temperature of your authorized service key components of the representative print mechanism When higher than normal temperatures are sensed the print speed is automatically reduced by 50 and the message sent the LCD When the components cool down the print speed returns to 10096 and the message clears HAM COIL OPEN No Hammer Coil Open Contact your authorized service Electrical malfunction of representative one or more hammer coils HAMMER COIL BAD No Hammer coil failed Contact your authorized service etc current test at power up representative HAMMER SHORT No Electrical malfunction of Contact your authorized service See User Manual one or more hammer representative coils HB NOT INSTALLD No Hammer Bank Not Contact your authorized service Installed Self test representative routines do not detect hammer coils at printer start up HMR BANK FAN FLT Yes Sensors cannot detect Check that fan cable is connected current in fan circuit Check for obstruction of vents and fan airway remove any obstructions Check for items
71. close the tractor door Load Paper Tractor 2 Tractor Lock 2 q88v 8L Figure 30 Adjusting the Horizontal Paper Tension 5 Adjust the paper web tightness by sliding the right tractor to remove slack or to adjust for various paper widths See Figure 30 6 Lockthe tractors in position by pressing down on the tractor locks Figure 31 Paper Exiting the Top of the Printer 329 Appendix C Operation Position The Paper Out Sensor 183490b At least 2 inches Sensor Knob Oo O0 poenis Out Sensor IL Paper 1 j Figure 32 The Paper Out Sensor The paper out sensor indicates when the printer runs out of paper The sensor does not work with black backed forms Unlike the standard pedestal printer the ZT printer requires you to load the paper through the paper out sensor slot Figure 29 and Figure 32 Correct positioning of the paper out sensor ensures that the last form the printer prints will be properly presented to the tear bar To position the paper out sensor do the following 1 Position the paper properly at the tear bar page 332 2 Loosen the paper out sensor by turning the sensor knob counterclockwise 3 Position the paper out sensor so that there are at least 2 inches between t
72. communication Configuration of this interface is controlled from the host Refer to IEEE 1284 IIapoeA Ivtepoaye ov Maye 272 for more details about the available modes Compatibility Nibble and Byte Prime Signal e Enable default The parallel port will perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal Disable The parallel port will not perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal TOF Action Reset default A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host This setting is used only if the prime signal parameter is enabled e Do Nothing Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the IEEE 1284 parallel port buffer You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments The default is 16K NOTE OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu Auto Trickle Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the parallel interface was busy for too long When Auto Trickle is enabled and the printer s buffers are almost full the printer will begin to trickle data in at the rate set in the Trickle Time menu until the buffers start to empty Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is receiv
73. configurations can be saved ON LINE N A Printer state message No action is required printer is online and in communication with host ONLINE Yes Controller Unit Not Check cable connection and host 28 CU NOT ENAB Enabled Poll system time out error The printer was not polled for one minute across a coax interface ONLINE No Link level code test Contact your authorized service 8344 FAILED detects hardware failure representative ONLINE Yes Controller Unit Timed Check cable connection and host CU TIMED OUT Out The printer was not system enabled for one minute or more on a coax interface PAP BAD TABLE No Paper Bad Table The Contact your authorized service paper feed process on representative the controller board has a corrupted table PAP BSY TOO LNG No Paper Busy Too Long Contact your authorized service Firmware error on representative controller board PAP FD DRVR CIR No Paper Feed Driver Contact your authorized service See Manual Circuit The paper feed representative driver circuit on the controller board is drawing too much current PAP FIFO OVERFL No Paper First In First Out Contact your authorized service Overflow Firmware error on controller board representative 309 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Firmware error on controller board i M Explanation lution Displayed
74. default Allows these host commands to override operator panel settings line length forms length lines per inch LPI characters per inch CPI print quality and text orientation Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option e Enable The operator panel settings override the host commands 151 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Chapter 4 Format Control Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed e Disable default Reflects distance generated by the VGL feature PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed Enable Max Print Width Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C T host interface Set for 18 2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the printer All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be truncated e 13 2 Inches default e Printer Width the maximum width of the printer SPC Coax Params Factory Default Option needs to be selected CTHI from page 124 Simp Prot Conv SPC Coax Params Logical Buf Intervention Buffer Prin
75. e Enable default Form length is accurate according to the form length parameter in the CREATE command e Disable Form length is IGP X00 compatible when using PMODE Printer PI Line This option enables the IGP to send PI instructions to the printer to slew the form e Enable default Send the PI instructions to the printer LinePrinter Plus during form slew This is IGP X00 compatible e Disable Do not send PI instructions to the printer LFs are sent instead Print Quality e Data Processing default The emulation prints at 60 x 72 dpi and lets you choose between normal alphanumerics and barcodes and dark mode alphanumerics and barcodes This mode should be set if you want the highest speed High The emulation prints at 120 x 72 dpi but all alohanumerics and barcodes are automatically printed in dark mode e Best The emulation prints at 120 x 144 dpi and dark mode which produces a higher resolution better looking print image Power on S Mode This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP with respect to certain commands All new users with new applications should select 0 the default option Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual Power on S Mode sets the printer in an SMODE compatibility state at power up The default is O disabled no power on mode To use this feature select a mode from 1 through 5 which puts IGP PGL in
76. e On Allows the printer to perform a form feed command anywhere in the data stream Auto Skip At End Specifies whether or not to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a print buffer If form feed is the last character in the print order the form feed function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option e Off default Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next line e On Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next form 132 Coax Emulation FF After Job Determines the print position after an operator initiated local copy print screen function e Off default Performs an automatic new line command after completing a print buffer unless a new line form feed or carriage return command was the last one executed The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the next line e On Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was the last one executed The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the first line on the next form CR EM amp NL 3287 only CR Carriage Return EM Error Message and NL New Line specify that the printer treat the CR EM and NL control codes either as spaces or as control codes e On default Treats the CR EM and NL commands as control codes e Off Treats the CR EM and NL commands as spaces Translate Table Defines which translate table to use for printing e Default default Translates da
77. effective page width is changed to be equal to the form width in characters divided by the new CPI Table 8 Form Width NN menace 10 0 136 12 0 163 13 3 181 15 0 204 16 7 297 17 1 272 Define CR Code The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a carriage return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer e CR CR default No extra line feeds are inserted e CRz CR LF Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return Auto LF Defines the printer actions when print data is received past the form width setting Disable default Discards any data past the form width e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the form width Define LF Code Controls the action of the printer when it receives a Line Feed code hex 0A from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a line feed it inserts an additional carriage return code hex OD into the data stream This feature can be used in most installations but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer e LF CR LF default Adds an extra carriage return with each line feed e LF LF Does n
78. facility E13 TRACE INT Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E16 ITRANS MISS Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted in the application program again If the message appears load the latest emulation software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility 297 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table See User Manual instruction was attempted in the application program Displayed Message Beane Explanation Solution E17 DLOAD MISS Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E18 DSTORE MISS Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If th
79. if the optional Form Count parameter number of forms to print is specified as part of the Execute command This setting is IGP 100 compatible e Enable Only dynamic data is allowed within a form in which the Form Count parameter is specified in the Execute command In this case the exact same form with identical dynamic data etc is printed for the Form Count However incremental data is not incremented since the page that is printing is exactly the same Also each form is printed on a separate page Barcode Factory Default Options from page 197 UPC Optimized 1 2 5 AI 00 Select SO User Def C39 Descenders Ratio Selection Spaces Char Ratio Compatbl Always Disable Leading Zero Disable 14 Enable Disable Never Enable Trailing Space Enable 0 255 Disable Enable Only with PDF X2 DPD Modulo 7 CD 202 Barcode Options The following sub options help define specific options regarding barcode printing UPC Descenders This parameter allows you to print barcode descenders when human readable data is not present in the UPC EAN barcodes e Always default UPC EAN barcodes are printed with descenders even if there is no human readable data e Never UPC EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no human readable data e Only with PDF UPC EAN barcodes are printed with descenders only when the PDF command is present Optimized Ratio Th
80. in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet buffer You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments The default is 16 Kbytes NOTE OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K 104 NETWORK SETUP Menu ADAPTER ADDRESS NETWORK SETUP from page 64 ADAPTER ADAPTER ETHERNET ADDRESS PARAMS ADDRESS 2 ETHERNET PARAMS 2 WLAN ADDRESS 2 See page 105 See page 106 See page 109 See page 110 See page 112 WLAN WLAN PARAMS 2 KERBEROS WLAN LEAP WLAN EAP 46 See page 117 See page 119 See page 120 See page 113 1 Only if the Ethernet Adapter feature is installed 2 Only if the Integrated Ethernet feature is installed 3 Only if the Wireless Adapter feature is installed K Only if a Symbol 4121 radio card is installed 5 Only if a Cisco radio card is installed 7 Only if a Symbol 5127 radio card is installed ADAPTER ADDRESS Factory Default ADAPTER ADDRESS from page 105 IP Address Subnet Gateway MAC DHCP Mask Address Address XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX hhhhhhhhhhhh Disable Enable IP Address A numeric address such as 123 45 61 23 which identifies a printer or server in
81. in lines depends on the current LPI setting it is equal to the maximum form length in inches multiplied by the current LPI setting For example at 6 LPI the maximum form length is 6 LPI x 24 inches 144 lines Only valid form length values will be accepted If you select a length that is larger than the maximum length for the current LPI the maximum length will be used If you need a longer page length you must first change the LPI If the form length is set in lines and you change the LPI the effective page length changes to the form length in characters divided by the new LPI NOTE Receipt of a data stream control code which changes the form length overrides the form length previously specified via the operator panel Form Width Allows you to input the form width in characters from 1 through 272 The maximum form width in characters depends on the current CPI setting it is equal to the maximum form width in inches multiplied by the current CPI setting Only valid form width values will be accepted If a width is selected that is larger than the maximum width for the current CPI then the maximum width will be used If a larger width value is desired then the CPI value must be changed first 191 Chapter 4 IMPORTANT 192 ANSI Emulation Table 8 lists the maximum number of characters that can be printed for a given Characters Per Inch CPI setting If the form width is set in characters and the CPI is changed the
82. interference at his own expense Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits Printronix is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 341 Appendix E Communication Statements 342 WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Fules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation European Union EU Conformity Statement Hereby Printronix declares that this C e product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevent provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non recommended modification of the product including the fitting of non Printronix option cards This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information Technology Equipment according
83. is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object co
84. is online and the internal serial buffer is not full e Off Line or BF buffer full Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full e OnLine Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online False Never asserts the DTR signal Serial Submenu Request To Send This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the Request to Send RTS signal is generated This signal indicates whether or not the printer is ready to receive data e On Line and BNF default Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full e Off Line or BF Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full e OnLine Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online e False Never asserts the RTS signal e True Continuously asserts the RTS signal Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port buffer You may specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments The default is 16K NOTE 1 If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater you may need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance 2 OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K Poll Character This option is for the Series1 protocol Whenever the printer receives this character it sends a response to the host indicating the current state of the
85. minutes your authorized service was pressed to clear the paper out fault 32 PAPER JAM Yes A timeout message is Clear paper jam and reload paper TIMEOUT sent to the host if no paper motion has occurred for 10 minutes after ON LINE CLEAR was pressed to clear the jam fault 33 PLATEN OPEN Yes The forms thickness lever Load paper close the forms TIMEOUT has been open for at least one minute thickness lever and press ON LINE CLEAR 287 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table TEST FAILED initialization test SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed s Can User Explanation lution Displayed Message Correct planatio Solutio 34 RIBBON STALL Yes In the CT emulation with Reload the ribbon TIMEOUT a coax interface the ribbon has not moved for 10 minutes after ON LINE CLEAR was pressed to clear the ribbon drive fault 48V CIRCUIT No Either the power supply is Contact your authorized service See User Manual not generating a proper representative 48 Volts or the controller board is not detecting a 48 Volt output from the power supply board 48V PWR FAIL No Internal power failure Contact your authorized service representative A TO D OVERUN No Analog to Digital Contact your authorized service Overrun The analog to representative digital converter overflowed ACCESS NULL PTR No Access Null Pointer The Co
86. next form FF After Job Determines the print position after an operator initiated local copy print screen function e Off default Performs an automatic new line command after completing a print buffer unless a new line form feed or carriage return command was the last one executed The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the next line e On Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was the last one executed The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the first line on the next form CR EM and NL 3287 only CR Carriage Return EM Error Message and NL New Line specify that the printer treat the CR EM and NL control codes either as spaces or as control codes e On default Treats the CR EM and NL commands as control codes e Off Treats the CR EM and NL commands as spaces Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or continues to use the current operator panel settings e Disable default Allows these host commands to override operator panel settings line length forms length lines per inch LPI characters per inch CPI print quality and text orientation Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option e Enable The operator panel settings override the host commands 146 3270 Params Format Cont
87. normal ribbon low warning and ribbon out conditions Stop At RBN End default When this factory default option is selected the printer displays a warning message when a ribbon low condition is reached and display a ribbon out fault when ribbon life reaches 0 Ignore RBN End When this menu option is selected it overrides the ribbon low and ribbon out conditions i e no warning or fault messages is displayed and printing continues even after ribbon life reaches 0 However once the ribbon life reaches an excess wear condition as indicated by the fault message EXCESS RBN WEAR Install New RBN printing will stop and the user must install a new ribbon before printing can resume NOTE The excess ribbon wear is set below the Lighter 10 Ribbon End Point setting DIAGNOSTICS Menu DIAGNOSTICS Menu DIAGNOSTICS from page 65 67 69 71 73 75 and 76 Factory Default 1 If Ethernet adapter is present Not available in PCL II or LG 3 Not available in LG a Feature File exists 5 Values for OpenPrint P7000 HD printers 8 If the network is enabled Printer Tests Test Width Paper Out Dots System Print Memory Statistics Shift Recycle Full Width 40 dots All E s 80 col 4 76 E s tok 76 dots 5 A DL UNE 40 112 5 All Underlines All Black Shuttle Slow Shuttle Fast Shuttle Only Phase Printer Paperout Adj Burnin Test Pri
88. of the LEAP password maximum number of characters is 32 LEAP Password 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the LEAP password maximum number of characters is 32 LEAP Password 31 32 Characters 31 to 32 of the LEAP password maximum number of characters is 32 Reset LEAP Password Resets the LEAP password to an empty string 119 Chapter 4 120 WLAN EAP from page 105 NETWORK SETUP Menu WLAN EAP Factory Default 1 Only if a Symbol 5127 radio card is installed EAP Mode EAP Reset EAP EAP Reset EAP Username User Password Pswd None EAP Username 01 15 LEAP Password 01 15 LEAP EAP Username 16 30 LEAP Password 16 30 PEAP EAP Username 31 32 LEAP Password 31 32 TTLS EAP Mode This feature allows the user to select the mode used for the wireless network interface None default EAP authentication is disabled LEAP Selects Cisco LEAP authentication PEAP Selects PEAP authentication TTLS Selects TTLS authentication EAP Username EAP Username 01 15 The first 15 characters of the EAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 EAP Username 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the EAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 EAP User 31 32 Characters 31 to 32 of the EAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 Reset EAP User Resets the EAP user name to an empty string EAP Password EAP Pa
89. ooo ooo o D DN al n a Dk 2 cos af In aos RP1 and RP2 e a D 2 noe LA Default 470 1K Ohm a c5 FM M Oo Alt 220 330 Ohm i y 0 0D 2 p s 1 i T B H n L mi Ps nd 2 H n D EUM o ot n punnupn z aL im Figure 23 Terminating Resistors V6 Controller Board Removal And Installation The procedure for removing and installing terminating resistors is provided in your Maintenance Manual CAUTION This is an involved maintenance procedure To avoid damage to the equipment only a trained technician should perform this procedure RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interfaces 276 NOTE The RS 232 and RS 422 serial interface circuit characteristics are compatible with the Electronic Industry Association Specifications EIA 232 E and EIA 422 B The RS 232 and RS 422 serial interfaces enable the printer to operate with bit serial devices that are compatible with an RS 232 controller The input serial data transfer rate in baud is selectable from the printer s control panel Baud rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 baud rates are available NOTE If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200 you may need to use RS 422 to prevent data loss The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 50 feet 15 meters for RS 232 or 4000 feet 1220 meters for RS 422 A copper conductor twisted pair telephone cable with a shunt capacitance of
90. print position two lines down from the current position e Off Moves to the first print position of the next print line 131 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Position Aft FF 4234 only Allows you to select the location of the print position after a form feed command is sent e On default Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first print line on the next form e Off Sets the printer to print at print position 2 of the first print line on the next form Last Char FF Determines the print line position when a form feed command is the last code encountered in the print buffer On default Moves to the first print position on the second line of the next form e Off Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form NOTE This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on If configured as a 3287 and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next form regardless of the setting of this option Null Suppression e Off default Ignores nulls The print position does not move e On Treats nulls as blank spaces FF Validity Determines if the position of a form feed command affects its execution e Off default Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print position in a line or at Maximum Print Position 1 A form feed command at any other position is recognized as a space
91. received and continues to use the currently loaded configuration e Power Up Config The power up configuration is loaded when the reset command is received LG Emulation EMULATION from page 123 Factory Default LG Font Vert Forms Horiz Forms Autowrap CR LF see page 234 Bot Frm 66 6 Left Mrg 00 0 No CR SLF Top Mrg 0 6 Right Mrg 13 2 Yes CR LF CR LF Bot Mrg 66 6 FF Unsolicited Print Mode Plot Mode 2 5 Guard Rpt Opt Opt Bars FF No Enable Enable Enable CR FF Small Disable Disable Disable Big 233 Chapter 4 234 Font from page 233 LG Emulation Style DP 10 6 DP 108 DP 126 DP 128 DP 156 DP 158 DP 15 10 HS 106 Corespon 5 6 Corespon 5 8 Corespon 6 6 Corespon 6 8 Corespon 10 6 Corespon 10 8 Corespon 12 6 Corespon 12 8 Corespon 15 6 Corespon 15 8 Corespon 15 10 OCRA OCR B Compress 6 6 Compress 6 8 Compress 8 6 Compress 8 8 Compress 13 6 Compress 13 8 Compress 13 10 Compress 16 6 Compress 16 8 Compress 16 10 DP 56 DP 58 DP 66 DP 68 Character Set GL Char Set U S ASCII DEC Finnish French DEC Fr Can German Italian JIS Roman DEC Nor Dan Spanish DEC Swedish DEC Great Brit ISO Nor Dan DEC Dutch DEC Swiss DEC Portuguese VT100 Graphics DEC Suppl
92. representative B46 ERROR SDRAM No Printer boot initialization Cycle power to see if the message HAS MIXED SIZES tests detect incorrect clears if not contact your SDRAM authorized service representative B47 ERROR SDRAM No Printer boot initialization Cycle power to see if the message LARGER THAN 256M tests detect incorrect clears if not contact your SDRAM authorized service representative B49 ERROR SDRAM No Printer boot initialization Cycle power to see if the message LOGICAL BANKS tests detect incorrect clears if not contact your SDRAM authorized service representative B50 ERROR SDRAM No SDRAM DIMM is not Cycle power to see if the message LOGIC COMB BANKS compatible with the clears if not contact your computer SDRAM DIMM authorized service representative may not be properly installed B50 STATUS XX No Emulation software No action is required 290 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution B51 STATUS XX No Status message printer No action required LOADING boot up routines are loading printer system software into flash memory and SDRAM B53 ERROR 12C NO No There is a problem onthe Cycle power to see if the message ARBITRATION I2C bus which allows the Clears if not contact your SDRAM DIMM to authorized service representative communicate with the GPIO or CT interface B54 E
93. scale 50 __ Physical TearBar __ 0 Position 50 Correct TearBar Distance Print Station Figure 33 Correct Tear Bar Distance NOTE When a new ZTP Tear Bar Dist value is selected the printer will lose the current print position until you reset the top of form to automatically save the new value 9 Reset the top of form using the procedure on page 332 331 Appendix C Operation 332 Set The Top Of Form Paper Tear Bar r Form Advance Knob Figure 34 Setting The Tear Off Position The ZT printer uses the tear bar as the reference point for setting the tear off position To set the position of the forms perforation to the tear bar use the SET TOF button as follows 1 Make sure the paper guides are adjusted correctly and the paper is properly loaded 2 Press the SET TOF button on the control panel The printer display will read Align at TearBar Then Press TOF 3 Use the form advance knob to move the top of the form to the tear off bar 4 Position the perforation so it aligns with the tear off bar NOTE This is easily done by advancing one complete sheet above the tear off bar and folding it over at the perforation 5 Position the fold exactly at the tear bar 6 Tear the sheet off to ensure proper positioning NOTE If you do not want to lose a form position the top of the form at the tear bar Run a finger along the back of the form along the tear bar to ensure the perforation is p
94. settings begins on page 50 When control codes are sent from a host attached to the printer they override control panel settings For example if you set the line spacing to 6 Ipi with the control panel and application software later changes this to 8 Ipi with a control code the control code overrides the control panel setting Saving Parameter Settings The parameter settings that you have changed can be permanently stored in the printer s memory as a configuration See Auto Save Configuration on page 53 and Saving Your New Configuration on page 53 You may also save your new configurations using the PTX SETUP command host control code See your LinePrinter Plus Programmer s Reference Manual for details Default And Custom Configurations A configuration consists of a group of parameter settings such as line spacing forms length etc Your printer provides a fixed default configuration and allows you to define several custom configurations for use with particular print jobs The factory default configuration can be loaded but it cannot be altered Eight configurations can be modified for unique print job requirements The Save Config option allows you to save eight groups of parameter settings in memory as custom configurations numbered from 1 through 8 An explanation on how to save a set of parameter values as a custom configuration using the Save Config menu option begins on page 53 Navigating the Menus Nav
95. still fails contact your authorized service representative 302 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Explanation lution Displayed Message Correct planatio Solutio ERROR CPLD NOT No The Complex Contact your authorized service PROGRAMMED Programmable Logic representative Device CPLD on the controller board is not programmed The EC cannot read the version bits in the CPLD which tell the EC which configuration version is installed ERROR DC Yes The printer cannot find Download the program again If the PROGRAM NOT the data controller message appears contact your VALID program or the validation authorized service representative checksum is corrupt ERROR DRAM AT Yes The printer cannot find Download the program again If the ADDRESS XXXXXXXX the engine controller message appears contact your program or the validation authorized service representative checksum is corrupt ERROR EC The printer cannot find Download the program again If the PROGRAM NOT the engine controller message occurs again contact your VALID program or the validation authorized service representative checksum is corrupt ERROR EC No XXXX is a number from Contact your authorized service STOPPED AT STATE 0000 to 0010 The representative XXXX Engine Controller has stopped and is in the state identified by the number displayed ERROR FLASH DID Yes The printer encounter
96. the PXML or UCP to connect through The factory default is 3007 and the range is from 1023 to 65535 265 Chapter 4 PRINTER MGMT Menu 266 5 Overview Interfaces IMPORTANT This chapter describes the host interfaces provided with the printer The printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs into the printer The interface processes all communications signals and data to and from the host computer Plus with the Auto Switching feature you can configure the printer to accept several interfaces at the same time see Auto Switching Submenu on page 88 To comply with Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC regulatory requirements all electrical signal interface cables connected to this printer must be of a minimal quality level be of the correct length and be properly installed The RS 232 port and parallel port interface cables must meet the following specifications e The cable design must be double shielded with a copper braid over an aluminum mylar foil and not just a conductive foil spiral wrapped around a drain wire e The shield must terminate coaxially 360 degrees to a metal connector housing and not be terminated by just a simple wire lead e The cable length including connectors must be 3 meters or less e The cable connector anchor screws must be securely seated into the printer receptor hardware For reference purposes only two specific Centronics parallel port c
97. the configuration menus and makes vertical forms adjustment After pressing VIEW press A or V to adjust the paper up or down in 1 72 inch increments for fine vertical forms alignment When the printer is in offline mode press A or V to move through levels in the configuration menus Control Panel Keys UP DOWN A V Locks and unlocks the ENTER key NOTE The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a key combination other than A V see page 259 PREV or NEXT lt or gt Moves between the options on the current level of configuration menu In the configuration menu press lt to scroll backward or press to scroll forward through the menu selections on the same level PREV NEXT lt When both keys are pressed simultaneously the printer will reset to the power up configuration and reset its internal state in offline mode A ON LINE IPDS Emulation only In offline mode press A ON LINE If there is data in the printer buffer the printer will be placed in online mode print one page and return to the offline mode This action can be repeated until the end of a print job Only one page prints each time you press A ON LINE If there is no data in the printer buffer the printer is placed in online mode In the fault state ON LINE does not work A PAPER ADVANCE IPDS Emulation only In offline mode press A PAPER ADVANCE The printer will perform a reverse linefeed If
98. the front and rear doors TOF Indicator ul erforation Vertical Position Knob Figure 14 Aligning the Perforation with the TOF Indicator 27 Align the top of the first print line with the TOF indicator on the tractor by rotating the vertical position knob For best print quality it is recommended that the top of form be set at least one print line or more below the perforation NOTE For exact positioning press the VIEW EJECT key to move the last data printed to the tractor area for viewing While in View mode Printer in View displays Press the Up or Down Arrow keys to move the paper vertically in small increments Pressing the VIEW EJECT key a second time moves the paper back to the adjusted print position The key works both online and offline provided that the printer is in View mode This procedure is applicable for both the cabinet and pedestal models Reload Paper Vertical Position Knob o JA Paper Thickness C Indicator 183445b Platen Stop Platen Lever Platen Stop Knob Figure 15 Adjusting the Platen Lever 28 Turn the platen stop knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the paper thickness The A B C scale corresponds approximately to 1 3 and 6 part paper thickness Adjust until you have the desired print quality NOTE The platen stop allows you to set an optimum and consistent thickness that is not affected when opening and closing the plat
99. to European standard EN 55022 The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors Industry Canada Compliance Statement This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A conform la norme NMB 003 du Canada Statement of CISPR 22 Compliance Attention This is a Class A Product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Japanese VCCI Class A RE TESRALIEAE SE SRRSat Males VCC 0 DIAARMRNTRE CT ORB eR CHAT SCBRMae S cune rure ee ee ee eee o German Conformity Statement Handbuchtexte FCC class A entspricht EMVG Klasse A Text F r alle in Deutschland vertriebenen EN 55022 Klasse A Ger te Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit von Ger ten EMVG vom 18 September 1998 bzw der EMC EG Richtlinie 89 336 Dieses Ger t ist berechtigt in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutsch
100. to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right e Control By Host default Allows printers configured as a 4234 to use the Set Text Orientation command from the host Left to Right Right to Left When a right to left language is selected the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is placed online Image Buf Size Allows you to select 2K or 4K as the image buffer size This option is valid only when the printer emulates the 3287 For the 4234 emulation the buffer size is fixed at 4K A POR status is sent to the host when the printer is placed online Intervention Req e Send to Host default The printer sends a signal to the host computer when a printer fault or hold mode time out occurs e Do Not Send No signal will be sent to the host computer Compatibility Op The Compatibility Options allow you to select special printer functions in the non SCS mode based on the capabilities of the printer emulated CR At MPP 1 MPP is Maximum Print Position which is also known as line length This option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP 1 e On default Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the next line e Off Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line NL At MPP 1 Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line e On default Moves to the first
101. you hold down the A PAPER ADVANCE keys for longer than 1 2 second the printer moves to the previous top of form position If there is data in the printer buffer the data does not print In the fault state A PAPER ADVANCE does not work A VIEW IPDS Emulation only In offline mode press A VIEW EJECT If there is data in the IPDS printer buffer the printer will be placed in online mode print one line and return to offline mode This action can be repeated until the end of the job This function prints only one line of text If the data is not text only 1 6 inch prints If there is no data in the printer buffer the printer is placed in online mode for one second and then returns to offline mode In the fault state A VIEW does not work Ribbon Life Indicator The second line of the LCD displays the remaining life of the currently installed ribbon The default settings for this feature should match the requirements for most applications no special user setup is needed If your particular application requires darker printing or can tolerate lighter printing the ribbon end point can be adjusted as appropriate Please refer Ribbon End Point on page 83 27 Chapter 3 TheControl Panel Cancel A Print Job The procedure to cancel a print job depends on the printer emulation and your application software Contact your system administrator for additional information 1 Ifthe printer is online press il ON LINE CLEA
102. your machine readable documentation Energy Star P ENERGY STAR The Environmental Protection Agency ENERGY STAR Computers program is a partnership effort with manufacturers of data processing equipment to promote the introduction of energy efficient personal computers monitors printers fax machines and copiers to help reduce air pollution and global warming caused by electricity generation Printronix participates in this program by introducing printers that reduce power consumption when they are not being used As an ENERGY STAR Partner Printronix has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency NOTE The ENERGY STAR emblem does not represent EPA endorsement of any product or service Communication Statements Federal Communications Commission FCC Statement This equpment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Fules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
103. 0 B41 ERROR DIM MEMORY NOT SDRAM message 290 B42 ERROR SDRAM ROWS NOT ALLOWED message 290 B43 ERROR SDRAM TOO MANY BANKS message 290 B44 ERROR SDRAM NOT 64 BITS WIDE message 290 B45 ERROR SDRAM IS WRONG VOLTAGE message 290 B46 ERROR SDRAM HAS MIXED SIZES message 290 B47 ERROR SDRAM LARGER THAN 256M message 290 B49 ERROR SDRAM LOGICAL BANKS message 290 B50 ERROR SDRAM LOGIC COMB BANKS message 290 B50 XX CLEAR FLASH 290 B51 XX LOADING 291 B53 ERROR 12C NO ARBITRATION 291 B54 ERROR SDA LINE STUCK LOW 291 B55 STATUS SEND PROGRAM TO EC 291 C Cable Verify Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 269 Cancel a print job 28 Cancel IGP DCU 129 137 CANCEL key 25 Cancel Key ADVANCED USER Menu 258 Cartridge Ribbon System CRS 41 Centronics Parallel Interface 270 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 271 Acknowledge 271 Busy 271 Data Lines 1 through 8 271 Data Strobe 271 Fault 271 Online 271 Paper Empty PE 271 Paper Instruction PI 271 Prime 271 Centronics Parallel submenu 92 Auto Trickle 93 Buffer Size in K 93 Busy On Strobe 93 Data Bit 8 92 Data Polarity 92 Latch Data On 93 PI Ignored 92 Prime Signal 93 Resp Polarity 93 TOF Action 93 Trickle Time 94 Change Case 130 Change Case 3270 Params menu 144 355 Changing parameter settings 48 Changing parameters example 50 Changing Ribbon Cartridge 43 Channel WLAN PARAMS Menu 114 Char Set Select 128
104. 00 Spaces 218 Append Rotated 216 Auto FF at PN 220 C128 Mode Comp 220 C39 Compatbl 220 Expanded Font 217 Ignore Dots 216 Ignore Spaces 217 Ignore Lxx Cmd 220 IGP110 Compatbl 219 363 125 Selection 218 LP Font 218 Midline PY includes PN 217 MSI Check Digit 218 PDF Size Comp 220 Print Quality 217 Rot Char Size 217 Slash 0 216 True Vert 1 10 216 Truncate Alpha 216 UPC Descenders 217 Width Limit 219 Graphics Print IPDS Emulation 226 Graphics Quality IPDS Emulation 226 Graphics Scaling IPDS Emulation 227 Gray Adjust 242 GRF CHECK ERROR PRESS STOP message 306 H HAMMER COIL BAD Message 307 HAM COIL OPEN message 307 HB NOT INSTALLD message 307 Hex Dump Mode ADVANCED USER Menu 255 Hex Dump printing 285 Hexdump Mode IPDS Emulation 228 HMR BANK FAN FLT Message 307 Horiz Forms 81 Horiz Forms LG Emulation 236 Hor Quiet Zone 247 Host Command 160 Host Form Length 204 Host Interface 77 HOST INTERFACE Menu 87 Auto Switching 88 Centronics Parallel 92 Dataproducts 95 E Net Adapter 103 Ethernet 104 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional 90 Serial 97 364 Host Override 133 139 3270 Params menu 146 5250 Params menu 151 Host PI 222 Hour DATE Menu 264 HS Print High Speed Print P Series XQ Emulation 173 HOO PCI SLOT message 306 H01 PCI J12 message 306 H02 PCI J13 message 306 2 5 Selection 203 Idle Response Se
105. 123 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation ssseseeeeeeenen 124 ihi MUI 124 Simple Prot Conv i ne Co ne e eie d i ee eae le 125 Coax Emulation esses 126 Twinax Pararms reru ceed needy eee etienne ee ens enun isse sec 135 KM SEITDEM 141 5250 Paraiso eteioecamuteniici aee ees 148 SPC Coax Params sse nennen nnne 152 SPC TWX Params s niu dc eee ee e sie esit eti 155 LinePrinter Plus Emulation sssssseseseeeemn 157 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II eseeeeseeeess 159 P Series Emulation sssssssssssseeeeeeeneneennnnn enne 164 P Series Emulation with PCL II seseeeeeee 164 P Series Emulation With LG ssssseeeeee 165 P Series XQ Emulation sssssssssseeeeeneeen 172 Serial Matrix Emulation essssssseeeeeeeeeennenne 174 Proprinter XL Emulation rannat 179 Epson FX Emulation oreiro rinie E EAEE TE A AAN EON 183 ANS Eri lation ic eri e Aa e nin a tee nth 188 IGP PGL Emulation eesssessesseeeeeeeeennnn nnne 195 Features io eid aen D Ia bts ive ia tenes 195 Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel 196 IGP PGL Submenu sssssssseseeeeeeeeeeneneennen nennen 197 IGP PGL Submenu With PCL II eeeeseeeeene 198 IGP PGL Submenu with LG ss
106. 16 pF foot 52 5 pF meter terminated in a 100 ohm resistive load must be used for the RS 422 RS 232 RS 232 Table 14 Standard 500 1000 1500 and 2000 Ipm Models RS 232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Receive Data RD 3 Transmit Status amp Control 2 Chassis Ground 1 Data TD Clear To Send CTS 5 Request To Send RTS 4 Signal Ground 7 Data Set Ready DSR 6 Data Terminal Ready DTR 20 Data Carrier Detect DCD 8 Table 15 RS 232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Receive Data RD 2 Transmit Status amp Control 3 Chassis Signal Ground 5 Data TD Clear To Send CTS 8 Request To Send RTS 7 Data Set Ready DSR 6 Data Terminal Ready DTR 4 Data Carrier Detect DCD 1 Receive Data RD Serial data stream to the printer Transmit Data TD Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting status and control information to the host Subject to protocol selection Request To Send RTS Control signal from the printer Subject to configuration Clear To Send CTS Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready to receive data status signals from the printer Data Set Ready DSR Status signal to the printer indicating the host is in a ready condition Data Carrier Detec
107. 19 ERROR DC No The message indicates Cycle power to see if the message RETURNED an incorrectly assembled clears if not contact your and tested machine authorized service representative B20 STATUS 00 No Status message No action is required DOWNLOAD MODE informing the operator that software is being downloaded Percentage figure indicates approximate amount loaded into the printer B21 STATUS No Status message No action is required PRINTER RESET informing the operator that the printer is undergoing a system reset B22 ERROR No FLASH memory has not Cycle power to see if the message DECOMPRESS SIZE passed boot initialization clears if not contact your tests authorized service representative B23 ERROR No FLASH memory has not Cycle power to see if the message DECOMPRESS passed boot initialization clears if not contact your CKSUM tests authorized service representative B30 STATUS N A Status message the No action is required INITIALIZING printer is running its initialization routines after startup and successful memory tests B35 STATUS N A Status message the DC Cycle power to see if the message WAITING FOR EC STATUS on the controller board is waiting for communication with the EC If this message does not clear witin a few seconds there is an electrical or electronic problem on the controller board clears if not contact your authorized service representative 289
108. 2 PI Control 222 Prt to Emulate 223 SFCC amp Pwrup 215 IGP110 Compatbl 219 ILL EXT BUS ACC message 307 ILLGL OPR ACCSS message 308 Image Buf Size 131 INCOMPAT E NET message 308 INTAKE FAN FAULT message 308 Integrated Print Management System 41 Darker Print 42 Lighter Print 42 Interface Type Serial submenu 98 Interfaces printer 267 specifications 321 Interior cleaning 282 Internat Mode WLAN PARAMS Menu 115 INTERRUPT UNUSED VECTOR 00 message 308 Intervention Req 131 153 Intervention Req 3270 Params menu 144 INVALID ACTIVATE message 308 INVALID COMMAND message 308 IP address Adapter Address Menu 105 Ethernet Address Menu 109 WLAN Address Menu 112 IPDS Data Port Adapter Params Menu 107 IPDS Data Port Ethernet Params Menu 110 IPDS Emulation 225 Barcode Quality 226 Barcode Size 227 Barcode Speed 226 Code Page Subset 228 Default Code Page 227 Default Font 228 Early Print Comp Complete 227 Font Size 226 Graphic CharSize 227 Graphics Quality 226 365 Graphics Scaling 227 Hexdump Mode 228 12 5 Checksum 227 Print IPDS Fonts 228 Print Quality 226 VPA Check 228 12 5 Checksum IPDS Emulation 227 I 2 5 Guard Bars LG Emulation 237 125 Selection 218 J Job Control Adapter Params Menu 108 Job Control Ethernet Params Menu 111 JOB SELECT key 26 K KDC Port Number WLAN KERBEROS Menu 118 Keep alive timer Adapter Params Menu 108 Keep al
109. 252 PRINTER CONTROL Menu Accented Char Selects whether the accented characters are standard or tall See Figure 22 for an example Selecting tall will slow print speed and may cause the printer to back up during printing 060 6 e O0 0 9 9 Standard Tall Figure 22 Accented Characters 253 Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER Menu ADVANCED USER Menu ADVANCED USER from page 65 67 69 71 73 75 and 76 Factory Default af you have the CT option Enable is the default value 2 f installed 3 Not available in PCL II Not available in LG or PCL II 5 Available for OpenPrint P7000 HD products only PTX Setup Hex Dump Power up Downloaded PMD Fault Power Option 3 Mode State Fonts 4 Stacker Setup Parse Disable Online Char Operations Enable Enable Enable Enable Offline Delete frm Flash Disable Disable Ignore Load from Flash Disable Save to Flash Setup SFCC Delete from RAM 21h Ld Char at Pwrup 1 FF hex Disable Enable Set Operations Delete frm Flash Load from Flash Save to Flash Delete from RAM Ld Set at PwrUp Disable Enable Auto Auto File Set Shuttle Slow Paper Elevator Locking System Sharing Timeout
110. 3 5250 Params menu 150 Prt to Emulate 223 P Series Character Set menu 168 LG 171 PCL II 170 PSeries Dbl High 167 P Series Emulation 164 165 Alt Set 80 9F 167 Auto LF 166 Character Set 167 Control Code 06 165 Control Code 08 165 Define CR Code 165 Define LF Code 166 FF Valid at TOF 167 LG 165 Overstrike 166 PCL II 164 PSeries Dbl High 167 P Series SFCC 166 SFCC d Command 167 VFU Select 167 P Series SFCC 80 166 P Series XQ Emulation 172 Auto LF 172 Compressed Print 173 Control Code 06 172 Define CR Code 172 Define LF Code 173 Elong Alt Font 173 HS Print High Speed Print 173 Slew Relative 174 Upr Case Select 174 VFU Select 173 PS PDF ERROR JOB ABORTED message 311 PTX Linefeed PCL II Emulation 232 PTX Setup Option ADVANCED USER Menu 255 PTX Transparent 130 138 Alt Set 80 9F 130 138 Lead in Chars 130 138 Usr Defined HTRN 130 138 3270 Params menu 143 5250 Params menu 150 PUM Default ANSI Emulation menu 194 Pwr Save Control ADVANCED USER 258 PWRSUPP VOLT message 311 P7000 ANSI Firmware Main Menu 72 P7000 HD OpenPrint Postscript PDF Firmware Main Menu 76 P7000 LG Firmware Main Menu 70 P7000 PCL II Firmware Main Menu 68 P7000 STD Firmware Main Menu 64 P7000 TN Firmware Main Menu 66 Q QUEUE OVERRUN message 311 QUICK SETUP menu Active Emulation 79 Active IGP Emulation 79 Adapter Address 77 Device ID 77 Ethernet A
111. 31 days PRINTER MGMT Menu PRINTER MGMT Menu PRINTER MGMT from page 65 67 69 71 73 and 75 Factory Default Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial PNE Port Mgmt Protocol PNE Port PNE Port Status Port Mgmt Port Number Timeout Numb Number Ethernet UCP 3001 100 Seconds 3002 3007 Disable PXML 1023 65535 1 255 Seconds 1023 65535 1023 65535 Serial PNE Port This menu selects which port the printer expects PNE to connect to via Ethernet or Serial The factory default is Ethernet If the network is not enabled the default is Disable Mgmt Protocol Since PXML and UCP management protocols share the same Ethernet Port only one can be active at a time This menu selects the active Management Protocol Interface either PXML or UCP The factory default is UCP PNE Port Number This menu selects the port number the printer expects the PNE to connect through The factory default is 3001 and the range is from 1023 to 65535 PNE Port Timeout If the PNE has not communicated to the printer within a timeout period the PNE session closes The factory default is 100 seconds The range is from 1 to 255 seconds Status Port Numb This menu selects the port number the printer sends the emulation status The factory default is 3001 and the range is from 1023 to 65535 Mgmt Port Number This menu selects the port number the printer expects
112. 315 x y BARCODES Not Found 291 06 HOST REQUEST 287 08 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT 287 15 COMM CHECK 287 15V PWR FAIL 287 22 INVALID ADDR 287 23 5V PWR FAIL 287 31 PAPER OUT TIMEOUT 287 32 PAPER JAM TIMEOUT 287 33 PLATEN OPEN TIMEOUT 287 34 RIBBON STALL TIMEOUT 288 48V CIRCUIT 288 48V PWR FAIL 288 8 5V PWR FAIL 287 Fault Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 271 Feature File DIAGNOSTICS 263 Features printer 11 FF After Job 133 146 FF Valid at TOF Proprinter XL Emulation 179 FF Validity 132 146 FF LG Emulation 237 File System ADVANCED USER Menu 256 FIRMWARE ERROR message 305 FM HEADER ERROR message 305 Font Attributes 160 ANSI Emulation menu 190 Font Set 222 Font Size IPDS Emulation 226 Font LG Emulation 235 Form Length 79 80 Form Width 80 81 Format Control 133 140 3270 Params menu 147 5250 Params menu 152 Forms Handling 201 FRAMING ERROR message 306 Framing Errors Serial submenu 102 FREEFORM OFF message 306 FREEFORM ON OFF HOLD KEY PWRUP message 306 G Gateway Address Adapter Address Menu 106 Gateway address Ethernet Address Menu 109 WLAN Address Menu 112 Graphic CharSize IPDS Emulation 227 Graphic Chek Cod 139 Graphic Chek Cod 5250 Params menu 151 Graphic Chek Err 138 Graphic Chek Err 5250 Params menu 151 Graphics Density PCL II Emulation 231 Graphics enhancement 13 Graphics Options 216 Absorb After PN 219 Absorb After PY 217 Al
113. 5 The first 15 characters of the Kerberos password maximum number of characters is 40 e Kerb Pwd 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the Kerberos password maximum number of characters is 40 e Kerb Pwd 31 40 Characters 31 to 40 of the Kerberos password maximum number of characters is 40 Reset Kerb Pwd Resets the Kerberos password to an empty string KDC Port Number KDC Key Distribution Center port number is the 2 byte UDP TCP port used for Kerberos Communication The range is 0 65535 and the default is 88 Clock Skew Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in seconds or minutes that Kerberos authentication will tolerate before assuming that a Kerberos message is valid The range for Seconds is 60 900 and the default is 300 The range for Minutes is 1 15 and the default is 5 Ticket Lifetime Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in Seconds Minutes Hours or Days that a ticket obtained from the Kerberos server is valid before getting a new one e Seconds The range is 300 259200 and the default is 43200 e Minutes The range is 5 4320 and the default is 720 e Hours The range is 1 72 and the default is 12 e Days The range is 1 3 and the default is 1 e Tckt Lifetime SEC The ticket lifetime unit in seconds The default is 43200 Renew Lifetime Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in Seconds Minutes Hours or Days before warning that a new Kerberos password is needed e Seco
114. 5 36 37 38 39 3 4 3B 3C 3D T OABCDEFGHIJALM 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 44 4B 4C 4D NOPGRSTUVUXYZELN1 4E 4F 50 351 52 53 54 55 56 57 5B 59 SA SB SC 5D abcdefghijklm 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 4D nopqrstuvuxyz 6E F 70 71 728 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D OP R4 u amp 03 7E 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 BA 2B 2C 2D 2E 0123456789 lt gt 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 7 GABCDEFGHIJ 4 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A OD OA 23 24 4a O 01234 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 54789 lt gt 7 ABCD 35 36 37 38 39 SA 3B 3C 3D SE 3F 40 41 42 43 44 EFGHIJKLMNOPQRST 45 46 47 4B 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 UVWXYZLN1 abcd 55 56 57 58 59 SA 5B 5C 5D SE SF 60 61 62 63 64 efghijklmnopqrst 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 uvuxyzti amp 4 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 20 21 22 23 24 25 amp Oxc 012345 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 6789 4 2 GABCDE 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D SE 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 FGHIJKM 4 amp 46 47 48 49 4A 4B OD OA 24 25 26 27 28 29 BA 2B 0123456789 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A B X2 7 0ABCDEFGHIJK 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B LMNOPQRSTUVWXYZL 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 958 59 SA 3B N1 abcdefghijk 5C 5D SE SF 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 47 68 6 6A 4B lmnopqrstuvuxgzt 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 012 P 4e4E 0s 7C 7D 7E 20 21 22 23
115. 70 P7000 PCL II Firmware 68 P7000 STD Firmware 64 P7000 TN Firmware 66 Maintenance 13 Manual conventions 13 related documents 14 special information 14 warnings 14 Margins 80 Max Line Width 81 Max Line Width PCL II Emulation 231 Max PI 16 222 Max Print Width 134 140 3270 Params menu 147 5250 Params menu 152 Menu ADVANCED USER 254 CONFIG CONTROL 85 DATE 264 DIAGNOSTICS 261 EMULATION 123 242 IGP PGL Font Set 208 navigating 49 NETWORK SETUP 105 PRINTER CONTROL 251 PRINTER MGMT 265 Mgmt Port Number PRINTER MGMT Menu 265 Mgmt Protocol PRINTER MGMT Menu 265 Midline PY includes PN 217 Min Xfer Rate WLAN PARAMS Menu 114 Minute DATE Menu 264 Month DATE Menu 264 Move to TOF 242 MSI Check Digit 218 N Name Configs 86 Navigating the menus 49 Nest Serv Type Adapter Params Menu 107 NetBIOS protocol Adapter Params Menu 107 NetBIOS protocol Ethernet Params Menu 110 NETWORK SETUP Menu 105 ADAPTER ADDRESS 105 ADAPTER PARAMS 106 ETHERNET ADDRESS 109 ETHERNET PARAMS 110 WLAN ADDRESS 112 WLAN EAP 120 WLAN KERBEROS 117 WLAN LEAP 119 WLAN PARAMS 113 NEW SPX DETECTED message 309 Nibble Mode IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface 272 NL At MPP 1 131 145 154 noise level acoustic 319 NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED message 309 Novell frame Adapter Params Menu 107 Novell protocol Adapter Params Menu 107 Null Suppression 132 145 O Offline Process IEEE 1284 Pa
116. 7000 HD Postscript PDF Firmware 76 QUICK SETUP Menu ssseeeeeeneeeneeeeneeeeeenenene enne nennen rennes 77 CONFIG CONTROL Menu eeeeeeeeneeneeeeeneeen nennen nennen 85 HOST INTERFACE Menu 2 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeesenaeessaeeesaees 87 Auto Switching Submenu sesssssseeeeeeeeeeenenenns 88 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 90 Centronics Parallel Submenu sssseeeeen 92 Dataproducts Submenu seen nennen 95 Serial Submernu i caer t e oct ikea hg ert deeds 97 E Net Adapter Submenu sese 103 Ethernet Submenu sssssssssseeseeeeee eene 104 NETWORK SETUP Menu seeseseeeeeeeeneeennneen nennen 105 ADAP TER ADDRESS x agi aoi nbi D ERAS 105 ADAPTER PARAMS sssssseseeeeeeneennen nennen nennen nennen 106 ETHERNET ADDRESS 77 44er 109 ETHERNET PARAMS esses einen tnnt nnne na 110 WLAN ADDRESS aibi ei tee estet 112 WLAN PARAMS sese enne nennen 113 WLAN KERBEROS 4 utente career eere Dann 117 WLAN EAP uidet ertet iege e tere ee cte i t dan 119 WEAN EAP 2 5 e ette cei ed nace 120 Table of Contents ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS Menus 121 EMULATION Menu eseeeeeeneeeeeneeennnee nennen nennen nennen enne nnns
117. 92 COIL HOT 292 CRTG COMM ERR 292 CRTG MISSING 292 CRTG NOT SETx 292 CTL VOLT FAIL 292 DIAGNOSTIC PASSED 293 DO NOT POWER OFF 293 DP FIFO Busy 293 DRVR CIR BAD 293 D50 STATUS 6XX Clearing Flash 292 D51 STATUS XX Programming 293 D55 STATUS Send Program to EC 293 ERROR CPLD NOT PROGRAMMED 303 ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID 303 ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX 303 ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID 303 ERROR EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX 303 ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM 303 ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED 303 ERROR LOCKED SN nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 303 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED 303 ERROR NVRAM FAILURE 304 ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING QUEUES 304 ERROR PRINTER TYPE 304 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM 304 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH 304 ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE 304 ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID 304 ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED 304 ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX 304 ERROR WRITING TO FLASH 304 ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM 304 ERROR WRONG OEM 304 ETHERNET ADAPTER BEING INITIALIZED 305 ETHERNET DETECTED 305 ETHERNET INITIALIZING 305 EXCESS RBN WEAR 305 EXHAUST FAN FLT 305 E00 EXE Q ADDRO 293 E01A TYPE 0x40 294 E01B TYPE 0x60 294 E02 MACHINE CHK 294 E03A DSI HASH L 294 E03B DSI HASH S 294 E03C DSI BAT PL 295 E03D DSI BAT 295 EOSE DSI CXIWX 295 E03F DSI CXOWX 295 E03G DSI ECXIWX 295 E03H DSI ECXOWX 296 E04A ISI NO TRA 296 E04B ISI DIRECT 296 E04C ISI PROTEC 296 E06 NOT ALIGNED
118. Barcode Enable Adjusted Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Not Adjusted Enable Enable Enable Enable b Absorb After IGP110 PN Compatbl Disable Disable Enable Enable SFCC amp Pwrup This option has several sub options which define the SFCC and power up configuration used with VGL VGL SFCC This option selects the Special Function Control Code The default value 5E Run a configuration printout to determine the currently selected VGL SFCC Power Up X e Disable default e Enable Selects the ignore mode as the power up default and selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default All characters are ignored until a A command is received Power Up F e Disable default e Enable Selects free format mode as the power up default and selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default Free format causes the VGL to ignore carriage returns line feeds and all characters below hex 20 sent from the host 215 Chapter 4 216 IGP VGL Emulation Power Up PY e Disable default e Enable Selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default LPI The number of lines to be printed per inch For example at 6 Ipi there is 1 6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line Graphics Options The following are several options which configure printing output Slash 0 This parameter allows you to print the numeral 0 with or without the slash This option applies to all ch
119. C Space Supp This option is only available in Coax SPC emulation and is used in LUS DSC DSE mode only Disable default Treats nulls and spaces normally e Enable If the entire line consists of spaces and nulls the line will be discarded NL At MPP 1 Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line e On default Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current position e Off Moves to the first print position of the next print line CTHI from page 124 SPC Twx Params SPC Twx Params Factory Default Simp Prot Conv SPC Twinax Params Device SPC Type Translation Buffer Print Address Thl Address 1 Disable Address 0 6 Enable MODE MODE 219 P5000 Printer Type SPC Char Set Impact P Series STD Centronics IGP VGL IGP PGL SFCC Char Logical Not Caret User Defined User Defined HTRN Start Code 1 Start Code 2 Stop Code EVFU Enable Disable SPC Char Set Multinational Austrian German Belgian Canadian French Danish Norweg French Spanish English US NOTE To access the SPC Twinax Params menu be sure to select the Twinax option in the Host Interface menu Device Address 0500 Internat 5 0037 English US 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng
120. Compatbl Mode This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP with respect to certain commands All new users with new applications should select the None option Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual When replacing an older product operating with an existing application especially those using the PMODE and SMODE commands you may need to select a compatibility mode In this case select the printer model number option that most closely matches the printer being replaced The Compatibility Mode options include e None default e MVP e L150 e P3000 e P6000 e P9000 Expanded Font This option defines the type of expanded characters the PGL will select e Scalable default These expanded characters have rounded edges e Block These are block characters compatible with the IGP X00 printers Alt Block 1 Alt Block 2 Reserved block sets used only for compatibility purposes Scalable Size e Normal default Controls the size of scalable characters to be either normal size as set by the user or adjusted to match the size of block fonts e Block Adjusts the size of scalable characters to exactly match its block font alternative 205 Chapter 4 206 IGP PGL Emulation True Form Slew This option is related to slewing within forms when using the PMODE command Customers with new applications are advised to keep this option enabled
121. DER XX Change RBN Soon warning message The default is Under 2 See RBN Low Action below for details of how the printer behaves once a ribbon low condition is reached The values are Under 2 default Under 5 Under 10 Under 20 and Under 30 259 Chapter 4 260 ADVANCED USER Menu RBN Low Action This menu determines how the printer behaves once a ribbon low condition is reached Warn amp Continue default Once a ribbon low condition is reached the printer beeps and displays the RIBBON UNDER XX Change RBN Soon warning message Printing will continue without interruption The warning message can be cleared by pressing the ONLINE Clear button however the message will persist again in two minutes This action will continue until a ribbon out ribbon life reaches 0 condition occurs Warn amp Pause This setting is similar to the Warn amp Continue selection with one exception When a ribbon low condition is reached the printer will still display the RIBBON UNDER XX Change RBN Soon warning message however the printer will stop printing This is meant to get the user s attention To resume printing the user must press the ONLINE Clear key NOTE Printing will only stop on the first occurrence of a ribbon low condition Once the user clears the warning message subsequent warnings will display the warning message but printing will continue RBN End Action This menu allows the user to override the
122. EAP ACTIVE IGP EMUL Auto Save Ethernet WLAN EAP 9 PGL SFCC VGL SFCC Printer Protocol Form Length Form Width Select CPI Select LPI P Series SFCC Ribbon End Point Save Config Power Up Config If installed 64 2 If Twinax is selected 3 f VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu 5 Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial 8 If Real Time Clock RTC option is installed 7 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printer only 8 Based on WLAN radio installed 9 If a Feature File has been downloaded P7000 STD Firmware Mgmt Port Number If installed 2 If Twinax is selected 3 If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu ACTIVE EMULATION PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS lt a IGP EMUL CONTROL USER page 121 page 123 page 251 page 254 page 261 IGP PGL CTHI Ribbon End Point Ptx Setup Option Printer Tests IGP VGL LinePrinter Open Platen BOF Hex Dump Mode Test Width IGP PGL 4 Bar Code Quality Power up State Paper Out Dots IGP VGL Tear Bar Dist Downloaded Fonts System Memory IPDS View Function 7 PMD Fault Print Statistics Unidirectional Power Stacker 1 Software Build Display Language Auto Elevator Feature File Accented Chars Auto Locking
123. ED Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job again If the message appears load the latest emulation software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility 296 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message E Explanation Solution E07 ILLEGAL INS Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E08 FLOATINGPNT Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E12 SYSTEM CALL Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support
124. Enable Enable Enable 97 Chapter 4 98 HOST INTERFACE Menu Interface Type This parameter allows you to select either the RS 232 or RS 422 serial port interface The default is RS 232 Data Protocol You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host interface requirements XON XOFF default The printer controls the flow of communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off In some situations such as when the buffer is full or the timing of signals is too slow or too fast the printer will tell the host to stop transmission by sending an XOFF character An XOFF character is sent when the number of empty bytes in the buffer is less than or equal to 25 percent of the buffer size If the host keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent the printer firmware will continue to send an XOFF for every 16 characters received When cleared the printer will resume receiving data XON The data does not have any End of Text codes XON XOFF is a non block protocol ETX ACK End of Text Acknowledge The host controls the flow of communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an End of Text ETX signal When the printer receives the ETX signal it will acknowledge the ETX thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data ACK NAK ACK means acknowledge the device acknowledges it has accepted a transmission NAK means negative acknowled
125. Host Font Page Print Char Protocol Select Command Attributes Format Set see page 158 Select CPI Enable see page 158 see page 158 6 0 CPI Ignore All 10 0 CPI Ignore CPI 12 0 CPI Ignore LPI 13 3 CPI Ignore Unidir 15 0 CPI 17 1 CPI 20 0 CPI Select LPI 6 0 LPI 8 0 LPI 10 3 LPI P S Mode CPI Changed Unchanged Reset Cmd Set Barcode Barcode CFG Ld Substitution x offset Height Disable Inactive Disable Disable Power up config Active Enable Enable Current config Factory config 157 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation Factory Default These menus do not appear if the Coax or Twinax host interface is selected See page 87 This value is 132 if the Coax or Twinax host interface is selected Printer Protocol from page 157 P Series P Series Serial Proprinter Epson XQ Matrix XL FX see page 164 see page 172 seepage 174 see page 179 see page 183 Font Attributes from page 157 Typeface Prop Bold Print Italic Print Slashed Text Spacing Zero Position Data Processing _Disable Disable Disable Disable Top of Line NLQ 4 Enable Enable Forward Slant Enable Bottom of Line OCR A Backward Slant OCR B High Speed NLQ Sans Serif High Speed 100 NLQ 200 DP 200 High Speed 64 BARCODE 145 BARCODE 160 DP 144 High Speed 144 Page Format from page 157
126. IGP X00 compatible Width Limit e Disable default Enable The system will limit the length and width for expanded characters to a limit shown in Table 9 which displays the maximum width allowed for a specific height in the range of 00 through 40 0 0 through 4 0 inches Table 9 Width Limit Table Height Param red Height Param Ma 00 99 21 51 01 99 22 53 02 3 23 56 03 6 24 58 04 8 25 61 05 11 26 63 06 13 27 66 07 16 28 68 08 18 29 71 09 21 30 73 10 23 31 76 11 26 32 78 12 28 33 81 13 31 34 83 14 33 35 86 15 36 36 88 16 38 37 91 17 41 38 93 18 43 39 96 19 46 40 98 20 48 Absorb After PN e Disable default All line terminators that follow the PN command are sent to the printer and processed e Enable The first motion line terminator that follows the PN command is ignored IGP110 Compatbl This option instructs the VGL to behave similarly to the IGP 10 with respect to certain commands All new users with new applications should select the Disable option Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual e Disable default The IGP does not emulate the IGP 10 mode e Enable The IGP emulates the IGP 10 version 219 Chapter 4 220 IGP VGL Emulation Auto FF at PN Disable default A form feed will not be generated automatically when the PN command is encountered e Enable A form feed will be generated automatically to sl
127. Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek Hebrew Old ASCII USA ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852 ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New French ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew DEC German ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek Latin 1 Hebrew English MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek Win CP 1255 Danish MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek Swedish Sakr CP714 7 bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Italian Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 Spanish I CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 Japanese Arabic CP 864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 Norwegian Arabic CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO Danish II Arabic Lam 1 CP 1048 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Spanish II Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1 Latin Am I Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 French Canadian Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Latin Am II Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 OCR A 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO OCR B Lith CP 773 Multinational Serbo Croatic 1 ASCII USA Serbo Croatic 2 EBCDIC CP 774 Code Page 850 CP 775 CP 858 EURO ISO 8859 4 IBM PC E Turkish Misc UTF 8 Sets Sets Data Gen Turk Block set 10cpi DEC Turkish Italics Set IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Azeri 185 Chapter 4 186 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II Epson FX Character Se
128. Low Action RBN End Action DIAGNOSTICS DATE PRINTER MGMT page 261 page 264 page 265 Printer Tests Hour PNE Port Test Width Minute Mgmt Protocol Paper Out Dots Year PNE Port Number 9 System Memory Month PNE Port Timeout Print Statistics Software Build Feature File 1 Shuttle Type Day Status Port Numb Mgmt Port Number If installed If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 3 If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 4 If LP is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 5 if Postscript PDF is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 6 Not available if PNE Port is set at Serial 7 If Real Time Clock RTC option is installed 8 Available for pedestal printers only 9 Based on WLAN radio installed 10 if a Feature File has been downloaded 75 Chapter 4 Main Menu OpenPrint P7000 HD Postscript PDF Firmware 76 OFFLINE QUICK ZTP CONFIG HOST NETWORK SETUP SETTINGS CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP page 77 page 333 page 85 page 87 page 105 HOST INTERFACE ZTP Function Load Config IEEE 1284 Ethernet Address ETHERNET ADDRESS ZTP TearDistance Save Config Ethernet Ethernet Params WLAN Address ZTP Data Time Print Config Auto Switching WLAN Address 1 ZTP Data Time ZTP Wait Time Delete Confi
129. MULATION from page 123 IGP PGL Emulation IGP PGL Submenu With PCL II Factory Default 198 IGP PGL Define CR Define LF Autowrap PGL PI Slew CR Edit Select Code Code SFCC Range Font CR CR LF LF Disable 7E 16 Disable 0 CR CR LF LF CR LF Enable 15 Enable 1 33 Select LPI Auto Skip Cmd Power On Ext Execute UPC Compressed Uppercase Prefix IGP PGL Copy Descenders CPI 6 0 Disable Enable Enable Disable Enable Disable 8 0 Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable 9 0 10 0 Ignore IGP100 Optimized Error Char Compatbl Ratio Report Ignore Mode Disable Disable On Disable Enable Enable Debug Mode Enable Fault Select Char oft 0 0 255 EMULATION from page 123 IGP PGL Submenu with LG IGP PGL Submenu with LG Factory Default IGP PGL Define CR Define LF Autowrap PGL PI Slew CR Edit Select Font Code Code SFCC Range CR CR LF LF Disable 7E 16 Disable 0 CR CR LF LF CR LF_ Enable 15 Enable 1 34 Select LPI Auto Skip Cmd Power On Ext Execute UPC Compressed Up
130. Message Correct planatio Solutio PAP FIFO UNDRFL No Paper First In First Out Contact your authorized service error on controller board PAP ILLGL ST No Paper Illegal State Contact your authorized service Firmware error on representative controller board PAP INCMPL ENER No Paper Incompletely Contact your authorized service Energized Firmware representative error on controller board PAP INVLD CMD No Paper Invalid Command Contact your authorized service Firmware error on representative controller board PAP INVLD PARM No Paper Invalid Parameter Contact your authorized service Firmware error on representative controller board PAP NOT SCHED No Paper Not Scheduled Contact your authorized service The paper feed process representative is not scheduling on the controller board and the printer cannot feed paper PAP NT AT SPEED No Paper Not At Speed Contact your authorized service Firmware error on representative controller board PAP UNEXP INT No Paper Unexpected Contact your authorized service Interrupt Firmware error representative on controller board PARAMETER ERROR No Illegal parameter value Contact your system administrator received in command code over a coax twinax interface PAPER REQUESTED Yes A paper size mismatch is Check the paper size setting and if A4 detected necessary load new media and change the paper size menu option PARITY ERROR Yes The printed output may Check y
131. Mult ASCII USA French German English Norw Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese French Canadian Dutch Finnish Swiss OCR A OCR B Latin 9 8859 15 CP 858 Euro 171 Chapter 4 Printer Protocol from page 158 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II P Series XQ Emulation Factory Default P Series XQ Control Code Define CR Auto LF Define LF Compressed Elong Alt 06 Code Code Font 8 0 LPI CR CR Disable LF CR LF char01 SOH Elng BS Font SO 10 3 LPI CR CR LF_ Enable LF LF char 03 ETX Elng SO Font BS 6 0 LPI char 09 HT HS Print VFU Select Upr Case Slew Select Relative char 02 STX EVFU Disable 1 15 lines char 03 ETX DVFU Enable 1 16 lines char 09 HT CVFU Disable Control Code 06 Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 ACK You can select an alternate line spacing of 6 8 or 10 3 LPI Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer e CR CR default Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return e CR CR LF I
132. N key 27 UPC Descenders 202 217 Update PDF 249 Upr Case Select P Series XQ Emulation 174 User Def Ratio 203 Usr Defined HTRN 130 153 Usr Defined HTRN PTX Transparent 138 Usr Defined HTRN SPC Type 156 UTF 8 208 Var Form Adjust 204 Var Form Type 204 Vert Forms 81 Vert Forms LG Emulation 235 Ver Erase Zone 248 VFU Select 167 VFU Select P Series XQ Emulation 173 VGL SFCC 215 View Function PRINTER CONTROL 252 VIEW EJECT key 25 Voltage 320 VPA Check IPDS Emulation 228 W WAITING FOR ETHERNET ADAPTER message 315 Warnings 14 Weight printer 318 WELD NOT DETECT message 315 WELD RESET ERROR message 315 WELD SNSR MISSING message 315 WEP Key 1 WLAN PARAMS Menu 116 WEP Key 2 WLAN PARAMS Menu 116 WEP Key 3 WLAN PARAMS Menu 116 WEP Key 4 WLAN PARAMS Menu 116 Width Limit 219 WLAN Address 78 WLAN ADDRESS Menu 112 DHCP 112 Gateway address 112 IP address 112 MAC address 112 Subnet mask 112 WLAN EAP Menu 120 EAP Mode 120 EAP Username 120 Reset EAP Password 120 Reset EAP User 120 WLAN KERBEROS Menu 117 Clock Skew 118 KDC Port Number 118 Kerberos Enable 117 Kerb Passwrd 118 Renew Lifetime 118 Reset Kerb Pwd 118 Ticket Lifetime 118 WLAN LEAP Menu 119 Auth Method 119 LEAP Password 119 120 LEAP Username 119 Reset LEAP Password 119 Reset LEAP User 119 WLAN PARAMS Menu 113 Antenna 115 Ant Diversity 115 Auth Method 116 Channel 114
133. NTERFACE Menu Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed In order to support this feature the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use For example if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then receives a second print job from the parallel port the data from the parallel port will trickle bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast This function is not applicable for C T hotport Dataproducts Submenu Dataproducts Submenu Dataproducts from page 87 Factory Default 1 OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256 Data Bit 8 PI Ignored Data Resp Latch Data Prime Signal Polarity Polarity On Enable Enable Standard Standard Middle Disable Disable Disable Inverted Inverted Trailing Enable Leading TOF Action Buffer Size Auto Trickle in K
134. ON LINE key toggles the printer from online to offline mode The status indicator is lit in online mode Offline In offline mode you can perform operator functions such as loading paper and setting top of form You can also move within the printer configuration menus Pressing the ON LINE CLEAR key toggles the printer from offline to online mode The status indicator is off in offline mode Fault In fault mode a condition exists which must be cleared before printing can continue The status indicator flashes the alarm beeps if configured to sound and a descriptive fault message displays The current operating mode can be selected via control panel keys or can result from routine operations such as powering on the printer 23 Chapter 3 TheControl Panel The Control Panel 24 Figure 5 shows the keys displays and indicators as they appear on the control panel The following section provides the descriptions and functions of the control panel keys Key combinations are indicated with the plus sign For example Press A V means to press the A key and the V key at the same time 14 Circular PRT CONFIG SET TOF Pad Message Display Emulation Status Indicator CD ONLINE lt PGL gt RIBBON LIFE 100 NEC J N ANS AN PA a vo 273 E Ribbon Life ONLINE PAPER Mh JOB SELECT
135. PI signals The Data Bit 8 configuration option must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer Max PI 16 e Enable default A paper slew of 0 15 will move 1 16 lines e Disable A paper slew of 1 15 will move 1 15 lines A paper slew of 0 will always move 1 line Prt To Emulate This option allows you to select an earlier model printer IGP board combination to emulate When a printer emulation is selected the scaling command causes the printer to generate a graphic image in the same density as the printer emulation chosen Five types of printers can be emulated MVP or MVP 150B L150 P3040 P6000 and P9000 Once a printer emulation is selected it remains active until the printer is turned off or another printer emulation is selected All new users with new applications should select the Disable option which insures the printer behaves as described in this manual The other compatibility modes are required to emulate the behaviors of older printers which may be inconsistent with the documented VGL functionality Proper use of this feature requires the printer to be equipped with high resolution hammer bank tips 12 mil 223 Chapter 4 Font Set from page 210 IGP VGL Emulation IGP VGL Font Set Menu Factory Default Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets 0 ASCII ASMO 449 Cod
136. PRINTER CONTROL This menu allows you to select parameters common to a general user such as display language and Barcode quality ADVANCED USER This menu allows you to select several advanced operating parameters for the printer such as the speed at which paper will advance when slewing DIAGNOSTICS This menu includes the diagnostic tests system memory software build part number Feature File if one exists the shuttle type and statistics of the printer DATE This menu allows you to set the printer s real time clock The parameters include hours minutes year month and day PRINTER MGMT These options allow you to select the PNE port type port number port timeout period status port number and management port number 63 Chapter 4 Main Menu P7000 STD Firmware OFFLINE QUICK ZTP CONFIG HOST NETWORK SETUP SETTINGS CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP page 77 page 333 page 85 page 87 page 105 HOST INTERFACE ZTP Function Load Config Auto Switching Adapter Address 1 Device ID ZTP TearDistance Save Config Centronics Adapter Params 1 Adapter Address ZTP Data Time Print Config Dataproducts Ethernet Address Ethernet Address ZTP Wait Time Delete Config IEEE 1284 Ethernet Params WLAN Address 1 ZTP Platen Open Power Up Config Serial WLAN Address ZTP DataTime Protect Configs Twinax WLAN Params ZTP WaitTime 7 Name Configs Coax WLAN Kerberos ZTP TearDist 7 Reset Cfg Names E Net Adapter WLAN L
137. PRINTRONIX P7000 Cartridge Ribbon Printer User s Manual READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER Software License Agreement CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER USING THIS PRINTER INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRINTER AND ALL ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE AND WRITTEN MATERIALS TO THE PLACE YOU OBTAINED THEM AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED Definitions Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable data and program The term Software Product includes the Software resident in the printer and its documentation The Software Product is licensed not sold to you and Printronix Inc either owns or licenses from other vendors who own all copyright trade secret patent and other proprietary rights in the Software Product License 1 Authorized Use You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software resident in the printer solely for your own customary business or personal purposes 2 Restrictions a To protect the proprietary rights of Printronix Inc you agree to maintain the Software Product and other proprietary information concerning the typefaces in strict confidence b You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software Product e You shall not sublicense sell lease or otherwise transfer all or any portion of the Software Pro
138. Printer Overview There are three printer configurations Enclosed Cabinet P72XX The enclosed cabinet models provide for near silent operation making these printers perfectly suitable for use in the quietest of office environments Provides the best paper handling for large print runs All paper input and output is contained inside the cabinet and protected from bumping and contamination Highly effective combination of moveable fences and chains allows for precise stacking all the way up to a full box of paper For tougher forms that tend not to refold well a SureStak power stacker option is available for the enclosed cabinet models Available in four print speeds 500 line per minute 1000 line per minute 1500 line per minute 2000 line per minute and HD models Pedestal P70XX The pedestal model has a clamshell design that allows easy access to all controls providing faster ribbon replacements and easier paper loading Oversized casters are standard making movement easy Versatility to configure the paper path for either top or rear exit Using the top paper exit this printer is ideal for short print runs and easy access to output Available in three print speeds 500 line per minute 1000 line per minute 1500 line per minute and HD models Zero Tear Pedestal P70XXZT Special push tractor configuration enables printing from the very first to the very last line of a form and then tear off with no forms lost
139. R to place the printer in offline mode 2 From the host system stop the print job NOTE If the print job is not stopped from the host system before pressing 3 CANCEL the print job continues with data missing when the printer returns to online mode Exercise caution to prevent unwanted data loss occurrences as this function deletes unprinted data in the printer This function is active only in offline mode the purpose of this function is to eliminate the necessity of printing unwanted data when print jobs are canceled 3 Press CANCEL NOTE You may need to enable the Cancel option on the front panel See ADVANCED USER Menu on page 254 for details 4 Setthe top of form Refer to the Quick Reference Guide 28 Reload Paper Operational Procedures This section contains routine printer operating procedures on how to e reload paper e unload paper Reload Paper Do this procedure when LOAD PAPER displays This message occurs when the last sheet of paper passes through the paper slot This procedure reloads paper without removing the last sheet of the old paper supply while retaining the current top of form setting J d 1 Wire Les Guide 2 Paper Paper Slot Slot a Metal Paper Guide P7220 and P7200HD correat
140. RK SETUP Menu Keep Alive Timer This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run With the Keep Alive Timer on the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has terminated e 3 Minutes default e 2 10 Minutes Ethernet Speed This menu option only appears if a 10 100Base T network interface card NIC is installed The Ethernet Speed menu allows compatibility with different systems and networks The factory default is Auto Select e Auto Select default This setting tells the 10 100Base T NIC to perform an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex or 100 Full Duplex e 10 Half Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using half duplex e 10 Full Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using full duplex e 100 Half Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using half duplex e 100 Full Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using full duplex Job Control The job control mode has three options e Standard default The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job The status line shows done when the job is completely received by the NIC e Enhanced The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job The status line s
141. RROR SDA No The SDRAM or a PCI Cycle power to see if the message LINE STUCK LOW card is shorting out the clears if not contact your serial data bus on the authorized service representative controller board B55 STATUS SEND No EC program downloaded No action is required PROGRAM TO EC and being programed in EC x y BARCODES Yes In the OpenPrint SURE SCAN success depends on Not Found products SURE SCAN the symbology quality of the detects fewer barcodes barcode graphic and dimensions of than the set value for the barcode See OpenPrint SURE Barcodes on Page SCAN Menu on page 242 for more menu option x information represents the number of barcodes not found and y represents the Barcodes on Page value BUFFER OVERRUN Yes The print buffer has Verify that the printer matches the overflowed on a serial host serial interface configuration interface The printed settings for Data Protocol Baud output may contain Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity random asterisk Data Terminal Ready and Request characters Make a to Send Set printer serial interface configuration printout parameters to match those of the host CLEAR PAPER JAM Yes No paper motion Clear jam and reload paper If this message recurs contact your authorized service representative 291 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Clearing Flash
142. Real Time Clock RTC option is installed e The Power Stacker and Auto Elevator options are also available for configuration when the SureStak power stacker is installed e QUICK SETUP This menu is a collection of popular menus to help users quickly configure the printer It is also affected by the installed options 60 Active Emulations The emulations present in the printer are based on the firmware installed and the emulation options included Both are configured from the Factory and do not require any action from the user IMPORTANT Be sure to know which type of firmware and options are purchased see Table 2 to understand the ACTIVE IGP EMUL ACTIVE EMULATION and EMULATION main menus Table 2 Available Firmware Types and Options Default Selection installed replaces the options The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL VGL option is The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options IGP PGL amp LP and IGP VGL amp LP when the PGL VGL option is installed Otherwise LinePrinter Firmware Type Ese itis e EMULATION 1 2 Available EMUL EMULATION IPDS IGP PGL N A CTHI IPDS IGP PGL P7000 STD CTHI LinePrinter PGL VGL IPDS IGP VGL N A CTHI IGP VGL LinePrinter IGP PGL N A IGP PGL LinePrinter P7000 TN PGL VGL IGP VGL N A IGP VGL LinePrinter PCL II PCL II IGP PGL amp LP IGP PGL P7000 PCL II PGL VGL N A LinePrin
143. Right to Left Enable Enable Printer Width 148 5250 Params Char Set Select from page 148 Primary Sets Secondary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK 0892 OCR A 0893 OCR B 0424 Hebrew 0803 Hebrew Old 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0256 Intern 1 1112 Balt Mult 0924 Euro Lat 9 1122 Estonian 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1143 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice 0500 Internat 5 English US Austrian German Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Finnish Swedish French Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Spanish Spanish Speak English UK Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Latin 2 ROECE Yugoslavian Multinational 5250 Params Factory Default 149 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Translation Tbl Prints out a table of the TN5250 interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the TN5250 interface is the current i
144. Save Enable default When a change has been made to a Config menu this option automatically prompts the user to save or not save the change to a Config If you are currently in the Factory Config menus and make a change pressing ENTER saves to Config 1 or the next available Config and becomes the Power Up Config If the Current Config is Config 1 anda menu change is made pressing ENTER will save the change to Config 1 Disable The printer will not prompt you to save any changes made HOST INTERFACE Menu HOST Factory Default INTERFACE 1 If installed from page 64 66 68 70 72 74 and 76 Auto Twinax Coax IEEE 1284 Centronics Dataproducts Switching see page 88 Available with Available with seepage 90 see page 92 see page 95 CT Option CT Option Serial E Net Ethernet Adapter see page 97 see page 103 see page 104 The Host Interface Menu enables you to select and configure one of many types of interfaces between the printer and your host computer The currently selected interface is indicated with an asterisk on the control panel message display Each interface has its own submenu with a set of interface parameters which can be configured 87 Chapter 4 IMPORTANT HOST INTERFACE Menu When switching between Twinax Coax or Auto Switching the printer will load the powe
145. Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 Hebrew Turkish Misc UTF 8 Sets Sets Sets Hebrew Old Data Gen Turk Block set 10cpi Hebrew New DEC Turkish Italics Set Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi Latin 1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set Win CP 1255 PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Azeri 168 Character Set P Series from page 164 P Series Emulation With LG Standard Sets IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult CP 858 EURO Primary Subset ASCII USA Primary Subset ASCII USA ASCII USA EBCDIC ASCII USA French French German German German Swedish English English Danish Norw Danish Danish Norwegian Swedish Swedish Finnish Italian Italian English Spanish Spanish Dutch Japanese Japanese French French Canadian French Canadian Spanish Dutch Latin American Italian Finnish Norwegian Turkish Swiss Danish II Japanese Spanish II Extended Subset Latin Am II Multinational Extended Subset Code Page 437 Code Page 850 Barcode 10 cpi Mult DP 10 cpi Mult DP 12 cpi Mult LQ 10 cpi Greek DP 10 cpi Greek DP 12 cpi Greek LQ 10 cpi Grap DP 10 cpi Grap LQ 10 cpi Sci DP 10 cpi Sci DP 12 cpi Sci LQ 10 cpi 169 Chapter 4 170 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II P Series
146. Sets ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek Hebrew Old ASMO 4494 Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852 ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew DEC ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek Latin 1 Hebrew MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek Win CP 1255 MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek Sakr CP714 7 bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 Arabic CP 864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 Arabic CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 818 EURO Arabic Lam 1 CP 1048 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 E Turkish Misc UTF 8 Sets Sets Data Gen Turk Block set 10cpi DEC Turkish Italics Set IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Azeri Code Page Code Page OCR A OCR B Multinational CP 858 EURO 437 850 ASCII USA EBCDIC 181 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II 182 Proprinter XL Character Sets Menu with PCL II Character Set Factory Default from page 179 Code P
147. Slew Enable Disable Overwrite Files Disable 5 Seconds Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable 1 60 Seconds Enable Disable View File List Delete Files Flash Avail Optimize amp Reboot Print File List Alarm Power Saver Pwr Save Cancel Rcv Status Ret Status Time Control Key Port Port On 15 minutes Enable Disable Automatic Disable Cont Beep 1 min 240 min Disable Enable Serial E Net Data Port Off Instant Serial 5 sec 30 sec E Net Status Port IEEE 1284 Automatic Set Lock RBN Low RBN Low RBN End Key Warn Action Action Under 2 Warn amp Continue Ignore RBN End Under 5 Warn amp Pause Stop At RBN End Under 10 Under 20 Under 30 254 ADVANCED USER Menu PTX Setup Option Selects the Special Function Control Code for the PTX SETUP command and functions e Setup Parse Disables or enables the PTX SETUP command e Setup SFCC Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character you wish to use as the SFCC for the PTX SETUP command Valid hex values are 01 FF The default value is hex 21 which corresponds to the P character Hex Dump Mode A hex code printout or hex dump translates all incoming data to hexadecimal equivalents A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the host computer together with its corresponding two digit hexadecimal code Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception problems The options include Disable default E
148. South Industrial Estate Singapore 486763 Phone 65 6542 0110 Fax 65 6546 1588 Printronix Commercial Shanghai Co Ltd 22F Eton Building East No 555 Pudong Av Shanghai City 200120 P R China Phone 86 400 886 5598 Fax 86 21 5138 0564 Visit the Printronix web site at www printronix com 2 Setting Up The Printer Before You Begin Read this chapter carefully before installing and operating the printer The printer is easy to install However for your safety and to protect valuable equipment perform all the procedures in this chapter in the order presented Power Requirements The printer must be connected to a power outlet that supplies 88 to 270 volts AC The printer automatically senses and adjusts itself to conform to the correct voltage range Primary circuit protection is provided by the power switch which is also a circuit breaker Consult an electrician if printer operation affects local electrical lines IMPORTANT Printer power should be supplied from a separate AC circuit protected at 10 amperes for 100 120 volts or 5 amperes for 200 240 volts at 50 or 60 Hertz Select A Site Select a printer site that meets all of the following requirements Permits complete opening of the printer cover and doors For cabinet models allows at least three feet of clearance behind the printer This permits air to circulate freely around the printer and provides access to the paper stacking area
149. Submenu IGP PGL Submenu Factory Default EMULATION from page 123 IGP PGL Define CR Define LF Autowrap PGL PI Slew CR Edit Select Code Code SFCC Range Font CR CR LF LF Disable 7E 16 Disable see page 208 CR CR LF LF CR LF Enable 1 255 15 Enable Slash 0 Select LPI Auto Skip Cmd Forms Power On Ext Execute Uppercase Prefix Handling IGP PGL Copy Disable 6 0 Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable 8 0 Enable Disable Auto Eject Disable Enable 9 0 Auto TOF 10 0 Barcode Host Form Var Form Var Form Compressed Ignore Compatbl Options Length Adjust Type CPI Char Mode see page 202 Disable 00 0 inches Add Nothing Disable Ignore Mode None Enable 1 3 0 inches Add O Light Font Disable MVP Add X Dark Font Enable L150 Select Char P3000 0 P6000 0 255 P9000 Expanded Scalable True Form Printer PI Print Power on Font Size Slew Line Quality S Mode Scalable Normal Enable Enable Data Processing 0 Block Block Disable Disable High 0 5 Alt Block 1 Best Alt Block 2 Trunc Dyn Error Data Report Disable On Enable Debug Mode Fault Off 197 Chapter 4 E
150. T SE SIRRA IS RS fe Taiwan Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user will be required to take adequate measures EE EH LAURER TELENISRBE UE HRS WT BESHEDAUADATRE TS Mi GHA ORE RERUN NSE CAUTION This product is equipped with a 3 wire power cord and plug for the user s safety Use this power cord in conjunction with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock 345 Appendix E Software License Agreement Software License Agreement Your printer contains among other software Printronix operating software including but not limited to the Embedded Configurable Operating System the eCos Software as embedded software The terms of this Agreement apply only to the eCos Software and all other embedded software supplied with the printer You accept the terms of this Agreement by your initial use of your printer eCos License This file is part of eCos the Embedded Configurable Operating System Copyright C 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 Red Hat Inc eCos is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 or at your option any later version You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with eCos if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple P
151. TIVE EMULATION menu 5 If PCL II is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 6 Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial 7 f Real Time Clock RTC option is installed 8 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printer only 9 Based on WLAN radio installed 10 f a Feature File has been downloaded P7000 PCL II Firmware Mgmt Port Number lif installed ACTIVE EMULATION PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS 44 EMULATION CONTROL USER page 121 page 123 page 251 page 254 page 261 PCL II LinePrinter 4 Ribbon End Point Hex Dump Mode Printer Tests IGP PGL amp LP IGP PGL 2 Open Platen BOF Power up State Test Width IGP VGL amp LP IGP VGL Bar Code Quality PMD Fault Paper Out Dots or PCL II 5 Tear Bar Dist Power Stacker System Memory View Function 8 Auto Elevator Print Statistics PCL II Unidirectional Auto Locking Software Build LinePrinter Display Language File System Feature File 1 if IGP is not installed Shuttle Timeout Shuttle Type Slow Paper Slew Alarm Power Saver Time Pwr Save Control Cancel Key Ret Status Port Set Lock Key RBN Low Warn Q RBN Low Action RBN End Action DATE PRINTER MGMT page 264 page 265 Hour PNE Port Minute Mgmt Protocol Year PNE Port Number 9 Month PNE Port Timeout 8 Day Status Port Numb 2 If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 3 If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu
152. To optimize print quality you can change the values of the following configuration parameters Bar Code Quality Printer Control menu Select Dark or Draft Dark prints the darkest images but at the slowest speed Draft prints at a faster speed than Dark but the characters are not as dark See page 252 for a written description of Bar Code Quality Print Quality IGP PGL emulation Select Best or High Best prints the darkest images but at the slowest speed High prints at a faster speed than Best but the characters are not as dark See page 197 for the IGP PGL Configuration Menu and page 206 for a written description of Print Quality Print Quality IGP VGL emulation Select High See page 210 for the IGP VGL Configuration Menu and page 217 for a written description of Print Quality Optimizing Print Speed OpenPrint Postscript PDF Emulations You can optimize print quality for darker and sharper text and barcodes by using the following configuration parameters e Unidirectional Printer Control menu Select Enable for best quality but reduced throughput half speed e Resolution Postscript PDF menu Select higher values horizontal by vertical DPI to get better print quality Optimizing Print Speed LP IGP PGL and IGP VGL Emulations The printer has been configured at the factory for optimal print speed To optimize print quality instead you can change values for specific configura
153. Top Of Form Paper Jams Printer jams can occur if you tear off the form incorrectly If you experience two or more paper jams per box of forms follow these guidelines to help reduce jams Position the lower paper guides properly e Align the paper web tightness properly e Position the form perforation against the tear bar e Time the tear while the paper is not moving e Direct the tear force toward the user and across the tear bar not upward To Clear Paper Jams 1 Raise the platen lever to open the platen 2 Open the left and right tractor doors 3 Pullthe paper upward through the top of the printer NOTE DO NOT pull the paper downwards from the bottom This could cause the paper guides to bend 4 Reload the paper see page 328 335 Appendix C Performance Limitations 336 D Customer Support Printronix Customer Support Center IMPORTANT Please have the following information available prior to calling the Printronix Customer Support Center e Model number e Serial number located on the back of the printer e Installed options i e interface and host type if applicable to the problem e Configuration printout Line Matrix Printer Press PRT CONFIG on the control panel then press ENTER e sthe problem with a new install or an existing printer e Description of the problem be specific e Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem faxing or emailing these samples may be required Ame
154. VGL LinePrinter OpenPrint P7000 HD NA N A Postscript PDF NOTE Default Selection The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL VGL option is installed The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options IGP PGL amp LP and IGP VGL amp LP when the PGL VGL option is installed Otherwise LinePrinter replaces the options The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed 122 EMULATION Menu EMULATION Menu EMULATION from page 65 67 69 71 73 75 and 76 The EMULATION menu allows you to configure the emulation used with your printer The Proprinter XL Epson FX P Series P Series XQ and Serial Matrix emulations are all part of LinePrinter You can configure options for the active emulation via the EMULATION menu Emulation options are further described in their corresponding Programmer s Reference Manual Factory Default Optional Emulation OpenPrint firmware only CTHI LinePrinter 44 48XX IGP PGL IGP VGL IPDS ANSI page 124 page 157 page 188 page 195 page 209 page 225 PCL II LG Postscript PDF page 229 page 233 page 238 128 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 124 EMULATION from p
155. Voltage Contact your authorized service the controller board D50 Status XX No Status message The No action is required 292 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User i Explanation lution Displayed Message Correct planatio Solutio D51 Status XX No Status message The No action is required Programming printer is loading firmware where XX represents the percentage completed D55 Status Send No Status message The No action is required Program to EC printer is loading the engine controller program into the engine controller EC DIAGNOSTIC No Status message the No action is required PASSED printer passed its memory and hardware initialization tests DO NOT POWER OFF No Status message The No action is required but do not printer is performing an power off the printer until the operation that must be operation is complete completed before you can cycle power DP FIFO Busy Yes There is a timing problem 1 Cycle power Run the print job in the Engine Controller again If the message appears firmware download the emulation software again 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears again contact your authorized service representative DRVR CIR BAD No Driver Circuit Bad The Contact your authorized service hammer coil count test representative failed E00 EXE ADDRO Yes An illegal or unsupported 1 Cycle Power Ru
156. WPA P Phs Reset WPA 31 32 7 P Phs 7 113 Chapter 4 114 NETWORK SETUP Menu Signal Strength This menu displays the strength of the wireless signal NOTE This is a display value only and cannot be changed Operation Mode Allows you to select the way the Wireless option communicates e Infrastructure default The Wireless option must go through a server e Pseudo IBSS Proprietary peer to peer communication without a server The two peers must be specific to one manufacturer e Ad Hoc Standard peer to peer communication without a server The two peers can be from different manufacturers SSID Name A 1 32 character case sensitive string that identifies the group the printer talks to NOTE The SSID name may be edited in three parts 1 15 16 30 and 31 32 For each part of the SSID name press the MICRO UP or MICRO DOWN keys to cycle through the values available for that character at the cursor location Press the SCROLL UP key to move to the next character to be modified Press the SCROLL DOWN key to go back to the name you want to give to this SSID name then press ENTER to save The name you entered will now represent this SSID name on the printer s front panel To exit this menu without saving press any key other than the ENTER key The SSID name will revert to the last saved value Reset SSID Name Allows you to reset the SSID name Min Xfer Rate Allows you to set the minimum spe
157. able Left to Right Enable Enable Printer Width Enable Right to Left 135 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Char Set Select from page 135 Primary Factory Default Secondary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK 0892 OCR A 0893 OCR B 0424 Hebrew 0803 Hebrew Old 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 0875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0256 Intern 1 1112 Balt Mult 0924 Euro Latin 9 1122 Estonian 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1143 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice 0500 Internat 5 136 Sets English US Austrian German Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Finnish Swedish French Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Spanish Spanish Speak English UK Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Latin 2 ROECE Yugoslavian Multinational Twinax Params Char Set Select Specifies the print language used by the printer Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual Acti
158. able default Different font densities can be used on the same line e Disable Only the same font densities are allowed on the same line Graphics Density Graphics can be printed in 60 DPI default or 70 DPI Perforation Skip e Disable default Allows printing on page perforation e Enable You may set up a skip over margin For example a skip over margin of one inch creates a one inch margin at the bottom of the page 231 Chapter 4 232 LINE 1 LINE 1 LINE 2 Linefeed LINE 2 LINE 3 LINE 3 PCL Il Emulation Display Functions e Disable default Control characters are not printed e Enable Control characters are printed before they get executed This is a useful debugging tool Line Terminator You can define the action of the line Four options are available LF after CR CR after LF CR after FF and CR after VT Each of these options may be enabled or disabled independent of one another PTX Linefeed e Disable default Linefeed is to be performed as calculated from the bottom of the graphics or barcode thereby disrupting the vertical text alignment e Enable The Linefeed moves to the next line as calculated from the Top of Form position thereby retaining vertical text alignment When printing graphics or bar codes you may want to set the PTX Linefeed parameter to Enable to maintain text alignment PTX Linefeed Enabled PTX Linefeed Disabled Linefeed LPI Adjust This para
159. ables that have been tested and found to comply with these requirements are Belkin part number F2A046 10 and Primelogic part number PLU 2823224 Other electrically equivalent cables are acceptable This chapter describes the interfaces provided with the printer Standard Host Interfaces EEE 1284 parallel e RS 222 Serial 267 Chapter 5 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Optional Host Interfaces e Ethernet 10 100BaseT e Coax Twinax not available in Taiwan e RS 422 Serial not available in Taiwan In addition to descriptions for the multi line interfaces this chapter also provides instructions for configuration of terminating resistors for the parallel interfaces Dataproducts Parallel Interface Table 11 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Connector Pin Assignments with a 50 pin AMP HDH 20 Data Cable Connector Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin DATA LINE 1 19 READY 22 CABLE VERIFY 45 46 Return Return 6 DATA LINE 2 20 ONLINE 21 GROUND 39 Return 4 Return 5 DATA LINE 3 1 DEMAND DATA REQ 23 Return 2 Return 7 DATA LINE 4 41 PARITY ERROR 27 Return 40 11 DATA LINE 5 34 Return 18 DATA LINE 6 43 Return 42 DATA LINE 7 36 Return 35 DATA LINE 8 28 Return 44 DATA STROBE 38 Return 37 PAPER INSTRUCTION 30 Return 14 BUFFER CLEAR 31 Return 15 NOTE Pins not listed are not connected 268 The length of the data cable from the host comput
160. add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE
161. age 123 Factory Default Coax Twinax Host Interface Available for TN emulation only CTHI Standard Simp Prot Conv Coax Twinax 3270 5250 SPC Coax SPC Twinax Params Params Params 2 Params 2 Params Params page 126 page 135 page 141 page 148 page 152 page 155 Standard With a standard coax interface the printer emulates the following IBM coax printer models e 3287 Models 1 and 2 e 4234 Model 1 With a standard twinax interface the printer emulates the following IBM twinax printer models e 4234 Models 2 and 12 e 5225 Models 1 2 3 and 4 NOTE The standard Coax Twinax emulation selection will only be available if Coax or Twinax is selected from the HOST INTERFACE menu See page 87 For more information refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual Simple Prot Conv Simple Prot Conv The Simple Protocol Converter SPC option allows those who use third party add on Coax or Twinax protocol converters to produce the same output on a Line Matrix printer with the Coax Twinax CTHI capability as done using a non CT printer with the third party converter interfaces The SPC replaces the third party add on protocol converters attached to older line matrix printers The SPC gives the printer the operational ability to connect to any PC or network system supporting parallel or serial interfaces and to three different
162. age 177 178 Standard Sets IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult CP 858 EURO Primary Subset ASCII USA Primary Subset ASCII USA ASCII USA EBCDIC ASCII USA French French German German German Swedish English English Danish Norw Danish Danish Norwegian Swedish Swedish Finnish Italian Italian English Spanish Spanish Dutch Japanese Japanese French French Canadian French Canadian Spanish Dutch Latin American Italian Finnish Norwegian Turkish Swiss Danish II Japanese Spanish II Extended Subset Latin Am II Multinational Extended Subset Code Page 437 Code Page 850 Barcode 10 cpi Mult DP 10 cpi Mult DP 12 cpi Mult LQ 10 cpi Greek DP 10 cpi Greek DP 12 cpi Greek LQ 10 cpi Grap DP 10 cpi Grap LQ 10 cpi Sci DP 10 cpi Sci DP 12 cpi Sci LQ 10 cpi Printer Protocol from page 158 Proprinter XL Emulation Proprinter XL Emulation Factory Default Proprinter XL Define CR Auto LF Define LF FF valid at Character Alt Char 20 CPI Code Code TOF Set Set Condensed CR CR Enable LF LF Enable see page 181 Set 1 Enable CR CR LF Disable LF CR LF Disable Set2 Disable Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time th
163. age 437 Code Page 850 OCR A OCR B Latin 2 8859 2 Latin 2 852 Bulgarian Latin 9 8859 15 Polish POL1 Multinational DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859 7 PC851 LtGk 12G Greek 7 12N Greek 8 8G Hebrew Old Hebrew New Hebrew DEC Proprinter XL Character Sets Menu with LG Character Set Factory Default from page 179 Code Page 437 Code Page 850 OCR A OCR B Code Page 210 Code Page 220 Code Page 852 Code Page 855 Code Page 857 Code Page 862 Code Page 866 Lithuanian 1 Lithuanian 2 Hebrew New Hebrew Dec Hebrew Old Latin 9 8859 15 CP 858 Euro Printer Protocol from page 158 Epson FX Emulation Epson FX Emulation Factory Default Epson FX Define CR Auto LF Define LF Printer Character 20 CPI Alt Set Code Code Select Set Condensed 80 9F CR CR Enable LF LF Disable see page 185 Enable Control Code CR CR LF Disable LF CR LF Enable Disable Printable Define CR Code The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a carriage return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer e CR CR defa
164. age to the printer Power Stacker This parameter allows you to enable or disable the power paper stacker provided this option is installed Auto Elevator This parameter exists only on printers with the power paper stacker installed The power stacker has a sensor which detects paper movement and raises the stacker as the printed paper stack grows If the printer has been printing for three minutes continually and the sensor has not detected any growth in the paper stack the stacker raises itself 1 4 inch automatically e Enable default The automatic elevator on the power stacker operates normally e Disable The stacker does not raise automatically every three minutes and is entirely dependent on the sensor Diable is used with extremely high quality print jobs that take a long time to print Auto Locking e Disable default The ENTER key must be locked manually e Enable The printer automatically locks the ENTER key five minutes after the last front panel key press File System e Overwrite Files Allows you to prevent files from being overwritten by disabling the overwrite function e View File List Displays the list of files in the file system Pressing the DOWN key displays the file size Delete Files Displays the list of files in the file system Pressing the ENTER key deletes the file displayed on the front panel Flash Avail The amount of flash available for the user to save or download files into flash
165. age will not display on the control panel Offline Process e Disable default When set to disable the printer does not process parallel network data while in offline mode e Enable When set to enable the printer continues to process without printing the current network parallel job while the printer is offline until the printer s buffer is full E Net Adapter Submenu E Net Adapter Submenu Factory Default OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256 E Net Adapter from page 87 Buffer Size inK 16 1 16 The E Net Adapter interface allows you to locate the printer on a LAN rather than attach the host directly into the printer The detailed configuration of this option is given in the PrintNet User s Manual Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet buffer You can specify between 1 16 Kbytes The default is 16 Kbytes NOTE OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K 103 Chapter 4 HOSTINTERFACE Menu Ethernet Submenu Factory Default Ethernet OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256 from page 87 Buffer Size ink 16 1 16 The Ethernet interface allows you to locate the printer on a LAN rather than attach the host directly into the printer The detailed configuration of this option is given in the Network Interface Card User s Manual Buffer Size
166. ains an error other than an off page error Offpage Errors e Disable default Does not report errors for elements that start or end beyond the right edge of the page e Enable Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right edge of the page Barcode Errors e Enable default An error message will print when invalid barcode data is encountered e Disable VGL will not print an error for illegal barcode data the barcode will be skipped NOTE When the Barcode Errors option is disabled the VGL emulation will try to make the best use of invalid data by either truncating extra digits or adding zeros to the end of barcode data to meet minimum data length requirements for some barcodes Not all errors will be corrected Ignore DB8 Setup Following are several options which define character filtering and Data Bit 8 Ignore Chars e Disable default Character filtering is not enabled e Char 1 Character 1 will be filtered Select the option Ignore CH 1 to specify character 1 e Char 2 Character 2 will be filtered Select the option Ignore CH 2 to specify character 2 e Char 1 amp 2 Characters 1 amp 2 will be filtered Select the options Ignore CH 1 and Ignore CH 2 to specify values for these characters Ignore CH 1 Specifies character 1 for the character filtering option Valid decimal values are from 0 through 255 Ignore CH 2 Specifies character 2 for the character filt
167. an SMODE state according to the compatibility mode set If the compatibility mode set is None then MVP is assumed by default For more information see the GP PGL Programmer s Reference Manual Trunc Dyn Data This submenu allows the user to truncate the dynamic data up to the maximum data length specified in Create Mode Disable default If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length an error will report Enable If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length the data truncates Error Report Sets the error reporting capability for IGP PGL forms On default Form boundary error checking reported Any element which falls off the current page is reported as an error Debug Mode The printer is put in debug mode whenever a form is defined in Create Form mode Each line of the Create Form is printed along with an error if one occurred This is the same functionality as if there were a slash entered before the Create Form Name Fault When an error occurs the error is printed and the message IGP PGL ERROR appears on the printer front panel The printer then stops printing and goes offline The error must be cleared before the printer can resume normal operation Off No form boundary checking Graphic elements appear clipped if they are beyond the page boundaries Select Font Allows you to choose from various character sets including IGP PGL Standard sets 256 character multinational sets and UTF 8 enc
168. anslation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause an
169. aracter sets except OCR A and OCR B e Disable default Zero is printed without a slash Enable Zero is printed with a slash Ignore Dots e Disable default e Enable Causes the VGL to expect position values to be specified in only 1 10ths of an inch If the dot position is also given it is treated as text Append Rotated e Disable default Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as separate elements Enable Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise counterclockwise or inverted orientation Truncate Alpha When enabled this parameter prevents the printing of Error 48 Element Off Page Error if alphanumeric data including spaces extends beyond the right side of the form The options include e Enable default Disable True Vert 1 10 e Disable default A vertical 1 10 of an inch parameter is used as 7 72 of an inch The absolute move is slightly smaller than expected For example a one inch move would be 70 72 of an inch Vertical moves that have the same value are identical in length e Enable A vertical 1 10 inch parameter is used as 1 10 inch Rounding occurs to the nearest 1 72 inch This can cause vertical moves that have the same value to differ by 1 72 inch Absorb After PY e Absorb Motion default The first paper motion following a PY command is ignored e Absorb All The system ignores all the data and terminator until a host generated motion terminator is
170. aracters Nordic CP 865 0 369 1 192 1 272 Latin 2 8859 2 Right Margin Latin 3 8859 3 0 columns Latin 4 8859 4 0 369 Lat Ara 8859 6 Top Margin Lat Gre 8859 7 0 lines Lat Heb 8859 8 0 451 Latin 5 8859 9 Bottom Margin Turkish2 CP 867 0 lines Pol Maz CP 8576 0 451 Turkish CP 8577 Greek CP 8573 Italian CP 23 Spanish CP 24 ANSI Emulation Factory Default Latin 9 8859 15 DEC 256 Greek Turkish CP 857 USA German French A French B French Canadian Dutch Netherlds Italian United Kingdom Spanish Danish Norw A Danish Norw B Danish Norw C Danish Norw D Swed Finnish A Swed Finnish B Swed Finnish C Swed Finnish D Swiss USA Yugoslavian United Kingdm A Turkish Greek DEC Mult Roman 8 189 Chapter 4 190 ANSI Emulation CPI LPI Select Defines the default values for the horizontal and vertical character spacing The number of characters per inch can range from 10 0 through 17 1 The number of lines per inch can range from 3 0 through 8 0 Font Attributes Typeface Choose a typeface from the available options Prop Spacing Proportional Spacing Each printed character is contained inside a character cell The width of the character cell includes the character and the space around the character e Disable default Each character cell is printed with the same width Each column in the printed text will line up This example is printed with proportional spacing disable
171. ble Disable Disable Disable Not Adjusted Enable Enable Enable Enable IGP110 Compatbl Disable Enable 213 Chapter 4 IGP VGL Emulation IGP VGL Submenu with LG EMULATION from page 123 Factory Default IGP VGL SFCC amp LPI Graphics Error Ignore DB8 Pwrup Options Handling Setup VGL SFCC 6 see page 215 Error Msgs Ignore Chars 5E 7 Enable Disable Power Up X 8 Disable Char 1 Disable 9 Error Markers Char 2 Enable 10 Enable Char1 amp 2 Power Up F Disable Ignore Ch 1 Disable Offpage Errors 0 Enable Disable 1 255 Power Up PY Enable Ignore Ch 2 Disable Barcode Errors 0 Enable Enable 1 255 Disable Data Bit 8 Enable Disable Font Set PCI Control 0 Printer PI 1 33 Disable Enable Host Pl Disable Enable Max PI 16 Enable Disable 214 Graphics Options from page 214 IGP VGL Submenu with LG IGP VGL with LG Graphics Options Factory Default Slash 0 Ignore Dots Append Truncate True Vert Absorb After Rotated Alpha 1 10 APY Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable Absorb Motion Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Absorb All Disable UPC Rot Char Ignore Midline PY Dark Width Limit Descenders Size Spaces
172. ble Direct Access Vertical Format Unit DVFU e CVFU Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct Access Vertical Format Unit CVFU e Disable Disables all VFU processing 173 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II Upr Case Select Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the host computer When enabled all characters will be printed in uppercase e Disable default Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as lowercase and prints uppercase characters received from the computer as uppercase e Enable Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as their corresponding uppercase equivalents uppercase characters received from the computer print as uppercase Slew Relative Slewing is rapid vertical paper movement This parameter determines the number of lines slewed either 1 15 lines or 1 16 lines when an EVFU Slew Relative command is received The options include e 1 15 Lines default e 1 16 Lines Serial Matrix Emulation Factory Default Printer Protocol from page 158 Serial Matrix Control Code Define CR Auto LF Overstrike Define LF Printer 06 Code Code Select 8 0 LPI CR CR Enable Enable LF LF Disable 10 3 LPI CR CR LF Disable Disable LF CR LF Enable 6 0 LPI Alt Set Character ESC d 80 9F Set command
173. bon end point for a lighter or darker image as required for your printing needs See PRINTER CONTROL Menu on page 251 42 Changing Ribbon Cartridge Changing Ribbon Cartridge Before changing the ribbon cartridge determine whether at the end of ribbon life if you want to make the print lighter extend the ribbon life or darker shorten the ribbon life If you want to make the print lighter or darker go to Ribbon End Point on page 83 and follow the procedures for adjusting the image density If you are satisfied with the print darkness continue with the following steps NOTE Ribbon cartridge instructions and illustrations shown in the following section are for the pedestal model Follow the same procedures for the cabinet model Blue Tractor mm d Door 2 Platen Lever as Figure 19 Preparing to Load the Ribbon Open the printer cover Raise the platen lever as far as it will go Close the tractor doors Bee qw o Remove the old ribbon cartridge and discard properly 43 Chapter 3 _ Integrated Print Management System Ribbon Tab 2 Ribbon Cartridge Ribbon Tension Knob Tab Slot 2 1 9 8l Air Shroud Assembly Figure 20 Installing the Ribbon Cartridge 5 Remove the ribbon slack on the new ribbon cartridge by turning the ribbon tension knob clockwise CAUTION Do not turn the ribbon tension knob counterclockwise This could damage the ribbon cartridge 6
174. cal Format Unit EVFU e DVFU Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compatible Direct Access Vertical Format Unit DVFU e CVFU Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct Access Vertical Format Unit CVFU e Disable Disables all VFU processing Alt Set 80 9F Determines whether the printer processes ASCII codes hex 80 through hex 9F as control codes or as printable characters The options include e Control Code default e Printable Character Set Specifies a character set as shown in the II Xepieo Xnapaytep Let Mevv ov naye 168 To use one of these sets choose the desired group heading such as European Sets and press ENTER Then choose the desired set within that group such as Roman 8 and press ENTER Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection The UTF 8 selection allows printing of UTF 8 encoded Unicode Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual SFCC d Command e Even dot plot default This option interprets SFCC d Command as even dot plot Double High This option interprets SFCC d Command as double high Select this option for backward compatibility PSeries Dbl High Allows printing compatibility between current and older model printers e Normal default This is normal double high printing for current model printers e P3 4 6 9 Compat Where older printers print two dot rows higher this option a
175. choose different keys to lock or unlock the printer menu You may choose almost any group of keys as the new lock and unlock keys You cannot use the ENTER key or any key combinations which are already used for another function There is no limit to how many keys you can select To set the new lock key follow these steps 1 Work your way through the configuration menu until the display reads Set Lock Key follow the menu structure on page 254 Press ENTER The display reads Select a new lock key Press the combination of keys you want to be the new lock key Make Sure you press all keys selected at the same time 4 Ifthe selection is valid the display will read Enter the new lock key again If the selection is invalid the display will read Invalid key selection Return to step 2 and start over 5 Press the same combination of keys a second time If the new lock key combination is entered again correctly the display will read Lock key has been changed If it was entered incorrectly the display will read Verification failed Start over at step 2 6 After entering the new lock combination successfully press the ON LINE key to put the printer back online NOTE The new lock combination will remain even if the printer is powered off and back on RBN Low Warn This option allows the user to select the Ribbon Life value at which point the printer will declare a ribbon low condition and display the HIBBON UN
176. command e 7E default e 1 FF VGL SFCC You can specify which hex code 1 FF will be used as the Special Function Control Character SFCC The SFCC denotes that the following data is an IGP command e 5E default e 1 FF Printer Protocol Select the LinePrinter protocol you wish to use Refer to the LinePrinter Plus Programmer s Reference Manual for more information Form Length Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page You can set the form length in inches millimeters mm or as a function of the current Ipi lines per inch 79 Chapter 4 80 QUICK SETUP Menu Form Width The form width can be specified in inches millimeters or as a function of the current cpi characters per inch The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width Select CPI This parameter allows you to specify the characters per inch cpi values The options are 10 0 12 0 13 3 15 0 17 1 and 20 0 The factory default is 10 0 CPI Select LPI This parameter allows you to specify the lines per inch lpi values The options are 6 0 8 0 and 10 3 LPI The factory default is 6 0 LPI P Series SFCC This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the Special Function Control Code SFCC command delimiter P Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F Options include the following e SOH hex 01 default e ESC hex 1B e ETX hex 03 e CIRCUMFLEX hex 5E also ca
177. d e Enable The width of each character cell varies with the width of the character For example i takes less space to print than m Using proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed documents giving text a typeset appearance This example is printed with proportional spacing enabled Bold Print e Disable default Text is printed normally e Enable Text is printed with a heavy line thickness Slashed Zero This parameter allows you to print the numeral 0 with or without the slash This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B e Disable default Zero is printed without a slash e Enable Zero is printed with a slash IMPORTANT ANSI Emulation Page Format Margins Left Margin Defines where the first print column is located The left margin is specified as the number of characters from the left edge of the form e Right Margin Defines where the last print column is located The right margin is specified as the number of characters from the right edge of the form e Top Margin Defines the location of the first print line on the page The top margin is specified as the number of lines from the top of the form s position Bottom Margin Defines the location of the last print line on the page The bottom margin is specified as the number of lines from the bottom of the form s position Form Length Specifies the form length in lines The maximum form length
178. d Message Correct planatio Solutio SECURITY KEY NOT No The security key is not Contact your authorized service DETECTED present or has failed representative SENDING PROGRAM No Status message the No action is required TO EC PROCESSOR printer is loading the engine controller program into the engine controller SF ERROR No Structured Field Error Not a printer problem Have the Application software has system administrator correct violated structured data applications data or configuration field parameters SHTL MISMATCH Yes This message displays Install Standard Life Ribbon Use Correct RBN when an Extended Life Ribbon is mounted on a 500 Ipm printer SHUT DRVR CIR No The shuttle driver circuit Contact your authorized service See User Manual on the controller board is representative drawing too much current SHUTL INV CMD No Shuttle Invalid Contact your authorized service error on controller board SHUTL INV PARM No Shuttle Invalid Contact your authorized service Parameter Firmware representative error on controller board SHUTL OVR SPEED No The shuttle is oscillating Contact your authorized service too rapidly representative SHUTTLE JAM Yes No shuttle movement or Check for obstruction to shuttle a shuttle moving at the twisted ribbon or platen lever wrong speed closed too tightly If fault source is not apparent contact your authorized service representative SHUTTLE STALL Yes The shuttle is not moving Set
179. ddress 78 Form Length 79 80 Form Width 80 81 Horiz Forms 81 Host Interface 77 Load Config 83 Margins 80 Max Line Width 81 Page Length Rep 81 Paper Size 82 PGL SFCC 79 Power Up Config 84 Printer Protocol 79 P Series SFCC 80 Resolution 82 Ribbon End Point 83 Save Config 84 Select CPI 80 Select LPI 80 Vert Forms 81 WLAN Address 78 ZTP Data Time 78 ZTP TearDistance 79 ZTP Wait Time 78 Quiet Zone Fault 248 R RBN AT END POINT message 311 RBN End Action ADVANCED USER Menu 260 RBN Low Action ADVANCED USER Menu 260 RBN Low Warn ADVANCED USER Menu 259 Rcv Status Port ADVANCED USER Menu 258 Ready Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 269 Receive Data RD RS 232 277 Received CR ANSI Emulation menu 193 Received DEL ANSI Emulation menu 193 REGIONx MISMATCH message 312 Reload paper 29 REMOVE USED SPX message 312 Renew Lifetime WLAN KERBEROS Menu 118 Report Status Auto Switching submenu 89 Request to Send RS 232 277 Serial submenu 101 Requirements power 17 printer site 17 Reset Cfg Names 86 Reset Cmd CFG Ld 163 ANSI Emulation menu 193 Reset Cmd CFG Ld PCL II Emulation 233 Reset EAP Password WLAN EAP Menu 120 Reset EAP User WLAN EAP Menu 120 Reset Kerb Pwd WLAN KERBEROS Menu 118 Reset LEAP Password WLAN LEAP Menu 119 Reset LEAP User WLAN LEAP Menu 119 Reset SSID Name WLAN PARAMS Menu 114 Reset WEP Keys WLAN PARAMS Menu 116 Reset WPA P Phs WLAN
180. de Control Code Define CR Auto LF Overstrike Define LF 06 08 Code Code 8 0 LPI Elongated CR CR Disable Enable LF CR LF 10 3 LPI Backspace CR CR LF Enable Disable LF LF 6 0 LPI P Series EVFU Select Alt Set Character SFCC d SFCC 80 9F Set Command 1 Enable Control Code see page 171 Even dot plot 0 7F hex Disable Printable Double high Control Code 06 Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 ACK You can select an alternate line spacing of 6 8 or 10 3 LPI Control Code 08 Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code hex 08 BS You can define the code to output the following character Elongated default Backspace Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a carriage return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line feeds to the printer return CR CR default Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage CR CR LF Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line 165 Chapter 44 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II Auto LF This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Disable defau
181. de or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable 349 Appendix E 350 Software License Agreement If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses termi
182. dels Interfaces Type Standard IEEE 1284 Parallel RS 232 serial Optional Ethernet 10 100Base T Coax Twinax RS 422 serial Not available in Taiwan Logie Levels TTL EIA 232E EIA 422B Transfer Rates Up to 200 Kilobytes on parallel interface Up to 19 2K baud on RS 232 serial interface Up to 115 2K baud on RS 422 serial interface Printing Rates The printing speed of text is measured in lines per minute lpm and is a function of the selected font and the vertical dot density Printing speed is independent of the number of characters configured in the character set repertoire Print rates for lines containing attributes such as bold or emphasized printing superscripts subscripts or elongated attributes will decrease to not less than half the rates of the font without such attributes The exact print rate of lines containing these attributes depends on the specific print job but software maximizes the throughput by dynamically determining which dot rows contain adjacent dots and must be printed in two strokes The reverse paper feed capability allows the printing of multiple densities on a single line This is useful in printing forms and text together or in mixing different fonts on a print line Use of multiple densities and reverse paper feed also affects throughput 321 Appendix A Printing Rates 322 B4 B3 B2B1 ROW ASCII Character Set COLUMN 0 a ooo MPN OCTAL equivalent
183. detected Disable System terminators following a graphics command are sent to the printer and result in paper motion UPC Descenders e Enable default UPC EAN barcodes are printed with descenders even if there is no human readable data e Disable UPC EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no human readable data Rot Char Size e Adjusted default Rotated clockwise counterclockwise expanded characters have a different size than an unrotated character with the same size parameters e Not Adjusted Rotated expanded characters are the same size as unrotated characters with the same size parameters Ignore Spaces e Disable default Trailing spaces are not deleted from the last alphanumeric element in a graphics pass e Enable Trailing spaces are deleted from the last alphanumeric element in a graphics pass Midline PY includes PN e Disable default The Graphics mode Enable command PY must be the first three characters of a line e Enable The PY or PN can occur anywhere in a line Print Quality e Data Processing default ALPHA text and barcodes are printed in normal mode at 60 x 72 dpi This mode should be set if the highest speed is desired High ALPHA text and barcodes are printed in dark mode at 120 x 72 dpi Expanded Font e Scalable default These expanded characters have rounded edges e Block These are block characters compatible with IGP X10 printers
184. duct separate from the printer without the prior written consent of Printronix Inc d You may not modify or prepare derivative works of the Software Product e You may not transmit the Software Product over a network by telephone or electronically using any means or reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the Software f You agree to keep confidential and use your best efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the Software Product from unauthorized disclosure or use 3 Transfer You may transfer the Software Product with the printer but only if the recipient agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement Your license is automatically terminated if you transfer the Software Product and printer Limited Software Product Warranty Printronix Inc warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with specifications published by Printronix Inc Printronix Inc does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions Remedy Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix Inc in connection with the Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the same version and revision level Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies 1 THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED Printronix Inc does n
185. e Page 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek 1 German ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852 ELOT 928 Greek 2 Swedish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 3 Danish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek 4 Norwegian MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek 5 Finnish MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek 6 English Sakr CP 714 7 bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250 Greek 851 7 Dutch Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 8 French CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 9 Spanish Arabic CP 864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 10 Italian Arabic CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO 11 Turkish Arabic Lam 1 CP 1048 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO 12 CP 437 Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1 13 CP 850 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 Hebrew Turkish Misc Sets Sets Sets Hebrew Old Data Gen Turk Block set 10cpi Hebrew New DEC Turkish Italics Set Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Scanblock 10cpi Latin 1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish PGL Thai Set Win CP 1255 PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Azeri IPDS Emulation IPDS Emulation Factory Default EMULATION from page 123
186. e Return code into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs This can be used in most installations but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer e LF default Does not perform an automatic carriage return The next print position will be the current print position of the next line e CR LF Each time the printer receives a Line Feed it inserts an additional Carriage Return code hex OD into the data stream This feature can be used in most installations but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage Returns to the printer LG Emulation FF This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Form Feed code occurs This can be used in most installations but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer e FF default Does not perform an automatic carriage return The next print position will be the current print position of the next form e CR FF Performs an automatic carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next form Unsolicited Rpt This option enables or disables Printer Device Status Reports to be sent to the host when a reportable status or error condition has occurred e No default Disables all unsolicited status reports from the printer e Small Enables brief unsolicited status reports and sends an extended stat
187. e message problem can be created reappears or appears consistently by electrical noise by a contact your authorized service software problem orbya representative hardware problem INVALID ACTIVATE No Printer detects a twinax Contact your authorized service protocol communication representative error INVALID COMMAND No Printer detects a twinax Contact your authorized service protocol communication representative error and reports the error LO DRV SHORT No Lower Driver Short Contact your authorized service bank or in the hammer bank power cable shorted to ground LOAD PAPER Yes Printer is out of paper Load paper and press ON LINE CLEAR LOADING PROGRAM No Status message the new No action is required FROM PORT XX emulation program is loading into printer RAM XX indicates how much of the program has loaded LOADING PROGRAM No The printer has deleted No action is required 308 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution NEW SPX DETECTED No The printer detects an Contact your authorized service PRESS ENTER SPX installed at the representative debug port and the SPX is valid for the printer NON VOLATILE No Large emulations reduce Contact your authorized service MEMORY FAILED the amount of space representative available for saving configurations which means that sometimes fewer than eight
188. e message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E19 BREAKPOINT Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E20 SYS MANAGE Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E30 DEBUGGER Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job again If the message appears load the latest emulation software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility 298 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message uL Explanation Solution E31A EVENT O BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was a
189. e of the new paper lines up with the top horizontal perforation of the last page 30 Reload Paper Vertical Position Knob JA lt J Paper Thickness Indicator 183445b A en Stop Platen Lever Platen Stop Knob Figure 8 Setting the Platen Lever 9 Turn the platen stop knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the paper thickness The A B C scale corresponds approximately to 1 3 and 6 part paper thickness NOTE If you are using the same thickness of paper there is no need to readjust 10 Lower the platen lever until it stops 11 Press ON LINE CLEAR to remove the LOAD PAPER fault message from the display 12 Press PAPER ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds properly beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide Feed sufficient paper to ensure the paper stacks correctly 13 Close the printer top cover Close the cabinet front door 14 Press ON LINE CLEAR to place the printer in online mode and resume printing 31 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures 32 Wire EET Paper i Paper Slot Slot S Metal Paper Guide P7220 and P7200HD 7 7 77700 NP SP Ld A A Cabinet Model Pedestal Model Figure 9 Paper Slots on the Printers NOTE Pe
190. e printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer e CR CR default Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return e CRz CR LF Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return Auto LF This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Enable default Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width e Disable Discards any data past the forms width Define LF Code e LFzLF default Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a Line Feed command is received The next print position will be the current print position of the next line e LFz CR LF Forces an automatic carriage return with each Line Feed command received The next print position is print position 1 of the next line FF Valid at TOF e Enable default Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form Disable Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form 179 Chapter 4 180 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II Character Set Specifies a character set as shown in the IIporpivtep EA Xnapaytep Leto Mevo ov naye 181 To use one of these sets choose the desired group headin
191. e the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0 so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected Top Mrg 6 0 This option sets the top margin for the forms You must specify the top margin in lines at 6 lines per inch ranging from 0 to 198 lines 33 inches The default setting is O Press the right arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and bottom margins do not cross each other Bot Mrg 66 6 This option sets the bottom margin for the forms You must specify the bottom margin in lines at 6 lines per inch ranging from O to 198 lines 33 inches The default setting is 66 Press the right arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0 so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected 235 Chapter 4 236 LG Emulation Horiz Forms e Left Mgr 0 00 default This sets the left margin for the forms You must specify the left margin in 1 10 inch increments from 0 to 13 1 inches The default value is 0 Press the right arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other Ri
192. ed Download the program again If the NOT PROGRAM an error trying to program message displays again contact flash memory your authorized service representative ERROR FLASH NOT No The printer could not find Contact your authorized service DETECTED flash memory representative ERROR LOCKED No nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Contact your authorized service SN nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nis the serial number of representative nnnnnn the printer s security key The SPX serial number does not match the printer s serial number and cannot be used with the printer ERROR NO DRAM No The printer could not find Contact your authorized service DETECTED any DRAM representative 303 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table PRINTER TYPE debug port is not intended for this model printer or this OEM s Can User Explanation lution Displayed Message Correct planatio Solutio ERROR NVRAM No The non volatile SRAM Contact your authorized service FAILURE on the controller board representative has failed ERROR OCCURRED No An interim message that Contact your authorized service discards host data it cannot use because a fault condition exists ERROR PROGRAM No The printer requires more Contact your authorized service downloaded program ERROR PROGRAM No The printer requires more Contact your authorized service NEEDS MORE FLASH flash m
193. ed at which the Wireless Option will accept a connection in million bits per second The options are e Auto negotiate default e 1Mb Sec e 2Mb Sec e 5 5Mb Sec e 11Mb Sec Channel Allows you to select the RF channel The options are Default the factory default and 1 15 WLAN PARAMS Ant Diversity The type of antenna used Diverse default Select when you want to use the antenna with the best reception e Primary Select when you want to use the Primary antenna on the server e Auxiliary Select when you want to use the Auxiliary antenna on the server Preamble The length of the preamble in transmit packets e Default default The Wireless option automatically determines the length e Short For newer printers which can handle higher transer rate speeds Long For older printers which cannot handle higher transfer rate speeds Antenna e Primary default Select when you want to use the Primary antenna on the RF card e Auxiliary Select when you want to use the Auxiliary antenna on the RF card e Diverse Select when you want to use the antenna with the best reception Power Mgmt This allows you to set power save mode and sleep time A value specifying the sleep time in milliseconds will be provided If set to zero power save mode will be disabled The range includes e Oms default e 100 ms 1000 ms Transmit Power The power level as a percentage of full power 0 100 I
194. ed by the printer from a different host Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed In order to support this feature the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use For example if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then receives a second print job from the parallel port the data from the parallel port will trickle bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast This function is not applicable for C T hotport Offline Process e Disable default When set to disable the printer does not process parallel network data while offline e Enable When set to enable the printer continues to process but not print the current network parallel job while the printer is offline until the printer s buffer is full 91 Chapter 4 HOSTINTERFACE Menu Centronics Parallel Submenu Factory Default 1 OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256 Centronics from page 87
195. ed menu allows compatibility with different systems and networks The factory default is Auto Select Auto Select default This setting tells the 10 100Base T NIC to perform an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex or 100 Full Duplex 10 Half Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using half duplex 10 Full Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using full duplex 100 Half Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using half duplex 100 Full Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using full duplex Job Control The job control mode has four options Standard default The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job The status line shows done when the job is completely received by the NIC Enhanced The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job The status line shows done when the job is fully printed Off No job synchonization between the NIC and the printer Fast Standard The EOJ End of Job packet is acknowledged immediately Use this selection if the job is timed out due to a delay in the acknowledgement of the EOJ packet because of the amount of data being printed NOTE It is recommended to set this option to Enhanced
196. eese 42 Lighter Or Darker Print ssssssssssseeeeeneeeeneennenn 42 Changing Ribbon Cartridge ssseeeeeene 43 Table of Contents 4 The Configuration Menus suus 47 Configuration Overview essssssseseeseeeeeeeeneeenneeeen nennen 47 Malin MOD cito teret e get tee ber lect a 47 Changing Parameter Settings 48 Saving Parameter Settings ssssssssssseeeeee 48 Default And Custom Configurations 48 Navigating the Menus seeeseeeenmm eene 49 Changing Parameters Example sssseseeneen 50 Auto Save Configuration ssessssssseeeeeneeennns 53 Saving Your New Configuration sese 53 Optimizing Print Quality eese 58 Optimizing Print Speed sssssssssseeeeneen 59 Dynamic Menu Options ssseeneneeneeennenen nennen 60 Active Emulatioris o iet cmt ect p reto redeo dte ceri aul 61 Main Menu iret RR RR E RR REEL ERE APA REEL ped he 63 P7000 STD Firmware ssssssseseeeeeneee enne 64 P7000 TN Firmware eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee nennen nennen nnne 66 P7000 PCL II Firmware eeseseseeeeeeeeeenneeneenn ene 68 P7000 LG Firmware naei aeai ea a anini eaei 70 P7000 ANSI Firmware sss nnne 72 OpenPrint P7000 STD Postscript PDF Firmware 74 OpenPrint P
197. elected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 6 Not available if PNE Port is set at Serial 7 f Real Time Clock RTC option is installed 8 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printer only 9 Based on WLAN radio installed 10 f a Feature File has been downloaded ACTIVE EMULATION page 121 EMULATION PRINTER page 123 CONTROL page 251 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS USER page 254 page 261 P7000 ANSI Firmware 44 48XX ANSI IGP PGL amp LP IGP VGL amp LP or 44 48XX ANSI LinePrinter LinePrinter 4 44 48XX ANSI 9 1GP PGL2 IGP VGL if IGP is not installed Ribbon End Point Open Platen BOF Bar Code Quality Tear Bar Dist View Function 8 Unidirectional Display Language Accented Chars Ptx Setup Option Hex Dump Mode Power up State Downloaded Fonts PMD Fault Power Stacker 1 Auto Elevator Auto Locking File System Set Sharing Shuttle Timeout Slow Paper Slew Alarm Power Saver Time Pwr Save Control Cancel Key Ret Status Port Set Lock Key RBN Low Warn 9 RBN Low Action RBN End Action Printer Tests Test Width Paper Out Dots System Memory Print Statistics Software Build Feature File Shuttle Type DATE PRINTER MGMT page 264 page 265 Hour PNE Port Minute Mgmt Protocol Year PNE Port Number 9 Month PNE Port Timeout 9 Day Status Port Numb Mgmt Port Number lif instal
198. ell signals See the Novell chapter in the Network Interface Card User s Manual for more details ADAPTER PARAMS Novell Protocol This option determines whether the Novell protocol will be available The selections are as indicated below e Enable default Makes the Novell protocol available with the ethernet installed e Disable Makes the Novell protocol unavailable during printer operation Nest Serv Type You can change the Nest Server using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting The options are Auto default Bindery and NDS NetBIOS Protocol This option determines whether the NetBIOS protocol will be available The selections are as indicated below e Enable default Makes the NetBIOS protocol available with the ethernet installed e Disable Makes the NetBIOS protocol unavailable during printer operation Novell Frame This selection determines which framing scheme will be used in processing Novell signals Ethernet 802 2 default e 802 2 Snap e Auto Sensing Ethernet II Ethernet 802 3 ASCII Data Port This option sets the port number for ASCII print jobs The data port number needs to match your host system setting e 9100 default e 1023 65535 IPDS Data Port This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs only if the IPDS option is installed The range is 0 5000 and the default is 5001 107 Chapter 4 108 NETWO
199. emory to run the representative downloaded program ERROR PROGRAM Yes The printer is not Use the correct emulation software NOT COMPATIBLE compatible with the options s for this printer model downloaded program ERROR PROGRAM Yes The printer does not see There is no program in printer NOT VALID a program in flash memory Download the emulation memory ERROR SECURITY No The security key is not Contact your authorized service KEY NOT DETECTED present or failed representative ERROR SHORT AT No Hardware failure in Contact your authorized service ADDRESS XXXX SDRAM or controller representative circuitry ERROR WRITING TO No Hardware or software Contact your authorized service FLASH fault in flash memory representative ERROR WRONG No The printer received the Contact your authorized service CHECKSUM complete program butthe representative checksum did not match The data may have been corrupted during downloading ERROR WRONG No The SPX inserted in the Contact your authorized service OEM debug port is not representative intended for this model printer or this OEM ERROR WRONG No The SPX inserted in the Contact your authorized service representative 304 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message uL Explanation Solution ETHERNET ADAPTER N A Status message No action is required BEING INITIALIZED indicating that the ethernet interface is proce
200. empted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E33 WRITE BP Yes An illegal or unsupported 1 Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E34 TRACE CMPLT Yes An illegal or unsupported 1 Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E99 UNKNOWN INT Yes An illegal or unsupported 1 Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E Net Test Unavailable Yes The ethernet PCBA did Cycle power Wait for E Net Ready to display then retry operation If it
201. en lever 29 Lower the platen lever until it stops 30 Press ON LINE CLEAR to clear any fault messages such as LOAD PAPER from the LCD 31 Press SET TOF The top of form you have set moves down to the print position If there is data in the buffer the paper moves forward to the last print position on the next page 32 Press ON LINE CLEAR and close the printer cover 37 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures Unload Paper 1 Press ON LINE CLEAR to place the printer in offline mode and open the printer cover 2 For cabinet models open the cabinet rear door For models with the power stacker installed press the STACKER UP key on the rear control panel Paper Perforation q v 8l Figure 16 Unloading the Paper from the Printer Tear off the paper at the perforation Allow the paper to fall to the back of the printer and into the paper stacking area 5 For pedestal models remove the stacked paper from the paper tray 38 Unload Paper Paper Power Stacker Figure 17 Removing Stacked Paper from the Printer 6 Forcabinet models remove the stacked paper from the rear cabinet floor For cabinet models with the power stacker installed remove the paper from the wire paper tent and press the STACKER DOWN key to lower the stacker mechanism 7 Close the cabinet rear door 39 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures Tractor Door
202. en EMVG das EG Konformit tszeichen CE zu f hren Verantwortlich f r die Konformit tserkl rung nach Paragraph 5 des EMVG ist die Printronix GmbH Goethering 56 D 63067 Offenbach Germany Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 4 Abs 1 4 Das Ger t erf llt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A EN 55022 Klasse A Ger te m ssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden Warnung dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkst rungen verursachen in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden angemessene Ma nahmen durchzuf hren und daf r aufzukommen EN 55024 Hinweis Wird dieses Ger t in einer industriellen Umgebung betrieben wie in EN 55024 festgelegt dann kann es dabei eventuell gest rt werden In solch einem Fall ist der Abstand bzw die Abschirmung zu der industriellen St rquelle zu ergrvBern Anmerkung Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Ger te wie in den Printronix Handb chern angegeben zu installieren und zu betreiben 343 Appendix E Communication Statements 344 China Declaration This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may need to perform practical actions Ib AZ ih ERA dA P ih A BBS RCA FERRET BL F BBE TSE Hy 47 Bde Altitude and Non Tropical Climate Statement EATER 2000m Pit X Ze 8 FH GH RI
203. en the line of text exceeds the right margin e Disable default Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a CR or CR LF is received e Enable Automatically inserts a CR LF after a full print line PGL SFCC You can specify which hex code 1 255 will be used as the Special Function Control Code SFCC The factory default setting is 126 The SFCC denotes that the following data is a PGL command PI Slew Range You can specify how many lines the paper will feed e 16 default A paper slew of 0 15 will move 1 16 lines e 15 A paper slew of 1 15 will move 1 15 lines A paper slew of 0 will move 1 line CR Edit This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed e Disable default The printer ignores all carriage returns that are not followed by line feeds e Enable The printer processes all carriage returns even for those that are not followed by line feeds Select Font Select Font specifies which language is currently selected for use with the PGL Referto ILTI TIIL A ovt Let Mevv ov naye 208 for available selections Slash 0 This parameter allows you to print the numeral 0 with or without the slash This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B e Disable default Zero is printed without a slash Enable Zero is printed with a slash Select LPI This is the number of lines to be printed per inch For example at 6 Ipi there is 1 6 inch from
204. entronics submenu see page 92 Data Strobe Carries a low true 100 ns minimum pulse from the host that clocks data into the printer Acknowledge A low true pulse from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data transfer Online A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is ready for data transfer and the ON LINE key on the control panel has been activated When the printer is in online mode it may accept data from the host Paper Empty PE A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is in a paper empty or paper jam fault Busy A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer cannot receive data Prime A high true level from the host to indicate the printer should perform a warm start printer is reset to the power up configuration values Paper Instruction PI Carries a CVFU signal from the host with the same timing and polarity as the data line Fault A low true level from the printer indicates a printer fault 271 Chapter 5 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface 272 The 1284 supports three operating modes which are determined by negotiation between the printer and the host Compatibility Mode This mode provides compatibility with Centronics like host I O see Table 13 Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8 bit bytes over the data lines Compatib
205. er to the printer must not exceed 40 feet 12 meters Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals Data Lines 1 through 8 Provides eight standard or inverted levels from the host that specify character data plot data or a control code Data Line 8 allows access to the extended ASCII character set You can enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the Dataproducts submenu see page page 95 Data Strobe Carries a high true pulse from the host when data is ready The data strobe remains high until the Data Request line goes false The active edge of the strobe signal can be configured as leading middle default or trailing Paper Instruction PI Carries a DVFU signal from the host with the same timing and polarity as the data lines Ready Carries a high true signal from the printer when AC power and DC voltages are present paper is loaded properly and the printer is not in a check condition Online Carries a high true signal from the printer when the Ready Line is true and the ON LINE key on the control panel has been pressed When the printer is in online mode it may accept data from the host Demand Data Request Carries a high true signal from the printer when the printer is ready to accept character data from the host This signal changes to false shortly after the leading edge of the data strobe signal Cable Verify Two pins on the interface connector are
206. erating 15 to 80 noncondensing Storage 15 to 90 noncondensing 318 Acoustic Noise Level Acoustic Noise Levels per Pedestal ISO 9296 Cabinet Models Models Printing 50 dB 500 Ipm 1000 Ipm 65 dB 52 dB 1500 Ipm 65 dB 55 dB 2000 Ipm NA 6 8 Bel 8 0 Bel Standby 48 dB 50 dB 6 3 Bel 6 5 Bel Energy Star The printers described in this User s Manual comply with the requirements of the ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program of the U S Environmental Protection Agency 319 Appendix A Electrical Characteristics Electrical Characteristics 320 Voltage 10 Freq 10 Amps Watts BTU Hr P7005 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 3 275 940 P70052T AC 200 240V 50 60 Hz 1 5 275 940 P7010 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 3 5 300 1025 P70102T AC 200 240V 50 60 Hz 1 6 300 1025 P7015 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 4 5 430 1469 P70152T AC 200 240V 50 60 Hz 1 9 430 1469 P7205 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 3 5 350 1195 AC 200 240V 50 60 Hz 1 6 350 1195 P7210 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 3 5 350 1195 AC 200 240V 50 60 Hz 1 6 350 1195 P7215 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 5 460 1571 AC 200 240V 50 60 Hz 2 460 1571 P7220 AC 100 120V 50 60 Hz 5 5 540 1844 AC 200 240V 50 60 Hz 2 1 540 1844 The above values are calculated while printing 136 column all upper case high speed E s The stand by Energy Saver mode wattage is 28W 96 BTU Hr for all mo
207. ering option Valid decimal values are from 0 through 255 221 Chapter 4 222 IGP VGL Emulation Data Bit 8 e Enable default The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer all 8 bits are used for data bits and characters in the hex 80 FF range can be accessed Disable When the host PI line is enabled Data Bit 8 internally indicates PI line status To use the PI line disable Data Bit 8 and enable the Host PI configuration option under the PI Control option below NOTE Data Bit 8 is interpreted as either Data Bit 8 or PI signal but never both When enabled as Data Bit 8 Data Bit 8 has priority over the PI signal and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data and not to interpret PI line data Conversely when Data Bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used Data Bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function and you cannot access characters in the hex 80 FF range Therefore to access characters in the hex 80 FF range Data Bit 8 must be enabled Font Set The Font Set specifies which language is currently selected for use with the VGL Referto ILC II gLA ovt Xet Mevo ov naye 224 for available selections PI Control Printer PI e Disable default The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line disabled e Enable The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line enabled Host PI Disable default The host does not send PI signals e Enable The host sends
208. ernet speed 111 IPDS Data Port 110 Job Control 111 Keep alive timer 110 NetBIOS protocol 110 Ethernet speed Adapter Params Menu 108 Ethernet speed Ethernet Params Menu 111 Ethernet submenu 104 Buffer Size in K 103 104 ETX ACK ANSI Emulation menu 194 EVFU SPC Type 156 EXCESS RBN WEAR message 305 EXHAUST FAN FLT message 305 Expanded Font 205 217 Ext Execute Copy 202 Exterior cleaning 281 E00 EXE ADDRO message 293 E01A TYPE 0x40 message 294 EO1B TYPE 0x60 message 294 E02 MACHINE CHK message 294 E03A DSI HASH L message 294 E03B DSI HASH S message 294 E03C DSI BAT PL message 295 EO3D DSI BAT message 295 EO3E DSI CXIWX message 295 EO3F DSI CXOWX message 295 E03G DSI ECXIWX message 295 E03H DSI ECXOWX message 296 E04A ISI NO TRA message 296 359 EO4B ISI DIRECT message 296 EO4C ISI PROTEC message 296 E06 NOT ALIGNED message 296 E07 ILLEGAL INS message 297 E08 FLOATINGPNT message 297 E12 SYSTEM CALL message 297 E13 TRACE INT message 297 E16 ITRANS MISS message 297 E17 DLOAD MISS message 298 E18 DSTORE MISS message 298 E19 BREAKPOINT message 298 E20 SYS MANAGE message 298 E30 DEBUGGER message 298 E31A EVENT 0 BP message 299 E31B EVENT 1 BP message 299 E31C EVENT 2 BP message 299 E31D EVENT 3 BP message 299 E31E EVENT 4 BP message 299 E31F EVENT 5 BP message 300 E31G EVENT 6 BP message 300 E31H EVENT 7 BP message 300 E32A CND 0 BP message 300 E32B CND 1 BP message 300
209. erwrite the existing configuration and the message CONFIG EXISTS Delete First displays Name Configs You may specify a 15 character name which can be used to refer to a configuration The name you enter for a configuration will be used in the Load Config Save Config Print Config Delete Config and Power Up Config menus The name can only be cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu When you move into the Name Configs menu the top line of the display shows the current configuration name The second line of the display is initially the same as the top line You can modify the second line of the display without affecting the top line until the ENTER key is pressed which sets the modified name Press the UP or DOWN A or V keys to cycle through the values available for that character at the cursor location Press the NEXT key to move to the next character to be modified Press the PREV key lt 1 to go back to a character you have already modified Continue until you have entered the name you want to give to this configuration then press ENTER to save The name you entered will now represent this configuration on the printer s front panel To exit this menu without saving press any key other than the ENTER key The configuration name will revert to the last saved value Reset Cfg Names You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the configuration number 86 HOST INTERFACE Menu Auto
210. esL Vertical Position Knob Platen Lever Platen Stop Ribbon Cartridge Interface Air Shroud Assembly Figure 25 Interior Printer Components 282 CAUTION CAUTION Interior Cleaning To clean the interior of the printer perform the following steps Boo Ord vw o Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord Open the printer cover Fully raise the platen lever Unload the paper Remove the ribbon cartridge Lift the ribbon out of the ribbon path Brush the paper dust and ribbon lint off the tractors shuttle cover assembly and base casting with a soft bristled non metallic brush such as a toothbrush Vacuum up the residue Vacuum carefully around the hammer bank and surrounding area to avoid damage To avoid corrosion damage use only alcohol when cleaning the printer mechanical elements Solutions used to clean mechanical elements must contain no water 8 9 10 Wipe the splined shaft with a soft cloth Check the ribbon mask and hammer bank cover for bits of torn paper or ribbon lint Remove dust and ink from the platen using a soft cloth lightly moistened with anhydrous alcohol The platen is the thick silver bar behind the hammer bank cover that rotates when the platen lever is rotated When cleaning the platen be very careful not to get any alcohol in the hammer bank because alcohol will cause severe damage to the hammer bank Only a trained service technician should clea
211. essage 310 PAP NT AT SPEED message 310 PAP UNEXP INT message 310 Paper reload 29 unload 38 PAPER ADVANCE key 25 Paper Empty PE Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 271 368 Paper Instruction PI Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 271 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 269 Paper Out Dots DIAGNOSTICS 262 PAPER REQUESTED A4 message 310 Paper Size 82 240 Paper Size Fault 241 Paper specifications 317 Parallel Interface Centronics 270 Dataproducts 268 PARAMETER ERROR message 310 Parameter settings changing 48 saving 48 Parameters changing example 50 Parity Error Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 269 PARITY ERROR message 310 Parity Serial submenu 100 PA 128 153 PA2 129 154 PCL II Emulation 229 Config Print 233 Display Functions 232 Face CPI Delay 231 Graphics Density 231 Line Terminator 232 LPI Adjust 232 Max Line Width 231 Page Length Rep 231 Page L Inches 232 Page L Lines 232 Perforation Skip 231 Primary Char Set 231 PTX Linefeed 232 Reset Cmd CFG Ld 233 Second Char Set 231 Symbol Set Print 233 PDF Size Comp 220 Perforation Skip PCL II Emulation 231 PGL SFCC 79 200 PI Control 222 Host PI 222 Max PI 16 222 Printer PI 222 PI Ignored Centronics Parallel submenu 92 Dataproducts submenu 95 PI Slew Range 200 PLAT INV CMD message 310 PLAT INV PARM message 310 PLAT INV STATE message 311 PLEASE WAIT
212. eturn e Ignore A CR code received from the host is ignored Received DEL e Observe default A DEL code received from the host is handled as a Delete command e Ignore A DEL code received from the host is ignored Private Mode Determines the default type of character set Set 1 or Set 2 This can also be set by ESC sequences ESC gt 5h and ESC gt 5l Refer to these descriptions in the ANS Programmer s Reference Manual for further details 193 Chapter 4 194 ANSI Emulation Pos on BC OvrSz e Set to top default The paper is fed back to the top of barcodes or oversized characters after they are printed This allows printing on the same line e Set to bottom The printer will continue printing without backing up BC Check Digit e By host default The host calculates the barcode check digit and sends it along with the barcode The check digit is not verified by the printer but printed as it was received By printer The barcode is sent without the check digit and the printer calculates and adds it in Barcode Darkmode e Enable default The barcodes are printed at a higher resolution e Disable The barcodes are printed at lower resolution but at a higher speed PUM Default This is the Unit of Measure UOM as it is used within the ANSI emulation Coordinates received in ESC sequences can be sent in two UOMs e Decipoints default A unit of 1 720 inch e Lines or columns Uses the curren
213. ew to the top of the next form when the PN command is encountered and when the current vertical position is not at top of form PDF Size Comp This option is for compatability of the font size of the barcode printable data field on the old build e Disable default Uses the normal font size Enable Matches the font size of the old build C128 Mode Comp The menu is for compatibility of the old build in auto mode switch e Disable default Uses auto mode switch e Enable Matches the old build on the auto mode switch C39 Compatbl This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set compatible with the new e Disable disable Uses the current way of decoding e Enable Matches the old method of decoding Ignore Lxx Cmd e Disable default e Enable The Lxx command will always be ignored Error Handling Following are several options which define how errors are reported Error Msgs e Enable default Command syntax is checked and error messages printed when command parameters are incorrect e Disable Error checking and error messages are suppressed Error Markers e Enable default Prints the following error markers for those elements that print beyond the page boundaries gt gt for elements that begin off the right side of the page for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the page for elements where the starting position of the command cont
214. f the replacement barcode will be the same position as the leftmost bar of the original barcode For instance if the replacement barcode is smaller than the original barcode it will be placed as follows Replacement Barcode nn l l I I Original Barcode Pi If the replacement barcode is larger than the original barcode the replacement barcode will begin at the left edge of the original barcode and expand beyond the right edge 243 Chapter 4 OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu Replacement Barcode a WW EM REM NEN 1 M 31 HM F Original Barcode Any form elements text graphics or dots immediately to the right of the original barcode can force this first attempted placement to be modified The replacement barcode will shift left to avoid obstacles on the right provided that there are also no obstacles on the left Replacement Barcode TM Pi m Here is an Quiet Zone obstacle Distance text picket Original Barcode 244 OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu e Center default The first attempted position of the center bar of the replacement barcode will be the same position as the center bar of the original barcode If the replacement barcode is smaller than the original barcode it will be replaced as follows Replacement Barcode Original T d If the replacement barcode is longer than the original barcode it will still be centered but it will extend beyond the end of
215. fine LF Code 183 Printer Select 184 20 CPI Condensed 184 ERROR CPLD NOT PROGRAMMED message 303 ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID message 303 ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX message 303 ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID message 303 ERROR EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX message 303 ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM message 303 ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED message 303 Error Handling 220 Barcode Errors 221 Error Markers 221 Error Msgs 220 Offpage Errors 221 ERROR LOCKED SN 2nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn message 303 Error Markers 221 Error Msgs 220 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED message 303 ERROR NVRAM FAILURE message 304 ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING QUEUES message 304 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM message 304 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH message 304 ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE message 304 ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID message 304 Error Report 207 ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED message 304 ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX message 304 ERROR WRITING TO FLASH message 304 ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM message 304 ERROR WRONG OEM message 304 ERROR WRONG PRINTER TYPE message 304 ESC c Sequence ANSI Emulation menu 193 ESC d command Serial Matrix Emulation 176 ETHERNET ADAPTER BEING INITIALIZED message 305 Ethernet Address 78 ETHERNET ADDRESS Menu 109 DHCP 109 Gateway address 109 IP address 109 MAC address 109 Subnet mask 109 ETHERNET DETECTED message 305 ETHERNET INITIALIZING message 305 ETHERNET PARAMS Menu 110 ASCII data port 110 Eth
216. for C T hotport Timeout This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and check the other selected port types for data to print When the printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time it needs to timeout in order to service the other ports Report Status e Disable default When a fault occurs on the printer only the active port reports the fault to the host Enable The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active port Switch Out On Data Timeout default Allows Autoswitching when no data has been received for the selected Time Out period e Session Close Allows Autoswitching only when the Network Socket is closed If the Ethernet option is not installed the Network Socket is always reported as closed and this menu option is ignored 89 Chapter 4 90 HOST INTERFACE Menu IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu IEEE 1284 from page 87 Factory Default 1 OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256 Prime Signal TOF Action Buffer Size in K Auto Trickle Trickle Time Offline Process Enable Disable Reset Do Nothing 16 1 16 Disable Enable 1 4 sec 1 2 sec Disable Enable 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec Off The IEEE 1284 interface is faster and more versatile than Centronics and supports bidirectional
217. form lengths are defined by the contents within the form the form is only as long as necessary to print the form Changing this menu value adds additional lengths to the form in tenths of inches Again this only applies to forms that use the 50 variable length forms Var Form Type This menu option applies only to the host command CREATE NAME or CREATE NAME DISK The host command CREATE NAME followed by 0 X or a form length number will always override the menu option e Add Nothing default No action Add 0 When selected the form length ends at the longest printed element Same as CREATE NAME O e Add X When selected the form length is the same as the physical page length Compressed CPI This parameter allows you to choose a compressed character 60 shorter for 17 or 20 cpi instead of the normal height character e Disable default The PGL does not use compressed 17 or 20 cpi font e Light Font Uses the standard compressed 17 or 20 cpi font e Dark Font Uses a darker compressed 17 or 20 cpi font compatible with the IGP X00 printers 204 Ignore Char Ignore Mode This parameter instructs the PGL to ignore the character selected under the Select Character menu e Disable default The PGL does not ignore any characters e Enable The PGL ignores the characters specified in the Select Character menu e Select Char Instructs the PGL which decimal character 0 255 to ignore from the host
218. free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or
219. g Centronics WLAN Params 1 ZTP Wait Time ZTP Platen Open Power Up Config Dataproducts WLAN EAP 1 ZTP Tear Dist 2 Protect Configs Serial Resolution Name Configs Paper Size Reset Cfg Names Ribbon End Point Load Config Save Config Power Up Config EMULATION SURE SCAN PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS CONTROL USER page 123 page 242 page 251 page 254 page 261 Postscript PDF Optimize Barcode Ribbon end Point Ptx Setup Option Printer Tests Alignment Open Platen BOF Hex Dump Mode Test Width Hor Quiet Zone Tear Bar Dist Power Up State Paper Out Dots Ver Erase Zone Unidirectional PMD Fault System Memory Quiet Zone Fault Display Language Auto Locking Print Statistics Update PDF File System Software EUM Barcodes On Page Set Sharing Feature File Bcodes Optimized Shuttle Timeout Shuttle Type Slow Paper Slew Alarm Power Saver Time Pwr Save Control Cancel Key Rov Status Port Ret Status Port Set Lock Key RBN Low Warn RBN Low Action RBN End Action PRINTER MGMT page 265 PNE Port 1 If installed Mgmt Protocol PNE Port Number PNE Port Timeout 4 Status Port Numb Mgmt Port Number Available for pedestal printers only 3 If a Feature File has been downloaded Not available if PNE Port is set at Serial QUICK SETUP Menu QUICK SETUP Menu When the printer is in offline mode QUICK SETUP is the first Main Menu option that appears on the control panel The QUICK SETUP menu offers basic menu items required to configure your p
220. g such as European Sets and press ENTER Then choose the desired set within that group such as Roman 8 and press ENTER Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection The UTF 8 selection allows printing of UTF 8 encoded Unicode Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual Alt Char Set This option determines if data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F should be interpreted as a control code or as a printable character e Set 1 default Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code e Set 2 Prints data for the characters at hex locations 03 04 05 06 15 and 80 through 9F 20 CPI Condensed Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page e Enable default Prints characters about 60 percent the width of normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer e Disable Does not compress print widths even if condensed print is chosen by the host Proprinter XL Character Sets Menu Factory Default Character Set from page 179 Proprinter XL Emulation Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Hebrew Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets
221. ge the device did not receive the transmission SERIES1 1 CHAR The printer controls the flow of communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off using response characters sent to the host If the number of valid bytes in the buffer reaches 75 percent of the buffer size the online or offline and buffer full response character is sent If the buffer is completely full an online or offline buffer full response is sent every time a character is sent from the host Whenever the printer state changes to online or offline the appropriate response character is sent If the idle response option is enabled the printer will send a response character every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer size If a poll character is received configurable from the Poll Character xx Hex option on the front panel from hex 0 through FF the printer will send a response character n milliseconds later configurable from the Poll Character xx MS on the front panel from O through 30 This n milliseconds is called the poll delay The poll character will be removed from the input data stream and will not be processed This may cause problems with the transmission of binary data e g control codes bit image etc If a poll delay is started due to the receipt of a poll character and another poll character is received the second poll character has no effect and is removed from the input data stream
222. ge length in number of lines Max Line Width Set the maximum line width at either 13 2 inches or the maximum width of the printer 81 Chapter 4 82 QUICK SETUP Menu Resolution This parameter defines the default print resolution This selection is used when either the print resolution is not defined by the data stream or if the print resolution defined by the data stream is not supported The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P7000 STD e 120x144 DPI default e 90x96 DPI The following resolutions are available on Openprint P7000 HD e 180x180 DPI default e 180x90 DPI e 90x180 DPI e 120x120 DPI e 90x90 DPI Paper Size This parameter allows selection of available paper sizes Available options include e Custom Sets a user defined paper size e Width Defines the paper width The range is 1 to 15 in 0 1 inch increments The default is 13 6 inches e Length Defines the paper length The default is 11 inches Three length options are available Inches Defines the length in inches The range is 1 to 24 in 0 1 inch increments 1 6 Inch Lines Defines the length in 1 6 inch lines The range is 6 to 144 lines 1 8 Inch Lines Defines the length in 1 8 inch lines The range is 8 to 192 lines To set a custom length use the appropriate menu that allows for selection of the exact paper length to avoid loss of top of form i e if using a 12 paper select either the Inches menu set t
223. ght And Dimensions eseee 318 Environmental Characteristics sse 318 Acoustic Noise Level c ccccccececeseceeeeeeseeceeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeneneneeeneeaes 319 Energy Sta eee ria eim t ee rat ade nita RR ER Re EE ERRARE Edd 319 Electrical Characteristics seessssseseeeeeeeenens 320 Intertaces iue tutes teal tee HER ET EUER EE Ra 321 Printing Rates i eie rab edd aee adt n ue 321 Table of Contents B ASCII Character Set esses 323 C Zero Tear PIntet eco cn s ted f des 325 Si d EE 325 Operation iei ierat eet UC al ee DEC ur Pe E aiaa eaei it 326 Position The Paper Input And Adjust The Paper Guides 326 LoadiPaper uii tei finn dais 328 Position The Paper Out Sensor sssssssseeeeeee 330 Set The Tear Bar Distance sssssssseseeeeeeneenen 331 Set The Top Of Form ariii eieae aaa eia aaa aa an 332 ZIP SETTINGS MENU d dte ed eee 333 Performance Limitations esssesseeeenneenn nnn 334 D Customer Support s iia ioo coo cse ya ds 337 Printronix Customer Support Center ssssssseseeese 337 Printronix Supplies Department sse 337 Corporate Offices nennen enne enne 338 E Communication Notices ssssssse 339 Noti C68 de odeur ta recu 339 Energy Star iere date qa ete CERA et Lue reet ees 341 Communicat
224. ght Mrg 13 2 This sets the right margin for the forms You must specify the right margin in 1 10 inch increments from 0 1 to 13 2 inches The default value is 13 2 Press the right arrow to increase the value left arrow to decrease the value and ENTER to change units The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other Autowrap This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of text exceeds the right margin e No default Any print data received past the forms width setting is discarded e Yes An automatic carriage return and line feed is performed when data is received past the forms width setting CR This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code hex OD from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer e z CR default Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return e CR LF If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Carriage Return it inserts an additional Line Feed code hex 0A into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer with each Carriage Return LF This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriag
225. ght edge of the original barcode and extend past the left edge Any form elements text graphics or dots immediately to the left of the original barcode however can force this first attempted placement to be modified The replacement barcode will shift right to avoid obstacles on the left provided that there are also no obstacles on the right Hor Quiet Zone This menu defines the quiet zones empty areas width before and after the start stop codes regardless of picket fence or ladder orientation When positioning the barcode the quiet zone is taken into account when detecting collisions with other elements dots on the form If one of the horizontal quiet zones is violated the barcode will automatically shift to the left or right for picket fence orientation or up or down for ladder orientation to remove the quiet zone violation The width of the area can be defined between 0 and 0 99 inches in 0 01 inch increments The default is 0 20 inches This feature ensures that the replacement barcodes will be properly scanned Barcodes are automatically adjusted 74 gt away from text or other Quiet Zone obstacles on the form distance until the Hor Quiet picket Zone distance is met Quiet Zone distance ladder 247 Chapter 4 OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu Ver Erase Zone This menu defines the area above and below the bars that will be erased regardless of picket fence or ladder orientation It is used when the barcode
226. grammer s Heference Manual for more information CPI LPI Select This parameter lets you specify the characters per inch cpi and lines per inch Ipi values 159 Chapter 44 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II Host Command This parameter allows you to block certain host commands from being acknowledged by the printer e Enable default All host commands are acknowledged by the printer e ignore All All host commands are ignored by the printer Ignore CPI All CPI commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer e Ignore LPI All LPI commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer e ignore Unidir All Unidirectional commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer Font Attributes Typeface e Data Processing default A general purpose font printing out at 120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically The width of the font will vary with each cpi e NLQ A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi vertically This font has serifs and the width of the font varies with the cpi e OCR A OCR B Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 144 dpi vertically Both fonts print only at 10 cpi e High Speed A draft quality font printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 48 dpi vertically The width of the font varies with the cpi e NLQ Sans Serif A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi vertically This font prints without serif
227. h The default is 11 inches Three length options are available Inches Defines the length in inches The range is 1 to 24 in 0 1 inch increments 1 6 Inch Lines Defines the length in 1 6 inch lines The range is 6 to 144 lines 1 8 Inch Lines Defines the length in 1 8 inch lines The range is 8 to 192 lines To set a custom length use the appropriate menu that allows for selection of the exact paper length to avoid loss of top of form i e if using a 12 paper select either the Inches menu set to 12 or the 1 6 Inch Lines menu set to 72 However if using a 11 2 3 inch paper length the 1 6 Inch Lines menu must be used set to 70 since that is exactly 11 2 3 inches If the Inches menu is used the closest values would be 11 6 or 11 7 inches which are not exact The printer will indicate which of the three length menus was used by showing that submenu first when entering the Length menu The configuration printout will also show the length menu used e See Table 3 for paper size options and actual sizes Table 10 Paper Size Options and Actual Size Paper Size Actual Size US Fanfold 13 6 x 11 in Letter 8 5 x 11 in Legal 8 5x14in Executive 7 3 x 10 5 in A3 11 7 x 16 5 in A4 8 8 x 11 2 3 in A5 5 8 x 8 3 in A6 4 1 x 5 8 in 10x14 Inch 10 x 14 in 240 Table 10 Paper Size Options and Actual Size Paper Size Actual S
228. h contrast barcodes The IBARC barcode command prints barcodes in four orientations horizontal rotated 90 rotated 180 or rotated 270 degrees Expanded and Compressed Print draws attention where needed Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a tremendous range of character sizes up to 9 9 inches wide and tall Several compressed print sizes are available 12 13 33 15 17 65 and 20 cpi permitting up to 170 columns in an 8 5 inch printed area 20 cpi Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design Normal expanded and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise counterclockwise or printed upside down Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and a variety of print and shading features which provides a customized appearance for forms reports and labels The registered trademark copyright TUV GS Mark UL and CSA symbols are provided as standard designs on the VGL and you can also define custom symbols Reverse and Shaded Print permit highlighting and contrasting by printing white characters on a dark background or white characters on a gray shaded background Various levels or patterns of gray shading and reverse printing may combine with the many other print features to create distinctive designs Automatic Increment Decrement Capability allows batch form processing Individual alphabetic numeric and barcode data fields can be identified and automa
229. has extraneous data beyond the bars that need to be deleted as it is being optimized The height of the area can be defined between 0 and 0 99 inches in 0 01 inch increments The default is O inches no empty space This feature can be used to remove special attributes remainders of the original barcode such as a guard bar or line that borders the top and bottom of the bars It can also be used to erase the original PDF if the user wants to force all PDFs to be optimized see Update PDF on page 249 The PDF occupies more than 1 6 of an inch Vertical Erase Distance Vertical Erase Distance Erase Area picket Vertical Erase Distance TN Erase Area ladder Quiet Zone Fault This menu defines whether a fault must be reported on the front panel LCD if the BCDOPT feature cannot print the replacement barcode without violating the quiet zone as defined in the Hor Quiet Zone menu where the width of the replacement barcode plus quiet zones is too large to fit the available white space on the page e Enable default If this fault occurs reduce the quiet zone to see if the barcode fits e Disable Quiet zone violations are not reported but adjacent page elements could be drawn too close to replacement barcodes and possibly overlap 248 OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu Update PDF There are two distinct cases with barcode PDFs In the first case the PDF is partially embedded in the barcode such that erasing t
230. he bars also erases the PDF In the second case the PDF is printed entirely above or below the barcode and is not disturbed by the barcode replacement Whenever the PDF is embedded in the barcode such that erasing the bars also erases the PDF the embedded PDF will be automatically detected and replaced An area surrounding the barcode will be erased to remove the portions of the former PDF that extended beyond the bounds of the original barcode The erase area is shown in the figure below Since embedded PDFs are automatically replaced the Upeate PDF menu option has no effect on this type of PDF VEM Erase T d Area 1 6 1 6 i 0 927454 n When the PDF is printed above or below the barcode the behavior will depend on the Update PDF menu setting Embedded Only default Embedded PDFs will not be replaced This allows the user to keep the present PDF data and its font etc e Always PDFs will always reprint For instance since the original PDF will not be centered with respect to the replaced barcode the user may want to always replace the PDF When set to Always an extra 1 6 is erased to remove the original PDF If the original PDF is not fully erased it is up to the user to increase the Ver Erase Zone setting such that the original PDF will be completely erased prior to the replacement being printed 249 Chapter 4 250 OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu Barcodes on Page This setting defines the nu
231. he bottom of the aluminum extrusion bar and the top of the paper out sensor IMPORTANT For optimal performance 2 inches is recommended for 11 inch forms For shorter forms position the paper out sensor so that there are at least 2 inches between a perforation and the top of the paper out sensor 4 Tighten the paper out sensor by turning the sensor knobs clockwise 5 Press ON LINE CLEAR When the first print job is sent to the printer the paper is drawn into the printer the top of form aligns with the print station and the print job begins 330 Set The Tear Bar Distance Set The Tear Bar Distance To set the tear bar distance Make sure the printer is Press the right arrow Press the right arrow BOO 0v Ne do the following steps offline Press ENTER key to enter the menu until OFFLINE ZTP Menu displays Press the down arrow V ZTP Data Time displays until ZTP TearDistance displays Press the down arrow V ZTP TearDistance xx 144 Inch displays Press the left arrow lt or right arrow gt to decrease or increase the tear bar distance in increments of 1 144th of an inch 8 Press ENTER to select the desired value An asterisk appears next the selected value and a scale prints to indicate the tear bar distance in relation to the tear bar For correct tear bar distance the zero should align with the tear bar See Figure 33 NOTE The Tear Distance value must be changed to print the
232. he latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility EOSE DSI CXIWX Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility EOSF DSI CKOWX Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E03G DSI ECXIWX Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted in the application program again If the message appears load the latest emulation software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility 295 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table See User Manual instruction was attempted in the application program Disp
233. hex dump translates all incoming data to hexadecimal equivalents A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the host computer together with its corresponding two digit hexadecimal code Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception problems Print IPDS Fonts This feature allows you to print a list of all resident fonts currently available in the active IPDS emulation 228 PCL Il Emulation PCL Il Emulation EMULATION Factory Default from page 123 PCL II Primary Char Second Char Page Length Max Line Face CPI Symbol Set Set Set Rep Width Delay Delay ID ID Inches Page 13 2 inches Enable Disable 0 109 xx 0 109 xx Lines Page 13 6 inches Disable Enable Symbol Set Symbol Set See page 230 See page 230 Pitch Pitch 10 12 13 3 10 12 13 3 15 16 67 20 15 16 67 20 Density Density Data Processing Data Processing NLQ NLQ OCR A OCR A OCR B OCR B High Speed High Speed Graphics Perforation Display Line PTX LPI Adjust Density Skip Functns Terminator Linefeed 60 DPI Disable Disable LF After CR Disable 6 LPI 70 DPI Enable Enable CR After LF Enable 8 LPI CR After FF CR After VT Page L Lines Page L Inches Config Print Symbol Set Reset Cmd
234. hing else Even a simple job such as a screen print is IPDS data in a twinax attachment Because the printer definition on a twinax host is either set automatically by auto configuration or manually the printer type is already known NOTE A general discussion about starting and stopping IPDS can be found in the IBM 4234 Product and Programming Reference Manual GC31 3879 Sending a non IPDS data stream to an IPDS printer and vise versa will result in a hung spool file or writer Font Size This parameter chooses the font size which will be used by IPDS e Select By Host default The font ID is only affected by host commands e Standard The font ID is converted to a decompressed font ID e Compressed The font ID is converted to a compressed font ID Print Quality This parameter chooses the print quality e Select By Host default The application decides the print quality Default Font The default font the printer uses Graphics Quality This parameter chooses the print quality of graphics e High default Graphics are printed at 144 dot rows per inch e Select By Host The application decides the quality of the graphics e Low Graphics are printed at 72 dot rows per inch Barcode Quality This parameter chooses the horizontal print quality of barcode labels e High default Label is printed at 144 dots per inch e Select By Host The application decides the quality of the labels e Low Label is printed at 72 do
235. host computer A power cycle may be required after changing Buffer Print from enable to disable 140 3270 Params 3270 Params Factory Default 3270 This menu appears only if the TN3270 option is installed Params from page 124 Char Set Translation Active Char Prt Partial Early Print PTX Select Tbl Set Line Cmpl Transparent see page 142 Secondary Sets Enable Disable Lead in Chars Primary Sets Disable Enable Set 1 lt gt Set 2 25 Set 3_ _ User Defined Usr Defined HTRN Start Code 1 Start Code 2 Stop Code Alt Set 80 9F Printable Control Code Change Set Text Intervention Compatibility Host Format Case Orientn Req Op Override Control Dual Case Left to Right Send to Host CRAtMPP 1 Disable Disable Mono Case Right to Left Do Not Send ox Enable Enable NL At MPP 1 On Off Position Aft FF On Off Last Char FF On Off Null Suppression Off On FF Validity Off On Auto Skip At End Off On FF After Job Off On CR EM amp NL On Off Max Print Width 13 2 inches Printer Width 141 Chapter 4 142 3270 Params Char Set Select from page 141 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Factory Default Primary Sets Secondary Sets 0037 English US 0037 E
236. hows done when the job is fully printed e Off No job synchonization between the NIC and the printer ETHERNET ADDRESS ETHERNET ADDRESS ETHERNET ADDRESS from page 105 Factory Default IP Address Subnet Gateway MAC DHCP Mask Address Address XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX hhhhhhhhhhhh Disable Enable IP Address A numeric address such as 123 45 61 23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device gateway that translates data between two incompatible networks which can include protocol translation MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for each printer It is read only DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting The options include e Disable default Enable 109 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP Menu Factory Default ETHERNET 1 If installed PARAMS 2 Available for OpenPrint product only from page 105 NetBIOS ASCII IPDS Data Keep Alive Ethernet Job Control Prot
237. ht 1998 Soft Horizons All Rights Reserved 352 A A TO D OVERUN message 288 Absorb After PN 219 Absorb After PY 217 Accented Char PRINTER CONTROL 253 ACCESS NULL PTR message 288 Acknowledge Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 271 Acoustic noise level 319 ACTIVATE LOST message 288 Active Char Set 128 137 3270 Params menu 143 5250 Params menu 150 Active Emulation 79 Active IGP Emulation 79 Adapter Address 77 ADAPTER ADDRESS Menu 105 DHCP 106 Gateway Address 106 IP address 105 MAC address 106 Subnet Mask 105 ADAPTER PARAMS Menu 106 ASCII data port 107 Ethernet speed 108 IPDS Data Port 107 Job Control 108 Keep alive timer 108 Nest Serv Type 107 NetBIOS protocol 107 Novell frame 107 Index Novell protocol 107 ADVANCED USER Menu 254 Alarm 257 Auto Elevator 256 Auto Locking 256 Cancel Key 258 Downloaded Fonts 255 File System 256 Hex Dump Mode 255 PMD Paper Motion Detection Fault 256 Power Saver Time 258 Power Stacker 256 Power Up State 255 PTX Setup Option 255 Pwr Save Control 258 RBN End Action 260 RBN Low Action 260 RBN Low Warn 259 Rcv Status Port 258 Ret Status Port 258 Set Lock Key 259 Set Sharing 257 Shuttle Timeout 257 Slow Paper Slew 257 Al 00 Spaces 203 218 Alarm ADVANCED USER Menu 257 Alignment 243 Alt Char Set Proprinter XL Emulation 180 Alt Set 80 9F 130 167 Epson FX Emulation 184 PTX Transparent 138 Serial Matr
238. ies 0 025 inch 0 064 cm maximum Adjustable tractors 6 pin engagement 317 Appendix A Labels Labels On Backing One part continuous perforated fanfold back form Labels must be placed at least 1 6 inch 0 42 cm from the fan fold perforation Backing adhesive must not be squeezed out during printing Sheet Size 3 to 17 inches 7 62 to 43 18 cm wide including the two standard perforated tractor feed strips A maximum sheet length of 16 inches 40 64 cm between top and bottom perforations NOTE A 16 inch rear door is needed for the cabinet model Power Paper Stacker option is 5 to 12 inches 12 7 to 30 48 cm long Thickness Not to exceed 0 025 inch 0 064 cm including backing sheet Printer Weight And Dimensions Cabinet Type Dimensions Weight Height Width Depth Unpacked Packaged Floor Cabinet 42 5 inches 27 inches 29 inches 225 lbs 285 Ibs Pedestal 35 inches 26 inches 21 inches 105 Ibs 115 Ibs With a power stacker the weight increases by 21 lbs and the depth increases by 4 75 inches for a deeper rear door With the ZTP option the weight increases by 12 Ibs and the height is increased by 7 inches Environmental Characteristics Temperature Operating 50 to 104 F 10 to 40 C up to 5000 feet 1524 meters 50 to 90 F 10 to 32 C up to 8000 feet 2438 meters Storage 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Relative Humidity Op
239. if the emulation is Postscript 111 Chapter 4 112 NETWORK SETUP Menu WLAN ADDRESS WLAN ADDRESS from page 105 Factory Default IP Address Subnet Gateway MAC DHCP Mask Address Address XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX Xxx xxx xxx hhhhhhhhhhhh Disable Enable IP Address A numeric address such as 123 45 61 23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device gateway that translates data between two incompatible networks which can include protocol translation MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for each printer It is read only DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting The options include e Disable default Enable WLAN PARAMS from page 105 WLAN PARAMS WLAN PARAMS Factory Default 1 Only when 40 Bites is selected Only when 128 Bits is selected a Only when a Symbol 4121 radio card is installed a Only when a Cisco radio card is installed 5 Read only 6 Not displayed if LA5127 radio card is installed 4 On
240. igating the Menus To manipulate configurations review the following instructions about navigating through the menus You must be offline to move within the menus ON LINE CLEAR Press to toggle between ONLINE and OFFLINE Menus are i i accessed with the printer offline ry Press to move up or down through the menu levels OR Press to scroll through the available choices on a chosen 22 ENTER Press to confirm selection lt i Press to lock and unlock the ENTER key The ENTER key is CR locked by default to prevent you from accidentally changing the printer configuration The lock and unlock function can be configured to be other than A V See Set Lock Key on V page 259 To experiment with navigating the menus use the example on the next page as a tutorial 49 Chapter 4 50 Changing Parameters Example Configuration Overview OFFLINE Factory Default QUICK CONFIG SETUP CONTROL Load Save Print Delete Config Config Config Config Factory 1 Current Short 1 1 8 2 8 Current Full 2 8 Factory Power Up All 1 8 Power Up Protect Name Reset Cfg Auto Config Configs Configs Names Save Factory Disable 1 8 1 Enable 1 8 Enable 2 8 Disable All A configuration consists of several parameters The default factory configuration has a starting set of parameters In
241. ility Mode can be combined with Nibble and Byte Modes to provide bidirectional communication Nibble Mode Eight bits equals one byte When a byte of data is sent to the printer the eight bits are sent over eight data lines Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines To bypass this the 1284 permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status lines Half a byte equals one nibble Two sequential four bit nibbles are sent over the lines Data is transferred from printer to host in four bit nibbles over the status lines and the host controls the transmission Byte Mode The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines one bit per line If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host the host will take control of the data transfer Signals Signals Table 13 lists each of the signals associated with the corresponding pins on the 1284 interface Descriptions of the signals follow Table 13 1284 Signals Type of Mode Pin Source of Data Compatible Nibble Byte 1 Host nStrobe HostClk Host Clk 2 Host Printer Data 1 LSB 3 Host Printer Data 2 4 Host Printer Data 3 5 Host Printer Data 4 6 Host Printer Data 5 7 Host Printer Data 6 8 Host Printer Data 7 9 Host Printer Data 8 MSB 10 Printer nAck PtrClk PtrClk 11 Printer Busy PtrBusy PtrBusy 12 Printer PErr
242. inary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device gateway that translates data between two incompatible networks which can include protocol translation MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for each printer It is read only DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting WLAN Address IP Address A numeric address such as 123 45 61 23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device gateway that translates data between two incompatible networks which can include protocol translation MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for each printer It is read only DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting ZTP DataTime This option sets the pause time in the data stream that the ZTP requires before moving the form to the tear bar once a pri
243. inch LPI characters per inch CPI print quality and text orientation Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option e Enable The operator panel settings override the host commands NOTE Host margin and tab settings will take precedence whether or not Host Override is enabled 139 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Format Control Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed e Disable default Reflects distance generated by the IGP VGL feature IGP PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after absolute and relative move commands are executed e Enable Does not reflect distance generated by the IGP VGL feature IGP PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after absolute and relative move commands are executed Max Print Width Set the maximum print width at either 13 2 inches or the maximum width of the printer The default is 13 2 inches Buffer Print e Disable default The printer will print normally e Enable The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values Refer to page 285 for information on how to obtain a hex code printout NOTE Use of this parameter may alter print attributes set by the
244. incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means whether manual graphic electronic mechanical or otherwise without the prior written consent of Printronix Printronix makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Printronix shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages whether direct or indirect incidental or consequential in connection with the furnishing distribution performance or use of this material The information in this manual is subject to change without notice COPYRIGHT 1997 2012 PRINTRONIX INC Trademark Acknowledgements ANSI is a registered trademark of the American National Standards Institute Inc EA g Artifex the Artifex logo Ghostscript and the Ghostscript logo S are registered trademarks of Artifex Software Inc PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation CSA is a registered certification mark of the Canadian Standards Association Dataproducts is a registered trademark of Dataproducts Corporation EIA is a registered service mark of the Electronic Industries Association ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency As an ENERGY STAR Partner Print
245. inePrinter Plus menu page 157 is changed to OCR A or OCR B respectively To use one of these sets choose the desired group heading such as European Sets and press ENTER Then choose the desired set within that group such as Roman 8 and press ENTER Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection The UTF 8 selection allows printing of UTF 8 encoded Unicode Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Heference Manual 20 CPI Condensed Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page e Enable default Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer For example a 12 CPI Draft font will compress to 20 CPI e Disable Does not compress print widths even if condensed print is chosen by the host Alt Set 80 9F Control Code default Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code e Printable Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F 184 Character Set from page 183 Epson FX Character Set Menu Factory Default Epson FX Emulation Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Hebrew Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets Epson Set ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866
246. iodic cleaning handling the printer properly and using the correct printer supplies such as ribbon and paper ensures optimum performance Chapter 7 explains how to clean the printer and printer supplies are listed in Appendix A Conventions In This Manual Control panel keys and indicators are highlighted in UPPERCASE BOLD PRINT Example Press the CANCEL key then press the ON LINE CLEAR key Quotation marks indicate messages on the Liquid Crystal Display LCD Example Press the ON LINE CLEAR key OFFLINE appears on the LCD The plus symbol represents key combinations Example Press A V means press the A UP key and the V DOWN key at the same time Chapter 1 Warnings And Special Information Warnings And Special Information WARNING CAUTION IMPORTANT Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings A warning notice calls attention to a condition that could harm you A caution notice calls attention to a condition that could damage the printer Information vital to proper operation of the printer NOTE A note gives you helpful tips about printer operation and maintenance Related Documents e Quick Reference Guide Explains how to set up the printer for basic operation load ribbon cartridge and media and clear paper jams e Maintenance Manual Explains how to maintain and repair the line matrix printer at the field service level of maintenance
247. ion Statements seen 341 Software License Agreement sssssssssseeeeneeen 346 Table of Contents l Introduction Printer Overview This chapter provides a general overview of your printer and the conventions used within this manual Printronix P7000 Cartridge Ribbon Printers CRP Series Printronix has been the global leader in industrial printing solutions for over 30 years earning a reputation for designing and manufacturing leading edge products and delivering them to market with unsurpassed service and support The Printronix P7000 Line Matrix Printing Platform extends the series of technology innovations that cement Printronix s leadership position Line matrix printing is Printronix s flagship technology and it remains the workhorse solution for supply chain and back office printing applications because of its reliability lower cost of ownership and flexibility of printing applications e Most reliable printer ever provides more up time and lower operating costs e Ultra capacity ribbons deliver darker image last longer and costs less to operate than other print technologies e Integrated print management system provides precise control over print quality print costs and job planning e Cabinet or Pedestal styles best user access and forms handling flexibility e Unsurpassed ease of use simplifies operation and enhances productivity Chapter 41
248. is option selects different barcode ratios for certain barcodes including Code 39 and I 2 5 It is included for compatibility with the IGP XO0 printers e Disable default Use standard barcode ratios e Enable Select the alternate barcode ratios l 2 5 Selection This option is added to be compatible with a special IGP X00 customization Usually if 2 5 barcodes have an odd number of digits a leading zero is inserted in front of the data However this special IGP X00 customization gives you the option of adding a space character at the end of the barcode instead e Leading Zero default A leading zero is inserted in front of the printable data field Trailing Space A space is inserted at the end of the printable data field and a zero is encoded with the corresponding space in the end of the barcode e X2 DPD When selected an I 2 5 barcode with an X2 magnification will use the specially configured ratios 3 3 6 5 rather than 3 6 9 12 for compatibility issues e Modulo 7 CD The I 2 5 barcode uses a modulo 7 check digit instead of the default modulo 10 check digit Al 00 Spaces This option is designated for EAN UCC 128 barcodes whose application identifier Al is 00 e Disable default The printable data field is printed with the Al enclosed in parentheses This is the standard EAN UCC 128 format e Enable The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated by spaces This option is IGP X00 compatible
249. is used in Twinax SPC emulation The range is ASCII character This option allows users to define ther own lead in characters for the Printronix Specific commands Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option e Start Code 1 5F e Start Code 2 5F e Stop Code 5B PA1 PA1 is only valid when the printer is in the offline state and the Coax Systems Network Architecture Character String SCS data stream is active This function displays the PA1 ENABLED message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is placed online Refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual for more information about SCS 153 Chapter 4 154 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation PA2 PA2 is only valid when the printer is in the OFFLINE state and the Coax SCS data stream is active This function displays the PA2 ENABLED message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is placed ONLINE Buffer Reprint This option is valid only when the printer is printing in SCS mode When the ENTER key is pressed Buffer Reprint Enabled is displayed and an Intervention Required status is sent to the host Pressing ENTER again cancels the Buffer Reprint function and Buffer Reprint Disabled is displayed SPC Null Supp e Enable default Treats nulls as blank spaces e Disable Ignores nulls The print position does not move SP
250. ition The default value is 1060 NOTE When a new value is selected the printer will lose the current print position You must reset the top of form to automatically save the new value ZTP Data Time This option sets the pause time in the data stream that the ZTP requires before moving the form to the tear bar once a print job is completed The values range from 5 to 15 seconds The default is 5 seconds ZTP Wait Time This option sets the minimum amount of time that the form stays at the tear bar This allows you time to remove the form before the form is retracted to print the next form The adjustable values range from 1 to 10 seconds in increments of 1 second The default value is 2 seconds 333 Appendix C Performance Limitations ZTP Platen Open This option allows the user to have the platen open whenever forms are reversed Enabled is the default used for most papers and labels The feature can be disabled as required by some multi part forms Performance Limitations Forms Type The paper feed tractors on the ZT printer push the paper up through the print station instead of pulling it through as in the standard pedestal printer This limits the variety of forms the ZT printer can use If the forms do not fall within the range specified in Table 18 dot compression and line separation may occur The user should match the media to the application to ensure acceptable print quality Also because paper is pushed fr
251. ity Op 145 Early Print Cmpl 143 Format Control 147 Host Override 146 Intervention Req 144 Max Print Width 147 Prt Partial Line 143 PTX Transparent 143 Set Text Orientn 144 Translation Tbl 143 33 PLATEN OPEN TIMOUT message 287 34 RIBBON STALL TIMOUT message 288 48V CIRCUIT message 288 48V PWR FAIL message 288 5225 World Trade 137 5250 Params 148 5250 Params menu Active Char Set 150 Format Control 152 Graphic Chek Cod 151 Graphic Chek Err 151 Host Override 151 Max Print Width 152 Prt Partial Line 150 PTX Transparent 150 Set Text Orientn 151 Translation Tbl 150 8 5V PWR FAIL message 287 254796 001G
252. ive timer Ethernet Params Menu 110 Kerberos Enable WLAN KERBEROS Menu 117 Kerb Passwrd WLAN KERBEROS Menu 118 L Label specifications 318 LAC Approx 139 LAC Option 139 Last Char FF 132 145 Latch Data On Centronics Parallel submenu 93 Dataproducts submenu 96 Lead in Chars 130 PTX Transparent 138 LEAP Password WLAN LEAP Menu 119 120 LEAP Username WLAN LEAP Menu 119 LG Emulation Autowrap 236 CR 236 FF 237 Font 235 Horiz Forms 236 2 5 Guard Bars 237 LP 236 Plot Mode Opt 237 366 Print Mode Opt 237 Unsolicited Rpt 237 Vert Forms 235 Lighter print Integrated Print Management System 42 Line Terminator PCL II Emulation 232 LinePrinter Plus Emulation submenu 157 Barcode Height 163 Barcode x offset 163 CPI LPI Select 159 Font Attributes 160 Host Command 160 Page Format 162 PCL II 159 Print Char Set 163 Printer Protocol 159 Reset Cmd CFG Ld 163 Set Substitution 163 LO DRV SHORT message 308 Load Config 83 85 LOAD PAPER message 308 LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX message 308 LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH message 308 Loading Used Ribbon 42 Logical Buf Size 153 LPI 216 LPI Adjust PCL II Emulation 232 LP LG Emulation 236 LP Font 218 MAC address Adapter Address Menu 106 Ethernet Address Menu 109 WLAN Address Menu 112 Main Menu OpenPrint P7000 STD Postscript 74 P7000 ANSI Firmware 72 P7000 HD OpenPrint Postscript PDF Firmware 76 P7000 LG Firmware
253. ived The next print position will be the current print position of the next line e LF CR LF Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command received The next print position is print position 1 of the next line 175 Chapter 44 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II Printer Select e Disable default Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes e Enable Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received Alt Set 80 9F e Control Code default Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code e Printable Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F Character Set Specifies a character set as shown in the Xepto Matprg Xnapaytep Let Mevo ov naye 177 To use one of these sets choose the desired group heading such as European Sets and press ENTER Then choose the desired set within that group such as Roman 8 and press ENTER Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Heference Manual ESC d command e Even dot plot default Interprets the ESC d command as even dot plot e Double high Interprets the ESC d Command as double high Select this option for backward compatibility 176 Serial Matrix Character Set Menu Character Set from page 174 Factory Default Serial Matrix Emulation
254. ix Emulation 176 353 ANSI Emulation menu 188 Auto LF 192 Barcode Darkmode 194 BC Check Digit 194 Character Set 193 CPI LPI Select 190 Define CR Code 192 Define LF Code 192 ESC c Sequence 193 ETX ACK 194 Font Attributes 190 Page Format 191 Pos on BC OvrSz 194 Printer Select 193 Private Mode 193 PUM Default 194 Received CR 193 Received DEL 193 Reset Cmd CFG Ld 193 Truncate PI Slew 194 Antenna WLAN PARAMS Menu 115 Ant Diversity WLAN PARAMS Menu 115 Append Rotated 216 ASCII Character Set 323 ASCII data port Adapter Params Menu 107 ASCII data port Ethernet Params Menu 110 Auth Method WLAN LEAP Menu 119 Auth Method WLAN PARAMS Menu 116 Auto Elevator ADVANCED USER Menu 256 Auto FF at PN 220 Auto LF 166 ANSI Emulation menu 192 Epson FX Emulation 183 Proprinter XL Emulation 179 P Series XQ Emulation 172 Serial Matrix Emulation 175 Auto Locking ADVANCED USER Menu 256 Auto Save Configuration 53 Auto Save CONFIG CONTROL menu Auto Save 87 Auto Skip At End 132 146 354 Auto Switching submenu 88 Port Type 89 Report Status 89 Switch Out On 89 Timeout 89 Trickle Time 89 Auto Trickle Centronics Parallel submenu 93 Dataproducts submenu 96 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 91 Auto Uppercase 201 Autowrap 200 Autowrap LG Emulation 236 B Bar Code Quality PRINTER CONTROL 252 Bar Code Verification 284 Barcode Darkmode ANSI Em
255. ize 12x12 Inch 12x 12 in 13 6x12 Inch 13 6 x 12 in Tabloid 11x17in 11 x 17 in JIS B5 7 2 x 10 1 in US Folio 8 5 x 13 in No 10 Envelope 4 1x9 5 in DL Envelope 4 3x8 7 in C5 Envelope 6 4 x 9 in C6 Envelope 4 5 x 6 4 in ISO B5 6 9 x 9 8 in Postscript PDF Interpreter NOTE When host jobs have page sizes that do not match the Paper Size parameter the printer will behave based on the Paper Size Fault Clip Page and Move to TOF parameters Paper Size Fault If a page is sent to the printer with dimensions that do not match the printer then the following will happen based on the Paper Size Fault menu selected Ignore default The page will print and the paper size length will be ignored However the width will be clipped according to the front panel width setting Fault The printer enters a fault state and goes offline The user will need to either clear the fault and continue or load new media and change the Paper Size menu selection Once the printer is back online printing will resume Clip Page This menu defines the action when a page is sent to the printer with a length that is longer than the selected paper size length Enable default The page will be clipped at the paper size length In cases where the sent page is longer than the paper size length the Move to TOF menu setting has no effect since the page is clipped at the TOF position Disable The page will not be clipped and printing continues
256. jumpered together to allow the user to verify proper installation of the interface connector Buffer Clear A high true level from the host to indicate the printer should perform a reboot Parity Error Always carries a low false signal from the printer indicating there is no parity error 269 Chapter 5 Centronics Parallel Interface Centronics Parallel Interface Table 12 Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin DATA LINE 1 2 ACKNOWLEDGE 10 CHASSIS GROUND 17 Return 20 Return 28 DATA LINE 2 3 ONLINE 13 GROUND 30 Return 21 Return 28 DATA LINE 3 4 FAULT 32 Spares 14 Return 22 Return 29 DATA LINE 4 5 PAPER EMPTY 12 No Connection 34 35 Return 23 Return 28 36 DATA LINE 5 6 BUSY 11 5 Volts 18 Return 24 Return 29 DATA LINE 6 7 Return 25 DATA LINE 7 8 Return 26 DATA LINE 8 9 Return 27 DATA STROBE Return 19 PAPER INSTRUCTION 15 Return 29 PRIME 31 Return 30 The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 15 feet 5 meters 270 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals Centronics Parallel Interface Signals Data Lines 1 through 8 Provides eight standard or inverted levels from the host that specify character data plot data or a control code Data Line 8 allows access to the extended ASCII character set You may enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the C
257. lace Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA eCos is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details As a special exception if other files instantiate templates or use macros or inline functions from this file or you compile this file and link it with other works to produce a work based on this file this file does not by itself cause the resulting work to be covered by the GNU General Public License However the source code for this file must still be made available in accordance with section 3 of the GNU General Public License This exception does not invalidate any other reasons why a work based on this file might be covered by the GNU General Public License Alternative licenses for eCos may be arranged by contacting Red Hat Inc at http sources redhat com ecos ecos license GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed 346 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
258. layed Message RM Explanation Solution E03H DSI ECXOWX Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E04A ISI NO TRA Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E04B ISI DIRECT Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E04C ISI PROTEC Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E06 NOT ALIGN
259. ld be addressed to the suppliers of those products Printronix encourages owners of information technology IT equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed Printronix offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products Information on these product recycling offerings can be found on Printronix s Internet site at http www printronix com Before using this information and the product it supports read the information and Communication Statements on page 341 340 If you are viewing this information softcopy the photographs and color illustrations may not appear For online versions of this book we authorize you to e Copy modify and print the documentation contained on the media for use within your enterprise provided you reproduce the copyright notice all warning statements and other required statements on each copy or partial copy e Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related Printronix product which may be either machines you own or programs if the program s license terms permit a transfer You must at the same time destroy all other copies of the documentation You are responsible for payment of any taxes including personal property taxes resulting from this authorization Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization Upon termination you must destroy
260. lected 99 Chapter 4 100 HOST INTERFACE Menu Baud Rate Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer Baud rate is the speed at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer The choices for the RS 232 and RS 422 interfaces are 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 Baud The default is 9600 Baud NOTE If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200 you may need to use RS 422 or select a lower baud rate to prevent data loss You also may need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance Word Length Sets the length of the serial data word The length of the data word can be set to 7 or 8 bits and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host computer Stop Bits 1 Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word Either one or two stop bits can be selected The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in the host computer Parity Set for odd parity even parity mark sense or no parity The setting must match the corresponding parity setting in the host computer Data Term Ready This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the Data Terminal Ready DTR signal is generated This signal indicates if the printer is ready to receive data e True default Continuously asserts the DTR signal e On Line and BNF buffer not full Asserts the DTR signal when the printer
261. led 2 If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 3 If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu If LP is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 5 If ANSI is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu Not available if PNE Port is set at Serial 7 If Real Time Clock RTC option is installed 8 Available for pedestal printers only 9 Based on WLAN radio installed 10 f a Feature File has been downloaded 73 Chapter 4 74 Main Menu OpenPrint P7000 STD Postscript PDF Firmware OFFLINE QUICK ZTP CONFIG HOST NETWORK SETUP SETTINGS CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP page 77 page 333 page 85 page 87 page 105 HOST INTERFACE ZTP Function Load Config Auto Switching Adapter Address 1 Adapter Address 1 ZTP TearDistance Save Config Centronics Adapter Params 1 Ethernet Address ZTP Data Time Print Config Dataproducts Ethernet Address WLAN Address 1 ZTP Wait Time Delete Config IEEE 1284 Ethernet Params ZTP DataTime 8 ZTP Platen Open Power Up Config Serial WLAN Address ZTP WaitTime Protect Configs E Net Adapter WLAN Params ZTP TearDist Name Configs Ethernet WLAN Kerberos 9 ACTIVE EMULATION Resolution Paper Size 5 PGL SFCC VGL SFCC Printer Protocol 4 Form Length Form Width Select CPI Select LPI 4 P Series SFCC 4 Ribbon End Point Save Config Power Up Config Reset Cfg Names WLAN LEAP Auto Save WLAN EAP
262. lled caret e TILDE hex 7E NOTE SOH ETX and ESC are non printables The characters and are printable however do not use them as printables in the host data stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will occur Margins e Left Margin Set in columns Column zero is defined as the far left edge of the page and column numbering increments from left to right e Right Margin Set in columns Column zero is defined as the far right edge of the page and column numbering increments from right to left e Top Margin Defined in lines starting from line zero at the top of the page and incrementing from the top down Bottom Margin Defined in lines starting from line zero at the bottom of the page and incrementing from the bottom up Form Length Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page You can set the form length in inches millimeters mm or as a function of the current Ipi lines per inch QUICK SETUP Menu Form Width The form width can be specified in inches millimeters or as a function of the current cpi characters per inch The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width Vert Forms e Bot Frm 66 6 default This option sets the bottom margin for the forms You must specify the bottom margin in lines at 6 lines per inch ranging from 0 to 198 lines 33 inches The default setting is 66 Press the right arrow to increase the value left
263. llowing e Send To Host default The printer sends a signal to the host computer when any of the following occur e Printer faults occur e Hold mode time out occurs e Not Send To Host If not selected the printer will only send the signal on printer faults that cause data loss paper jam ribbon stall online platen open etc 144 3270 Params Compatibility Op The Compatibility Options allow you to select special printer functions in the non SCS mode based on the capabilities of the printer emulated CR At MPP 1 MPP is Maximum Print Position which is also known as line length This option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP 1 e On default Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the next line e Off Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line NL At MPP 1 Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line e On default Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current position e Off Moves to the first print position of the next print line Position Aft FF 4234 only Allows you to select the location of the print position after a form feed command is sent e On default Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first print line on the next form e Off Sets the printer to print at print position 2 of the first print line on the next form Last Char FF Determi
264. llows for compatibility by raising the print two dot rows to match the current models dot row value two dot rows lower FF Valid at TOF e Enable default Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form Disable Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form 167 Chapter 4 P Series Character Set Menu Character Set from page 164 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II z Factory Default Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets See page 169 ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852 ELOT 928 Greek ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek Sakr CP714 7 bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 Arabic CP 864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 Arabic CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO Arabic Lam 1 CP 1048 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1
265. lt DECIMAL equivalent HEX equivalent 323 Appendix B 324 C Zero lear Printer Overview The P7000 Zero Tear ZT printer can print a form and present it for tear off without losing a form between print jobs The printer automatically presents the current print line to the tear bar when it finishes printing and no data are being sent to the printer When it receives more data from the host computer the printer pulls the form down to the print station and resumes printing The ZT printer is available e as a 500 Ipm 1000 Ipm 1500 Ipm standard ASCII printer e with HD printers 325 Appendix C Operation Operation Position The Paper Input And Adjust The Paper Guides Outer Paper Guide Leaf 2 conto Peper Front Paper Guide Leaf 3 Paper Guide Knob 3 Figure 27 Adjusting The Paper Guides NOTE Ensure that the paper guides are not damaged 1 Remove the left paper guide knob and the left front paper guide leaf See Figure 27 Remove the right paper guide knob and the right front paper guide leaf Remove the center paper guide knob and the center front paper guide leaf 326 Position The Paper Input And Adjust The Paper Guides Center Paper Guide Leaf 5 5
266. lt Discards any data past the forms width e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width causing the excess text to print on the next line Overstrike This option enables you to print bold characters e Enable disable Turns on bold print When enabled overstrike printing slows down the printer e Disable Turns off bold print Define LF Code e LF CR LF default Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command The next print position is print position 1 of the next line LF LLF Does not perform an automatic carriage return The next print position will be the current print position of the next line P Series SFCC This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the Special Function Control Code SFCC command delimiter P Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F Options include the following e ESC hex 1B e SOH hex 01 e ETX hex 03 e CIRCUMFLEX hex 5E also called caret e TILDE hex 7E NOTE SOH ETX and ESC are non printables The characters and are printable however do not use them as printables in the host data stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will occur 166 P Series Emulation With LG VFU Select Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting e EVFU default Enables the VFU and selects P Series compatible Electronic Verti
267. ly if LA5127 radio card is installed Signal Operation SSID Reset SSID Min xfer Channel 8 Strength 5 Mode Name Name Rate 096 Infrastructure SSID Name 01 15 Auto negotiate Default Pseudo IBSS SSID Name 16 30 1Mb Sec 1 15 Ad Hoc SSID Name 31 32 2Mb Sec 5 5Mb Sec 11Mb Sec Ant Diversity Preamble 9 Antenna 7 Power Transmit Internat Mgmt Power Mode Diverse Default Primary 0 ms 100 Disable Primary Short Auxiliary 100 ms 0 100 Enable Auxiliary Long Diverse 200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms 900 ms 1000 ms Auth WEP Key 1 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 4 Method Open Key Format Key Format Key Format Key Format Shared Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Kerberos 3 ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII LEAP 4 Key Width Key Width Key Width Key Width 128 Bits 128 Bits 128 Bits 128 Bits 40 Bits 40 Bits 40 Bits 40 Bits Byte 1 Bytes 5 1 Byte 1 Bytes 5 1 Byte 1 Bytes 5 1 Byte 1 Bytes 5 1 Byte 1 Bytes 13 Byte 1 Bytes 13 Byte 1 Bytes 13 Byte 1 Bytes 13 Default WEP Reset WEP WPA WPA WPA WPA P Phs Keys Keys Mode Cipher 7 P Phs 01 15 7 16 30 7 Disable TKIP Xxx 3 Enable AES TKIP AES Disable I
268. mber of barcodes that must be detected on the form If the value is set to Auto default no particular number of barcodes are required to be detected If the value is set to a number between 1 to 20 then the number of barcodes set is required to be detected on each form If the printer detects fewer barcodes than the value set the fault x y BARCODES Not Found is declared x represents the number of barcodes not found and y represents the Barcodes on Page value Printing will not continue until the user clears this fault Bcodes Optimized This is a display menu that continuously counts the number of barcodes that have been optimized since power up This statistic only resets to zero when the printer is powered off This menu can be used as a diagnostic to check the number of barcodes optimized over a period of time or over a batch file PRINTER CONTROL Menu PRINTER CONTROL Menu Factory Default PRINTER 1 Not available in LG or PCL II CONTROL from page 65 Available for Pedestal printers only 3 Not available when Postscript PDF is active Ribbon End Point Open Platen BOF Bar Code Quality Tear Bar Dist 2 View Function 2 Unidirectional Darker 6 Darker 5 Disable Enable Dark Draft 7 46 inches 4 5 10 5 Disable Enable Disable Enable Darker 4 Darker 3 Darker 2 Darker 1 Normal Ligh
269. message Printer in View displays pressing the UP or DOWN arrow keys moves the paper up or down in 1 72 inch increments This is done to align the image within a pre printed form for example Refer to the UP and DOWN key functions for additional details on the microstep feature Pressing VIEW EJECT a second time moves the paper back to the adjusted print position e Eject Function for pedestal models when the VIEW EJECT key is pressed the bottom of the last printed form will move to the tear bar position The message READY TO TEAR EJECT To Return displays While in this position pressing the UP or DOWN arrow keys moves the paper up or down in 1 72 inch increments Refer to the Up and Down key functions for additional details on the microstep feature When the VIEW EJECT key is pressed a second time the printer will move the paper to enable printing on the next available form x CANCEL In offline mode this key cancels all data in the print buffer if enabled in the ADVANCED USER Menu see page 254 The print buffer is cleared without printing any of the data and the current paper position is set as the top of form If this function is disabled the CANCEL key will be ignored NOTE 1 Use of this key will cause loss of data 2 For OpenPrint products pressing the CANCEL key advances the paper to the next TOF 25 Chapter 3 26 The Control Panel r3 SET TOF Sets the top of form on the printer This key is acti
270. meter lets you specify the lines per inch lpi values 6 LPI default or 8 LPI Page L Lines This parameter lets you set physical page length in lines from 12 to 96 at 6 Ipi or 16 to 128 at 8 cpi The default is 66 lines at 6 Ipi NOTE If 6 Ipi is selected you will be able to scroll the menu to 128 an invalid length However when you press ENTER to select this value the menu will return with the maximum lines for 6 Ipi i e 96 lines Similarly selecting too few lines for 8 Ipi will cause the menu to return with 16 lines Page L Inches This parameter allows you to set physical page length from 2 to 16 inches in increments of half an inch The default is 11 inches LG Emulation Config Print This option prints the emulation s parameters and the currently selected values Symbol Set Print This option prints a list of all the available sets The character set number prints to the left of the character set sample Reset Cmd CFG Ld When the printer receives a host data stream reset command in addition to resetting printer variables the selected configuration will be loaded e Current Config default If you have preset and presaved multiple configurations then the currently selected presaved configuration is loaded when the reset command is received e Factory Config The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is received e Disable The printer ignores the reset command when it is
271. mputer are called configuration parameters You can configure the printer using the configuration menus and the control panel or by sending control codes in the data stream from a host computer attached to the printer This chapter provides an introduction to configuring the printer and includes the configuration menus available depending on which emulation you have installed in the printer Configuration directly affects printer operation Do not change the configuration of your printer until you are thoroughly familiar with the procedures in this chapter Main Menu The Main Menu section page 63 is organized based on the following firmware types 1 P7000 STD Firmware Coax Twinax IPDS PGL VGL LP P7000 TN Firmware TN PGL VGL LP P7000 PCL II Firmware PCL II PGL VGL LP P7000 LG Firmware LG PGL VGL LP P7000 ANSI Firmware ANSI PGL VGL LP OpenPrint P7000 STD Postscript PDF Firmware PS PGL VGL LP OpenPrint P7000 HD Postscript PDF Firmware PS N Oa PW ND 47 Chapter 4 48 Configuration Overview Changing Parameter Settings You may change a printer parameter setting such as line spacing or forms length either by pressing keys on the control panel or by sending emulation control codes in the data stream from a host attached to the printer The control panel allows you to configure the printer s resident set of configuration menus An example procedure for using the control panel to change parameter
272. mulation 173 Serial Matrix Emulation 175 Delete Config 86 Demand Data Request Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 269 Device Address 137 155 Device ID 77 137 DHCP Adapter Address Menu 106 Ethernet Address Menu 109 WLAN Address Menu 112 DIAGNOSTIC PASSED message 293 DIAGNOSTICS Menu 261 Feature File 263 Paper Out Dots 262 Print Statistics 263 Printer Tests 261 Shuttle Type 263 358 Software Build 263 System Memory 263 Test Width 262 Dimensions printer 18 318 Display Functions PCL II Emulation 232 Display Language PRINTER CONTROL 252 DO NOT POWER OFF message 293 Documentation list 14 Downloaded Fonts ADVANCED USER Menu 255 DP FIFO Busy message 293 DRVR CIR BAD message 293 D50 STATUS XX Clearing Flash message 292 D50 STATUS XX Programming 293 D55 STATUS Send Program to EC 293 E E Net Test Unavailable 302 EAP Mode WLAN EAP Menu 120 EAP Username WLAN EAP Menu 120 Early Print Cmpl 129 3270 Params menu 143 Early Print Comp Complete IPDS Emulation 227 Electrical Characteristics 320 Elong Alt Font P Series XQ Emulation 173 EMULATION Menu 123 Postscript PDF Interpreter 238 EMULATION menu 242 Emulation IGP PGL 195 Energy Star compliance 319 E Net Adapter submenu 103 ENTER key 26 Environmental characteristics 318 Epson FX Character Set menu 185 PCL II 186 Epson FX Emulation 183 Alt Set 80 9F 184 Auto LF 183 Character Set 184 Define CR Code 183 De
273. n Chars You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through standard Coax emulations To access these features send text commands in the data stream The commands must have a start and end code Four sets are available e Set 1 start code lt stop code e Set 2 start code stop code e Set3 start code 96 stop code _ e User Defined Usr Defined HTRN This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation The range is ASCII character This option allows users to define ther own lead in characters for the Printronix Specific commands Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option e Start Code 1 5F e Start Code 2 5F e Stop Code 5B Alt Set 80 9F e Printable Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F e Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code Change Case Specifies the font as Mono or Dual case This option is available only in non SCS mode The host will be notified of the change when the printer is placed online Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of the following right to left sets Katak Hebrew Old Hebrew and Farsi The default is Dual Case SCS System Network Architecture Character String mode is controlled by the host computer 130 Coax Emulation Set Text Orientn Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page This allows the printer
274. n herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication Printronix may make improvements and or changes in the product s described in this publication at any time without notice Any references in this information to non Printronix Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Printronix product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk 339 Appendix E Note Notices Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment Therefore the results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly Some measurements may have been made on development level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems Furthermore some measurement may have been estimated through extrapolation Actual results may vary Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment Information concerning non Printronix products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources Printronix has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non Printronix products Questions on the capabilities of non Printronix products shou
275. n the Contact your authorized service controller board representative STACKER FAULT Yes Stacker is not functioning Check for obstructions in the correctly stacker area If fault persists contact your authorized service representative STACKER FULL Yes Status message the Unload the stacker If fault persists power paper stacker is contact your authorized service full of paper representative STACKER JAM Yes This message is 1 Open the cabinet rear door and triggered if there is paper check for obstructions preventing inside the throat of the elevator movement Remove any stacker elevator but the obstructions elevator is not moving 2 Run the print job again If the message appears again contact your authorized service representative TABLE MISMATCH No Indicates that the Contact your authorized service DOWNLOAD AGAIN software update has representative failed and should be reloaded TCB CORRUPTED No Task Control Block Contact your authorized service representative 314 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User i Explanation lution Displayed Message Correct planatio Solutio TCP PORT BUSY Yes Error message reported Refer to the Printronix P7000 by the Printer Manager Maintenance Manual when ethernet interface option is installed The network address given in the printer properties was reached but the printer port is busy TIP MISMATCH Ye
276. n the active LP protocol Not all sets are shared between emulations in the Standard group of character sets As a result selecting a set in the Standard group of LP or IGP emulation may or may not cause the other emulation to have the same set NOTE The Set Sharing front panel option has no effect on the LP and CT LP builds The option only applies to the builds with IGP This option is not available in the PCL II or LG emulation Shuttle Timeout The amount of time the shuttle continues moving after no data is received If your host is slow setting the number to a higher value will prevent the printer from spending time shuttling up and down between data bursts Slow Paper Slew Disable default The paper will slew and stack paper at maximum speed e Enable Causes the paper to stack at a slower rate This ensures that certain forms will stack neatly Alarm e On default An audible alarm sounds 3 beeps when a fault occurs such as a paper jam e Cont Beep A continuous audible alarm sounds when a fault occurs which can be stopped by pressing CLEAR e Off No audible alarm will sound 257 Chapter 4 258 ADVANCED USER Menu Power Saver Time The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time before the printer goes into Power Saver mode When Instant is chosen the printer goes into Power Saver mode as soon as it is able to stop the shuttle properly The time allotted t
277. n the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted in the application program again If the message appears load the latest emulation software 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility 293 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table See User Manual instruction was attempted in the application program Displayed Message rala A Explanation Solution E01A TYPE 0x40 Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E01B TYPE 0x60 Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E02 MACHINE CHK Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation pr
278. n the shuttle assembly 11 12 13 Brush and vacuum the accumulated dust or residue inside the lower cabinet Wipe the lower cabinet interior with a clean lint free cloth dampened not wet with water and mild detergent or window cleaning solution Dry the lower cabinet interior by wiping it down with a clean lint free cloth Install the ribbon and load paper 283 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Diagnosing Problems 284 This section is designed to help you fix problems which may arise with normal printer operation Bar Code Verification The most important consideration when printing a bar code is to ensure that the bar code will be scanned properly Incorporating a bar code quality procedure in the printing process is the best way to ensure that bar codes are being printed correctly A properly implemented verification procedure will increase overall bar code quality reduce waste from misprinted bar codes and achieve high first time read rates A high first time read rate is an increasingly important factor in newer more efficient systems where manually entered data is not acceptable as a backup function Verification also minimizes the costs of returned products due to poor reading or unaccountable bar codes Printing A Hex Dump Printing A Hex Dump A hex code printout or hex dump is a translation of all host interface data to its hexadecimal equivalent listing all ASCII character data received f
279. nable Figure 26 on page 285 shows a hex dump sample Power Up State Online default The printer powers up in the online state e Offline The printer powers up in the offline state NOTE This option is not available in the PCL Il or LG emulation Downloaded Fonts Allows you to download a substitution table to replace any character in the current character set with a different character in the same font e Char Operations Allows you to delete a character from flash load a character from flash save a character to flash and delete a character from RAM e Ld Char at Pwrup Allows you to disable or enable loading a character at power up Set Operations Allows you to delete a character set from flash load a character set from flash save a character set to flash and delete a character set from RAM e Ld Set at PwrUp Allows you to disable or enable loading a character set at power up NOTE This option is not available in the PCL II or LG emulation 255 Chapter 4 256 CAUTION ADVANCED USER Menu PMD Paper Motion Detection Fault e Enable default In the event of a paper jam an audible alarm beeps CLEAR PAPER JAM appears on the message display and the printer stops printing e Disable You should disable PMD only if special paper requires it Once PMD is disabled paper motion is not monitored If a paper jam occurs the printer ignores the condition and continues to print possibly causing dam
280. nated so long as such parties remain in full compliance You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the P
281. nds The range is 0 604800 and the default is O e Minutes The range is 0 10080 and the default is O Hours The range is 1 168 and the default is O e Days The range is 0 7 and the default is 0 e Renew Life SEC Renew lifetime unit in seconds The default is 0 118 WLAN LEAP 2 from page 105 WLAN LEAP WLAN LEAP Factory Default 1 Only if a Cisco radio card is installed Auth Method Open Shared LEAP 1 LEAP Reset LEAP LEAP Reset LEAP Username User Password Password LEAP Username 01 15 LEAP Password 01 15 LEAP Username 16 30 LEAP Password 16 30 LEAP Username 31 32 LEAP Password 31 32 Auth Method This feature allows the user to select the authentication method used for the wireless network interface Open default Selects open authentication Shared Selects shared key authentication LEAP Selects LEAP authentication for use with a Cisco RF card installed LEAP Username LEAP Username 01 15 The first 15 characters of the LEAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 LEAP Username 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the LEAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 LEAP User 31 32 Characters 31 to 32 of the LEAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 Reset LEAP User Resets the LEAP user name to an empty string LEAP Password LEAP Password 01 15 The first 15 characters
282. nds must have a start and end code Three sets each containing a start and end code are available e Set 1 start code lt stop code e Set 2 start code stop code e Set 3 start code _ stop code _ e User Defined Usr Defined HTRN This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation The range is ASCII character This option allows users to define ther own lead in characters for the Printronix Specific commands Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option e Start Code 1 5F e Start Code 2 5F e Stop Code 5B Alt Set 80 9F e Printable default Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code Graphic Chek Err Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA Set Graphic Error Action command For more information about the SGEA command refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual e Enable default The host setting for the SGEA used by the printer If the SGEA command is requested to stop on graphic errors the printer will stop when a graphic error is detected e Disable Ignores the SGEA command from the host The printer does not stop when an error is detected instead it substitutes the character selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter 138 Twinax Params Graphic Chek Cod Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable character tha
283. ne CR Code 175 Define LF Code 175 ESC d command 176 Overstrike 175 Printer Select 176 Serial submenu 97 Baud Rate 100 Buffer Size in K 101 Data Protocol 98 Data Term Ready 100 Framing Errors 102 Idle Response 101 Interface Type 98 Offline Process 102 One Char Enquiry 102 Parity 100 Poll Character 101 Poll Response 101 Request to Send 101 Stop Bits 1 100 Word Length 100 Set Lock Key ADVANCED USER Menu 259 Set Sharing ADVANCED USER Menu 257 Set Text Orientn 131 139 3270 Params menu 144 5250 Params menu 151 SET TOF key 26 SF ERROR message 313 SFCC Char SPC Type 156 SFCC d Command 167 SFCC amp Pwrup 215 Power Up F 215 Power Up PY 216 Power Up X 215 VGL SFCC 215 SHTL MISMATCH message 313 SHUTL INV CMD message 313 SHUTL INV PARM message 313 SHUTL OVR SPEED message 313 SHUTTLE JAM message 313 SHUTTLE STALL message 313 Shuttle Timeout ADVANCED USER Menu 257 SHUTTLE TYPE NOT SUPPORTED message 314 Shuttle Type DIAGNOSTICS 263 Signal Strenth WLAN PARAMS Menu 114 Signals Centronics Parallel Interface 271 Dataproducts Parallel Interface 269 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface 273 Simple Prot Conv 125 Site requirements 17 Skip Cmd Prefix 201 Slash 0 201 216 Slew Relative P Series XQ Emulation 174 Slow Paper Slew ADVANCED USER Menu 257 Software Build DIAGNOSTICS 263 SOFTWARE ERROR CYCLE POWER message 314 SPC Char Set SPC Type 156 SPC Coax Params
284. nes the print line position when a form feed command is the last code encountered in the print buffer e On default Moves to the first print position on the second line of the next form e Off Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form NOTE This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on If configured as a 3287 and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next form regardless of the setting of this option Null Suppression e Off default Ignores nulls The print position does not move e On Treats nulls as blank spaces 145 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation FF Validity Determines if the position of a form feed command affects its execution e Off default Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print position in a line or at Maximum Print Position 1 A form feed command at any other position is recognized as a space e On Allows the printer to perform a form feed command anywhere in the data stream Auto Skip At End Specifies whether or not to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a print buffer If form feed is the last character in the print order the form feed function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option e Off default Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next line e On Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the
285. nfigurations in memory This parameter allows you to select and load a specific configuration 83 Chapter 4 84 QUICK SETUP Menu Save Config This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print job requirements This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings for each new job The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost if you turn off the printer If the Protect Configs parameter is enabled the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted first The factory default configuration cannot be changed See Saving Your New Configuration on page 53 for details Power Up Config This option allows you to specify which of the nine configurations Factory or 1 8 will be the power up configuration CONFIG CONTROL Menu CONFIG CONTROL Menu The CONFIG CONTROL menu allows you to control your printer s configurations according to the specifications necessary for your print jobs CONFIG CONTROL from page 64 66 68 70 72 74 and 76 Factory Default Load Save Print Delete Power Up Protect Config Config Config Config Config Configs Factory 1 Current Short 1 Factory Disable 1 8 2 8 Current Full 2 8 1 8 Enable Factory Power Up All 1 8 Name Reset Cfg Auto Save Configs Names 1 8 1 Enable 2 8 Di
286. ng Nether 0285 English UK 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0287 Danish Alt 0278 Finnish 0288 Finn Alt 0297 French 0500 Internat 5 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0289 Span Alt 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0803 Hebrew Old 0424 Hebrew 0892 ORC A 0893 ORC B 0420 Arabic 0880 Oyril Old 0423 Greek Old 0875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Katak 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0905 Turk Old 0256 Intern 1 0924 Euro Lat 9 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1143 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice English US English UK Austrian German German Alt Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Danish Alt Finnish Swedish Finnish Alt French International Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Portug Alt Spanish Spanish Alt Spanish Speak Swiss Fren Ger Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Turkish Old Latin 2 ROECE Yugoslavian 3270 Params Translation Tbl Prints out a table of the Coax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the TN3270 interface is the current interface Active Char Set Specifies which character language set will be the active set e Secondary Sets default e Primary Sets Prt Partial Line
287. ng a job from the serial port and then receives a second print job from the parallel port the data from the parallel port will trickle bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast This function is not applicable for C T hotport Serial Submenu z Factory Default OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256 Interface Data Baud Word Stop Parity Type Protocol Rate Length 8 Bits 1 RS 232 XON XOFF 600 Baud 8 1 None RS 422 ETX ACK 1200 Baud 7 2 Odd ACK NAK 2400 Baud Even Series1 1 Char 4800 Baud Mark Series1 2 Char 9600 Baud Sense ENQ ACK 19200 Baud DTR 38400 Baud 57600 Baud 115200 Baud Data Term Request to Buffer Size Poll Poll Ready Send in K Character Response True On Line and BNF 16 00 Hex 0 ms On Line and BNF Off Line or BF 1 16 0 FF hex 1 30 ms Off Line or BF On Line On Line False False True Idle One Char Framing Offline Response Enquiry Errors Process Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable
288. nge Reprint Cmpl Cnitrl IGP DCU Transparent Case Disable Don t Wait Enable Lead in Chars Dual Case Enable Wait Until Done Disable Set 1 lt gt Mono Case Set 2 Set3 _ _ User Defined Usr Defined HTRN Start Code 1 5F 40 FF Start Code 2 5F 40 FF Stop Code 5B 40 FF Alt Set 80 9F Printable Control Code Set Text Image Buf Intervention Compatibility Translate Host Orientn Size Req Op Table Override Control By Host 4K Send To Host see page 128 Default Disable Left to Right 2K Do Not Send Downloaded Enable Right to Left Format Max Print Buffer Print Control Width Disable 13 2 inches Disable Enable Printer Width Enable 126 Char Set Select from page 126 Primary Secondary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0285 English UK 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0287 Danish Alt 0278 Finnish 0288 Finn Alt 0297 French 0500 Internat 5 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0289 Span Alt 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0803 Hebrew Old 0424 Hebrew 0892 OCR A 0893 OCR B 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 0875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Oyrillic 0905 Turk Old 0256 Intern 1 0924 Euro Lat 9 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1143 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital
289. nserts an extra line feed after each carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Auto LF This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Disable default Discards any data past the forms width e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width 172 P Series XQ Emulation Define LF Code e LF CR LF default Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command received The next print position is print position 1 of the next line LF LF Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed command is received The next print position will be the current print position of the next line Compressed Print Controls which host command sets compressed printing e Char 01 SOH default e Char 03 ETX e Char 09 HT Elong Alt Font Controls which host command sets elongated double high fonts and extended character set e Elng BS Font SO default e Elng SO Font BS HS Print High Speed Print Controls which host command sets high speed printing e Char 02 STX default e Char 03 ETX e Char 09 HT VFU Select Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting The choices are e EVFU default Enables the VFU and selects P Series compatible Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU e DVFU Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compati
290. nt Error Log Clear Error Log 3 Adapter Test Ethernet Test Acoustics Demo Dice 5 Prnt Ribbon Log Checker 32 Megabytes On x x Hrs Print x x Hrs Print Strokes XXXXXX Print Lines XXXXXX 11 inch Pages XXX Software Feature Shuttle Build File 4 Type SW P N Ver P N of File XXXX Printer Tests These tests are used to check the print quality and operation of the printer NOTE Your authorized service representative will typically run the tests They are described in more detail in the Maintenance Manual Shift Recycle A sliding alphanumeric pattern which identifies missing or malformed characters improper vertical alignment or vertical compression All E s A pattern of all uppercase E s which identifies missing characters misplaced dots smeared characters improper phasing problems or light dark character variations e E s TOF A pattern of all E s followed by a form feed to the next page top of form which identifies paper motion or feeding problems 261 Chapter 4 262 CAUTION DIAGNOSTICS Menu All H s A pattern of all uppercase H s used to detect missing characters misplaced dots smeared characters or improper phasing e All Underlines An underline pattern useful for identifying hammer bank misalignment e All Black A condition where all dot positions are printed creating a solid black band e Shuttle Slow Verifie
291. nt job is completed The values range from 5 to 5 seconds The default is 5 seconds ZTP WaitTime This option sets the minimum amount of time that the form stays at the tear bar This allows you time to remove the form before the form is retracted to print the next form The adjustable values range from 500 to 5000 milliseconds in increments of 500 milliseconds The default value is 2 seconds QUICK SETUP Menu ZTP TearDist This option sets the tear off distance from the current print position to the tear bar Adjustable values in increments of 1 144th of an inch range from 200 to 2880 The up and down arrows adjust the display value When you press the ENTER key the selected value is stored and a scale is printed to indicate the current tear off position The default value is 1060 NOTE When a new value is selected the printer will lose the current print position You must reset the top of form to automatically save the new value Active Emulation The Active Emulation menu enables you to select a combination of emulations as described in Table 2 on page 61 Active IGP Emulation The Active IGP Emulation menu enables you to activate either the PGL or VGL emulation This menu is only available with the P7000 STD and TN firmware as described in Table 2 on page 61 PGL SFCC You can specify which hex code 1 FF will be used as the Special Function Control Character SFCC The SFCC denotes that the following data is an IGP
292. ntact your authorized service processor tried to access representative a pointer that contains nothing null ACTIVATE LOST No The printer detects a Contact your authorized service twinax protocol representative communication error and reports the error BOO STATUS SDRAM No Status message the No action required DETECTION 166MHZ printer has begun its boot up routines and is checking for the presence of SDRAM B01 STATUS 8245 No Status message printer No action required SDRAM TEST 32MB boot up routines are testing SDRAM B10 ERROR NO No SDRAM DIMM may not Cycle power to see if the message DRAM DETECTED be properly installed clears if not contact your Boot up routines did not authorized service representative detect the presence of the SDRAM DIMM B11 ERROR RAM No SDRAM failed the boot Cycle power to see if the message clears if not contact your authorized service representative 288 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table P Can User Explanation lution Displayed Message Correct planatio Solutio B12 ERROR Yes The printer does not see There is no program in printer PROGRAM MISSING a program in flash memory Download an emulation memory B13 ERROR NOT No Attempting to download a Cycle power to see if the message COMPATIBLE program that is not clears if not contact your compatible with the authorized service representative printer B
293. nterface Active Char Set Selects which group of character sets Primary or Secondary will be active e Secondary Set default e Primary Set Prt Partial Line e Enable default When this option is enabled it forces the printer to print if a partial line is in the printer i e line not ending with a LF e Disable When disabled the last partial line of data will not be printed PTX Transparent Lead in Chars You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through standard TN5250 emulations To access these features send text commands in the data stream The commands must have a start and end code Four sets are available e Set 1 start code lt default stop code e Set 2 start code stop code e Set 3 start code _ stop code _ e User Defined Usr Defined HTRN This option is used to set user defined lead in characters The range is ASCII character This option allows users to define ther own lead in characters for the Printronix Specific commands Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option Start Code 1 5F default e Start Code 2 5F e Stop Code 5B Alt Set 80 9F e Printable default Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code 150 5250 Params Graphic Chek Err Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA Set Graphic Erro
294. nternat Mode When enabled the Wireless option adapts to international frequency requirements in Europe The options include e Disable default e Enable 115 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP Menu Auth Method This feature allows the user to select the authentication method used for the wireless network interface e Open default Selects open authentication e Shared Selects shared key authentication e Kerberos Selects Kerberos authentication for use when a Symbol RF card is installed e LEAP Selects LEAP authentication for use with a Cisco RF card installed WEP Key 1 Through WEP Key 4 e WEP Key Format Allows you to format the WEP keys in ASCII or hexadecimal code The default is hexadecimal WEP Key Width This is the encryption strength The options are 40 Bits and 128 Bits 40 Bits are weaker and 128 Bits are stronger NOTE If you select 40 Bits the WEP key BYTE6 through WEP Key BYTE13 menus will not display The default is 128 Bits WEP Key BYTE1 through BYTE13 These are the individual characters of the encryption key Default WEP Key This feature enables you to encrypt scramble information for security purposes With this feature you can set up to four encryption keys in either ASCII or hexadecimal format and in either 40 or 128 bits The more bits you choose the more difficult it will be to decode the information NOTE None of the WEP Key Configuration menus display on the configura
295. o 12 or the 1 6 Inch Lines menu set to 72 However if using a 11 2 3 inch paper length the 1 6 Inch Lines menu must be used set to 70 since that is exactly 11 2 3 inches If the Inches menu is used the closest values would be 11 6 or 11 7 inches which are not exact The printer will indicate which of the three length menus was used by showing that submenu first when entering the Length menu The configuration printout will also show the length menu used QUICK SETUP Menu e See Table 3 for paper size options and actual sizes Table 3 Paper Size Options and Actual Size Paper Size Actual Size US Fanfold 13 6 x 11 in Letter 8 5 x 11 in Legal 8 5x14 in Executive 7 3 x 10 5 in A3 11 7 x 16 5 in A4 8 3 x 11 2 3 in A5 5 8 x 8 3 in A6 4 1 x 5 8 in Fanfold 10x14in 10 x 14 in Tabloid 11x17in 11 x 17 in Fanfold 12x12in 12x 12 in JIS B5 7 2 x 10 1 in US Folio 8 5 x 13 in No 10 Envelope 4 1x9 5 in DL Envelope 4 3x 8 7 in C5 Envelope 6 4 x Qin C6 Envelope 4 5 x 6 4 in ISO B5 6 9 x 9 8 in Ribbon End Point This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon as being expended The life count will always be from 100 to 0 but if a darker setting is selected 0 will be reached more quickly If a lighter setting is selected the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0 Load Config The printer can store numerous co
296. o perform this function depends upon the shuttle timeout value which can be set in the menu NOTE Power Saver Mode will not be shown on the control panel even though the function still exists Sending a print job to the printer will turn off Power Saver mode Pwr Save Control Allows you to enable or disable the Power Save Energy Star mode e Enable default Allows you to enable the Power Save Energy Star mode Disable Allows you to disable the Power Save Energy Star mode Cancel Key Disable default e Enable The CANCEL key may be used to clear all data in the print buffer without printing any of the data Rcv Status Port This option defines the interface being used to receive the emulation status command e Automatic default When selected the status command is sent to the printer with the print data through the active host interface e Serial When selected the status command is sent to the printer through the serial interface regardless of the active host interface Ret Status Port This option selects the port for the Return Status Commands i e STATUS PGL and HS ZGL to send the status data back to the Host The options are Automatic factory default Serial E NET Stat Port IEEE 1284 Disable and E NET Data Port ADVANCED USER Menu Set Lock Key Normally to lock or unlock the printer menu the UP and DOWN keys are pressed at the same time The Set Lock Key parameter lets you
297. ocol Data Port Port Timer Speed Enable 9100 5001 3 Minutes Auto Select Standard Disable 1023 65535 1023 65535 2 10 Minutes 10 Half Duplex Enhanced 10 Full Duplex Fast Standard 100 Half Duplex Off 100 Full Duplex The ETHERNET PARAMS menu helps your printer communicate on a network For information on assigning the IP Address Gateway Address Subnet Mask and MAC Address refer to the Network Interface Card User s Manual NetBIOS Protocol This option determines whether the NetBIOS protocol will be available The selections are as indicated below e Enable default Makes the NetBIOS protocol available with the ethernet installed e Disable Makes the NetBIOS protocol unavailable during printer operation ASCII Data Port This option sets the port number for ASCII print jobs The data port number needs to match your host system setting e 9100 default e 1023 65535 IPDS Data Port This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs only if the IPDS option is installed The range is 1023 65535 and the default is 5001 Keep Alive Timer This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run With the Keep Alive Timer on the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has terminated e 3 Minutes default e 2 10 Minutes 110 ETHERNET PARAMS Ethernet Speed This menu option only appears if a 10 100Base T network interface card NIC is installed The Ethernet Spe
298. oded Unicode M 207 Chapter 4 208 IGP PGL Emulation IGP PGL Font Set Menu Select Font from page 197 Factory Default Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Sets Sets Sets Sets Sets 0 ASCII ASMO 449 Code Page 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek 1 German ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Latin 2 852 ELOT 928 Greek 2 Swedish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 3 Danish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek 4 Norwegian MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek 5 Finnish MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek 6 English Sakr CP714 7 bit Cyrillic Slavic 1250 Greek 851 7 Dutch Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 8 French CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 9 Spanish Arabic CP 864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 10 Italian Arabic CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO 11 Turkish Arabic Lam 1 CP 1048 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO 12 CP 437 Arabic Lam 2 Polish POL1 13 CP 850 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 14 15 Reserved Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 16 23 Dwn Overlay Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 24 31 User Def 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 Hebrew Turkish Misc UTF 8 Sets Sets Sets Hebrew Old Data Gen Turk Block set 10cpi Hebrew New DEC Turkish Italics Set Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Scanblock
299. off the printer wait 15 seconds then power it back on and rerun your print job If the message reappears press ON LINE CLEAR If the fault message still displays then contact your authorized service representative 315 Chapter 7 _ Diagnosing Problems 316 A Printer Specifications Ribbon Cartridge Specifications P N Europe ton Soh M E amp Asia China amp America America India 255048 401 4 Pack 402 4 Pack 403 4 Pack 403 4 Pack 404 4 Pack Ext Life ASCII 255049 401 4 Pack 402 4 Pack 403 4 Pack 403 4 Pack 404 4 Pack Std Life ASCII 101 Single 102 Single 103 Single 103 Single 104 Single 255050 401 4 Pack 402 4 Pack 403 4 Pack 403 4 Pack 404 4 Pack Ext Life HD HANZI 255041 N A N A 103 Single 403 4 Pack 404 4 Pack Std life HD 103 Single 104 Single HANZI Paper Specifications Type Edge perforated fan fold 3 to 17 inches 7 62 to 43 18 cm wide 2 to 12 inches 5 08 to 30 48 cm long Thickness Sheet Thickness Drive SureStak Power Stacker option works with forms 5 to 12 inches 12 7 to 30 48 cm long and up to 16 inches 41 cm wide with out the paper tent or 15 5 inches 39 5 cm wide with the paper tent installed Single part 15 to 100 pound 6 80 to 45 36 kg stock Multi part 1 to 6 part forms maximum 12 Ib 5 44 kg ply of upper pl
300. ogram software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E03A DSI HASH L Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility EO3B DSI HASH S Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job again If the message appears load the latest emulation software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility 294 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Explanation Solution E03C DSI BAT PL Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility EO3D DSI BAT PS Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load t
301. om below the print station the last form in the tractors may not print fully or may not be presented to the printer exit for retrieval All paper used in the ZT printer requires standard half inch spaced tractor feed holes Cut sheet and continuous friction fed paper is not supported The forms specified in Table 18 can have no more than one form per page horizontally Table 18 Forms Type perforated paper forms UA Width Description Length edge to edge One to three part continuous with carbon fan folded 3to12inches 7 to 16 5 inches edge perforated paper forms One to four part continuous with carbon fan folded 3to12inches 7to 12 inches edge perforated paper forms One to four part continuous carbonless 3to12inches 7to 16 5 inches fan folded edge perforated paper forms One to six part continuous carbonless fan folded edge 3to12inches 7to 12 inches Forms with a paper weight of 20 to 100 pounds and a maxi 3to 12 inches 7 to 16 5 inches mum thickness of 0 025 inches Forms with a paper weight of 18 to 100 pounds and a maxi 3to 12 inches 7 to 12 inches mum thickness of 0 025 inches Forms with all approved types of interleaf edge attachment except those using metallic or other hard devices 334 NOTE If you use forms outside these limits the print quality may not be optimum the printer may lose top of form or the frequency of paper jams will increase Set The
302. om the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 5 If LG is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial 7 f Real Time Clock RTC option is installed 8 Available for pedestal printers only 9 Based on WLAN radio installed 10 f a Feature File has been downloaded 71 Chapter 4 Main Menu P7000 ANSI Firmware OFFLINE QUICK ZTP CONFIG HOST NETWORK SETUP SETTINGS CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP page 77 page 333 page 85 page 87 page 105 HOST INTERFACE ZTP Function Load Config Auto Switching Adapter Address 1 Adapter Address 1 ZTP TearDistance Save Config Centronics Adapter Params 1 Ethernet Address ZTP Data Time Print Config Dataproducts Ethernet Address WLAN Address 1 ZTP Wait Time Delete Config IEEE 1284 Ethernet Params ZTP DataTime 8 ZTP Platen Open Power Up Config Serial WLAN Address ZTP WaitTime 9 Protect Configs E Net Adapter WLAN Params ZTP TearDist Name Configs Ethernet WLAN Kerberos 9 72 ACTIVE EMULATION PGL SFCC VGL SFCC Printer Protocol 4 Form Length Form Width Select CPI Select LPI P Series SFCC 4 Margins 5 Ribbon End Point Save Config Power Up Config Reset Cfg Names Auto Save lif installed WLAN LEAP WLAN EAP 2 If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 3 f VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 4 If LP is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 5 If ANSI is s
303. omputer Busy On Strobe e Enable default Asserts a busy signal after each character is received e Disable Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full Latch Data On Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or trailing edge of the data strobe signal The default is leading Prime Signal e Enable default The parallel port will perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal e Disable The parallel port will not perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal TOF Action e Reset default A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host This setting is used only if the prime signal parameter is enabled Do Nothing Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host Buffer Size in K Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Centronics parallel port buffer You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments The default is 16K NOTE OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K Auto Trickle Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the parallel interface was busy for too long When Auto Trickle is enabled and the printer s buffers are almost full the printer will begin to trickle data in at the rate set in the Trickle Time menu until the buffers start to empty out 93 Chapter 4 94 HOST I
304. on the next page The action taken by the printer when printing of the page completes is determined by the Move to TOF menu NOTE Page clipping at paper size width is always enabled to protect against printing on the platen 241 Chapter 4 OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu Move to TOF When the page length given does not match the printer the printer driver will have to determine how the TOF is kept relative to each page printed The following menu options are available through the front panel and the driver Disable Only when the FF key is pressed At End of Job After the Current Job At End of Page default After each Page Printed Gray Adjust This menu adjusts the darkness of the gray elements on the page by gradually reducing or increasing the amount of dots that are placed in the halftone patterns Pure white and black colors are not affected by setting The menu ranges from 10 to 10 The default value is 0 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 All Default All White Black OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu Factory Default Available when Postscript PDF is selected as the Active Emulation on OpenPrint P7000 products SURE SCAN from page 75 and page 76 Display menu only Optimize Alignment Hor Quiet Ver Erase Quiet Zone Update Barcode Zone Zone Fault PDF Yes Left 0 20 Inch 0 00 Inch Enable
305. onfig CONFIG CONTROL Save Config Save Config 1 Save Config 2 Save Config 2 Cycle through the choices The indicates this choice is active 54 Saving Your New Configuration Step Press LCD Notes NOTE We recommend that you print the configuration To print the configuration go to Step 9 To skip this procedure and resume printer operation go to Step 14 10 CONFIG CONTROL CA Save Config 11 CONFIG CONTROL Print Config UNTIL 12 Print Config aes Current 13 Print Config Press until the desired parameter displays 2 G 14 ENTER OFFLINE The selected configuration is printed CONFIG CONTROL 15 ENTER SWITCH Locks the ENTER key lt A gt LOCKED 16 ONLINE em T Ribbon Life 100 17 If you printed out the configuration store it in a safe place The printer is ready for operation 55 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Example 2 This example shows how to save a configuration as a named configuration Step Press LCD Notes 1 Make sure the printer is on 2 ON LINE CLEAR OFFLINE QUICK SETUP 06 c z a r D c z a r d c z m I 10 UNTIL 96 ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED OFFLINE QUICK SETUP OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL CONFIG CONTROL Load Config CONFIG CONTROL Name Configs Name Configs 1 Name Configs 2 2 Allo
306. or AckDataReq AckDataReq 13 Printer Select Xflag Xflag 14 Host nAutoFd Host Busy HostAck 15 Not Defined 16 Logic Grid 17 Chassis Grid 18 Printer Peripheral Logic High 19 Signal Ground nStrobe 20 Signal Ground Data 1 21 Signal Ground Data 2 22 Signal Ground Data 3 23 Signal Ground Data 4 24 Signal Ground Data 5 25 Signal Ground Data 6 273 Chapter 5 _ IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface Table 13 1284 Signals continued Type of Mode Pin Source of Data Compatible Nibble Byte 26 Signal Ground Data 7 27 Signal Ground Data 8 28 Signal Ground PError Select nAck 29 Signal Ground Busy nFault 30 Signal Ground nAutoFd nSelectln nlnit 31 Host ninit 32 Printer NFault nDataAvail aDataAvail 33 Not Defined 34 Not Defined 35 Not Defined 36 Host nSelectln 1284 Active 1284 Active NOTE The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer should not exceed 32 feet 10 meters Host Clock nWrite Driven by host Data transferred from host to printer When printer sends data two types are available If Nibble mode signal is set high If Byte mode signal is set low Data 1 through Data 8 These pins are host driven in Compatibility mode and bidirectional in Byte mode They are not used in Nibble mode Data 1 is the least significant bit Data 8 is the most significant bit Printer Clock Peripheral Clock Interrup
307. ord the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E32E CND 4 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E32F CND 5 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E32G CND 6 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted in the application program again If the message appears load the latest emulation software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility 301 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table not initialize correctly Displayed Message rala A Explanation Solution E32H CND 7 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported 1 Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was att
308. ot add a carriage return with a line feed ANSI Emulation Character Set This parameter selects a character set for the ANSI emulation Note that when 0876 OCR A or 0877 OCR B is selected as the print language the Font Attributes Typeface parameter is changed to OCR A or OCR B respectively Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual Printer Select e ON DC1 OFF DC3 default Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received e Disable Ignores the DC1 and DC3 control codes ESC c Sequence e Enable default An ESC c code received from the host resets the printer parameters to the factory defaults e Disable An ESC c code received from the host is ignored Reset Cmd CFG Ld When the printer receives a host data stream reset command ESC Q or ESC K in addition to resetting printer variables the selected configuration will be loaded e Disable default The active emulation parameters are loaded when the reset command is executed e Power Up Config The power up configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed e Current Config The currently selected configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed e Factory Config The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed Received CR e Observe default A CR code received from the host is handled as a carriage r
309. ot warrant that the functions contained in the Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free Printronix Inc reserves the right to make changes and or improvements in the Software without notice at any time 2 INNO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX INC BE LIABLE FOR LOST PROFITS LOST DATA BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS OR ANY OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT EVEN IF PRINTRONIX INC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 3 Printronix Inc will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this Agreement 4 Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused solely by our negligence for the Software Product covered by this Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this Agreement 5 California law governs this Agreement Termination of License Agreement This License shall continue until terminated
310. ottom of Line text positions Dot Row Top of Linespace 1 2 ANOaARW Bottom of 8 LPI Linespace 9 10 11 Bottom of 6 LPI Linespace12 Text Position Text Position Top of Line Bottom of Line Page Format Form Length Forms length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page You can set the form length in inches millimeters mm or as a function of the current Ipi lines per inch Form Width The form width can be specified in inches millimeters or as a function of the current cpi characters per inch The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width Margins e Left Margin Set in columns Column zero is defined as the far left edge of the page and column numbering increments from left to right e Right Margin Set in columns Column zero is defined as the far right edge of the page and column numbering increments from right to left Bottom Margin Defined in lines starting from line zero at the bottom of the page and incrementing from the bottom up Perforation Skip e Disable default Allows printing on page perforation e 1 2 inch 2 3 inch 5 6 inch 1 inch You may set up a skip over margin of 1 2 inch 2 3 inch 5 6 inch or 1 inch For example a skip over margin of 1 inch allows a 1 inch margin at the bottom of the page 162 Print Char Set When this selection is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed the current character set is printed Reset Cmd CFG Ld
311. our printer serial interface contain a random parameter settings if necessary question mark adjust them so that they match the characters settings of the attached host PLAT INV CMD No Platen Invalid Command Contact your authorized service Firmware error on representative controller board PLAT INV PARM No Platen Invalid Parameter Contact your authorized service representative 310 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User i Explanation lution Displayed Message Correct planatio Solutio PLAT INV STATE No Platen Invalid State Contact your authorized service Firmware error on representative controller board PLEASE WAIT N A Status message the No action is required RESET IN printer finished loading PROGRESS the program into flash memory and is automatically resetting itself POWER SUPPLY HOT Yes Power supply sensors Check printer environment If hot or report high temperatures dusty relocate printer Contact your authorized service representative if this occurs frequently PRINTER HOT Yes This message indicates Check printer environment If hot or internal temperatures dusty relocate printer Contact your over 60 Celsius 140 authorized service representative if Fahrenheit this occurs frequently PRINTER UNDER No Status message The No action is required REMOTE CONTROL printer is under the control of PrintNet Enterp
312. ower Up Config Reset Cfg Names Auto Save If installed 2 f PGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu 3 f VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial 5 f Real Time Clock RTC option is installed 6 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printer only 7 Based on WLAN radio installed 8 f a Feature File has been downloaded WLAN LEAP 7 WLAN EAP 7 P7000 TN Firmware ACTIVE EMULATION PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS 48 IGP EMUL CONTROL USER page 121 page 123 page 251 page 254 page 261 IGP PGL LinePrinter Ribbon End Point Ptx Setup Option Printer Tests IGP VGL IGP PGL 2 Open Platen BOF Hex Dump Mode Test Width IGP VGL Bar Code Quality Power up State Paper Out Dots Tear Bar Dist Downloaded Fonts System Memory View Function 9 PMD Fault Print Statistics Unidirectional Power Stacker Software Build Display Language Auto Elevator Feature File Accented Chars Auto Locking Shuttle Type File System Set Sharing Shuttle Timeout Slow Paper Slew Alarm Power Saver Time Pwr Save Control Cancel Key Ret Status Port Set Lock Key RBN Low Warn Q RBN Low Action RBN End Action DATE PRINTER __ MGMT page 264 page 265 Hour PNE Port Minute Mgmt Protocol Year PNE Port Number 4 Month PNE Port Timeout 4 Day Status Port Numb Mgmt Port Number If installed 2 If PGL is selected from
313. p code _ e User Defined 143 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Usr Defined HTRN This option is used to set user defined lead in characters The range is ASCII character This option allows users to define ther own lead in characters for the Printronix Specific commands Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option e Start Code 1 5F default e Start Code 2 5F Stop Code 5B Alt Set 80 9F e Printable default Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code Change Case Specifies the font as Mono or Dual case This option is available only in non SCS mode The host will be notified of the change when the printer is placed online Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of the following right to left sets Katak Hebrew Old Hebrew and Farsi SCS System Network Architecture Character String mode is controlled by the host computer e Dual Case default e Mono Case Set Text Orientn Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right e Left to Right default e Right to Left When a right to left language is selected the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online Intervention Req Select from the fo
314. percase Prefix IGP PGL Copy Descenders CPI 6 0 Disable Enable Enable Disable Enable Disable 8 0 Enable Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable 9 0 10 0 Ignore IGP100 Optimized Char Compatbl Ratio Ignore Mode Disable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable Select Char 0 0 255 Define CR Carriage Return Code This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Line Feed code into the data stream whenever a Carriage Return code occurs This is to be used only if the host computer does not send line feeds to the printer e CR CR default Does not perform a line feed The next print position will be print position 1 of the current line e CRz CR LF Performs an automatic line feed The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line 199 Chapter 4 200 IGP PGL Emulation Define LF Line Feed Code This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs This can be used in most installations but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer e LFzLF default Does not perform an automatic carriage return The next print position will be the current print position of the next line e LFz CR LF Performs an automatic carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Autowrap This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line wh
315. printer see Series1 protocol It may be configured from 0 through FF hexadecimal Poll Response This option is for the Series1 protocol After receiving a poll character the printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds before sending the response It may be configured from 0 through 30 Idle Response This option is for the Series1 protocol e Disable default e Enable The printer will send a response character every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer size 101 Chapter 4 102 HOST INTERFACE Menu One Char Enquiry The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character to detect a request from the host and sends a response back to the host This option also allows you to turn on and off this feature Table 6 One Char Enquiry Response Characters Printer State Response hex Online and Buffer Not Full 22 Online and Buffer Full 23 Offline and Buffer Not Full 20 Offline and Buffer Full 21 The Poll Character is removed from the data stream If the Data Protocol is set to ETX ACK ACK NAK or Series 1 One Char Enquiry is automatically disabled Framing Errors Possible errors that can occur when the printer s serial interface settings do not match those of the host computer Enable default If a framing error occurs a fault message will display on the control panel e Disable If a framing error occurs a fault mess
316. programmed the security key on the controller board RESTORING BOOT No Normal download No action is required CODE initialization message RIB INVLD CMD Yes Ribbon Invalid Cycle power Run the print job See User Manual Command Firmware again If the message appears error on the controller download the emulation software board again If the message appears again contact your authorized service representative RIBBON DRIVE No The controller board does Contact your authorized service motor RIBBON STALL Yes The controller board does Check the ribbon path for jams not detect ribbon Turn the Ribbon Tension Knob movement clockwise a few rotations If necessary install a new ribbon RIBBON UNDER 2 Yes Status message Install a new ribbon Change RBN Soon indicating the Integrated Print Management System is enabled and ribbon ink level is 2 RWP DOWNLOAD No Status message No action is required Please Wait indicating the software in the cartridge is being updated The user must wait for the update to complete SCS COMMAND No In the CT emulation the Contact your system administrator ERROR printer received undefined control character hex 40 SECURITY No Security code of PAL on Contact your authorized service VIOLATION controller board does not representative 312 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User i Explanation lution Displaye
317. ptimizing 59 Print Statistics DIAGNOSTICS 263 Printer component locations 21 control panel 24 dimensions 18 318 exterior cleaning 281 features 11 interior cleaning 282 maintenance 13 models 11 operating modes 23 powering on 23 site requirements 17 weight 318 PRINTER CONTROL Menu 251 Accented Char 253 Bar Code Quality 252 Display Language 252 Open Platen BOF Bottom of Form 252 Ribbon End Point 251 369 Tear Bar Dist Distance 252 Unidirectional 252 View Function 252 PRINTER HOT message 311 Printer interfaces 267 PRINTER MGMT Menu 265 Mgmt Port Number 265 Mgmt Protocol 265 PNE Port 265 PNE Port Number 265 PNE Port Timeout 265 Status Port Numb 265 Printer PI 222 Printer PI Line 206 Printer Protocol 79 159 Printer Select ANSI Emulation menu 193 Epson FX Emulation 184 Serial Matrix Emulation 176 Printer Tests DIAGNOSTICS 261 Printer Type SPC Type 156 PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL message 311 Printing rates 321 Printing Hex Dump 285 PrintNet Enterprise consumable monitoring 13 Private Mode ANSI Emulation menu 193 Proprinter XL Character Set menu 181 LG 182 PCL II 182 Proprinter XL Emulation 179 Alt Char Set 180 Auto LF 179 Character Set 180 Define CR Code 179 Define LF Code 179 FF Valid at TOF 179 20 CPI Condensed 180 Protect Configs 86 PROTECTED INSTR message 311 PRT CONFIG key 26 Prt Partial Line 128 137 370 3270 Params menu 14
318. r Action command For more information about the SGEA command refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual e Enable default The host setting for the SGEA used by the printer If the SGEA command is requested to stop on graphic errors the printer will stop when a graphic error is detected e Disable Ignores the SGEA command from the host The printer does not stop when an error is detected instead it substitutes the character selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter Graphic Chek Cod Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable character that is received from the host Choose a hex character from 40 through FE The character becomes the printer default when e The printer is powered off and then powered on e An SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default e The Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled The value can be the following e 60 default e 40 F4 Set Text Orientn Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right e Left to Right default Right to Left When a right to left language is selected the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or continues to use the current operator panel settings e Disable
319. r up configuration and the new interface parameters Any settings made and not saved before selecting these interfaces will be lost Auto Switching Submenu Factory Default 88 Auto Switching from page 87 If Installed Default for HD Parallel Serial Ethernet C T Hotport Hotport Hotport Hotport Port Type Port Type Timeout Port Type Centronics RS 232 10 sec Twinax see page 92 for options RS 422 10 60 Coax Dataproducts Disable Switch Out On Disable see page 95 for options Trickle Time Data Timeout Timeout IEEE 1284 1 4 sec Session Close 10 sec see page 90 for options 1 2 sec 10 60 Disable 1 sec Report Status E Net Adapter 2 sec Disable see page 103 for options 4 sec Enable Trickle Time 8 sec 1 4 sec 16 sec 1 2 sec Off 1 sec Timeout 2 sec 10 sec 4 sec 10 60 8 sec Report Status 16 sec Disable Off Enable Timeout 10 sec 10 60 Report Status Disable Enable Switch Out On Data Timeout Session Close Auto Switching gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams sequentially With Auto Switching the printer can service hosts attached to the serial parallel Ethernet coax and twinax ports as if they were the only interface connected For example if the host computer sends one print job to the RS 232 serial port and a separate print job to the IEEE 1284 parallel port the printer s Auto Switching is
320. rallel Bidirectional Submenu 91 Offline Process Serial submenu 102 Offpage Errors 221 ON LINE key 24 ON LINE message 309 One Char Enquiry Serial submenu 102 Online Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 271 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 269 ONLINE CU TIMED OUT message 309 ONLINE 28 CU NOT ENAB message 309 ONLINE 8344 FAILED message 309 Open Platen BOF Bottom of Form PRINTER CONTROL 252 OpenPrint P7000 STD Postscript PDF Main Menu 74 OpenPrint SURE SCAN menu 242 Alignment 243 Barcodes on Page 250 Bcodes Optimized 250 Hor Quiet Zone 247 Optimize Barcode 243 367 Update PDF 249 Ver Erase Zone 248 Operating modes 23 Operation Mode WLAN PARAMS Menu 114 Operational procedures cancel a print job 28 reload paper 29 unload paper 38 Optimize Barcode 243 Optimized Ratio 203 Optimizing print quality 58 Optimizing print speed 59 Output Darkness 41 Overstrike 166 Serial Matrix Emulation 175 Overview Main Menu 47 Overview printer models 11 P Page Format 162 ANSI Emulation menu 191 Page Length Rep 81 Page Length Rep PCL II Emulation 231 Page L Inches PCL II Emulation 232 Page L Lines PCL II Emulation 232 PAP BAD TABLE message 309 PAP BSY TOO LNG message 309 PAP FIFO OVERFL message 309 PAP FIFO UNDRFL message 310 PAP ILLGL ST message 310 PAP INCMPL ENER message 310 PAP INVLD CMD message 310 PAP INVLD PARM message 310 PAP NOT SCHED m
321. re low you can install a new ribbon before printing a large print job Output Darkness By default the system is configured to meet most user requirements However some applications require that the output remains darker than the nominal set point while some applications are less critical and could tolerate a lighter final image The system can easily adjust to this variability A setting under the Printer Control menu is available that allows the user to adjust the final output The range is as follows Normal Default Darker 1 through 6 Lighter 1 through 10 The ribbon life indicator always cycles between 100 and 0 but if a darker setting is selected zero will be reached more quickly If a lighter setting is selected the system will extend the amount of printing it takes to reach zero 41 Chapter 3 _ Integrated Print Management System Loading a Used Ribbon Cartridge You can take the ribbon cartridge off the printer and reload it at a later time The ribbon life gauge automatically updates to reflect the correct remaining capacity NOTE Since the ribbon usage information is stored on the ribbon cartridge you can reload a partially used cartridge onto a different printer Lighter Or Darker Print The ribbon life value as determined by the Integrated Print Management System is factory set so that the image quality at the end of the ribbon life is as good as it was when the ribbon was new You may adjust the rib
322. resented at the tear off point 7 Press the SET TOF button again The printer display will read Top Of Form Set Press ONLINE The printer will then be brought OFFLINE and the top of form will be set 8 Press the ON LINE CLEAR key to bring the printer online Set The Top Of Form ZTP SETTINGS Menu The ZTP SETTINGS menu includes the ability to enable and disable features unique to the Zero Tear printer ZTP set the tear bar distance set the auto present data time and set the auto present wait time This section defines these options ZTP Factory Default SETTINGS Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printers only from page 64 66 68 70 72 74 and 76 ZIP ZIP ZTP ZTP ZTP Function TearDistance Data Time Wait Time Platen Open Enable 1060 144 Inch 5 Sec 2 Sec Enable Disable 1 0 15 0 Sec 3 10 Sec Disable 1 Sec ZTP Function This option enables or disables all unique ZTP functions The default is Enable NOTE When the ZTP Function is enabled the VIEW EJECT key is disabled and Slow Paper Slew is enabled ZTP TearDistance This option sets the tear off distance from the current print position to the tear bar Adjustable values in increments of 1 144th of an inch range from 200 to 2880 The up and down arrows adjust the display value When you press the ENTER key the selected value is stored and a scale is printed to indicate the current tear off pos
323. rform steps 15 to 32 only if you are unable to load the new paper over the existing paper 15 Open both tractor doors 16 Remove the old paper from the tractors Allow the paper to fall into the paper supply area 17 Feed the new paper up through the paper slot Hold the paper to prevent it from slipping down through the paper slot Reload Paper Left Tractor Door Paper Left Tractor Lock Fa amp Ei Figure 10 Loading Paper on the Left Tractor 18 Pull the paper above and behind the ribbon mask See Figure 4 on page 21 for the ribbon mask location 19 Load the paper on the left tractor 20 Close the tractor door 33 34 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures Tractor Tractor Paper Splined Shaft ee I Tractor Lock ed GEL aa ppc erp PEPE CEE pnr ppp EPEAT eee E DET D ie ji 10 L 2b i 183442b Paper Scale Figure 11 Positioning the Left Tractor to Avoid Damage CAUTION To avoid damage to the printer caused by printing on the platen always position the left tractor unit directly to the left of the 1 mark on the paper scale 21 Normally you should not need to adjust the position of the left tractor If adjustment is necessary unlock the left tractor by placing the tractor lock in the middle position Slide the tractor until it is directly to the left of the number 1 on the paper scale
324. rial submenu 101 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface 272 Byte Mode 272 Compatibility Mode 272 Nibble Mode 272 Signals 273 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 90 Auto Trickle 91 Buffer Size in K 90 Offline Process 91 Prime Signal 90 TOF Action 90 Trickle Time 91 Ignore Char 205 Ignore Chars 221 Ignore CH 1 221 Ignore CH 2 221 Ignore Dots 216 Ignore Spaces 217 Ignore Lxx Cmd 220 Ignore DB8 Setup 221 Data Bit 8 222 Ignore Chars 221 Ignore CH 1 221 Ignore CH 2 221 IGP PGL Emulation 195 configuring with the control panel 196 IGP PGL submenu 197 Auto Uppercase 201 Autowrap 200 Barcode Options 202 Compatbl Mode 205 Compressed CPI 204 CR Edit 200 Define CR Carriage Return Code 199 Define LF Line Feed Code 200 Error Report 207 Expanded Font 205 Ext Execute Copy 202 Forms Handling 201 Host Form Length 204 Ignore Char 205 LG 199 PCL II 198 PGL SFCC 200 PI Slew Range 200 Power On IGP PGL 202 Power on S Mode 206 Print Quality 206 Printer PI Line 206 Scalable Size 205 Select Font 200 207 Select LPI 201 Skip Cmd Prefix 201 Slash 0 201 True Form Slew 206 Trunc Dyn Data 207 Var Form Adjust 204 Var Form Type 204 IGP PGL Font Set menu 208 IGP VGL Emulation 209 configuring with the control panel 210 IGP VGL Font Set Menu 224 IGP VGL submenu 210 Error Handling 220 Font Set 222 Graphics Options 216 Ignore DB8 Setup 221 LG 214 LPI 216 PCL II 21
325. ricas 714 368 2686 Europe Middle East and Africa 31 24 6489 311 Asia Pacific 65 6548 4114 China 86 800 999 6836 http www printronix com support aspx Printronix Supplies Department Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies Americas 800 733 1900 Europe Middle East and Africa 33 0 1 46 25 19 07 Asia Pacific 65 6548 4116 or 65 6548 4182 China 86 400 886 5598 India 800 102 7869 http www printronix com supplies parts aspx 337 Appendix D Corporate Offices Corporate Offices 338 Printronix Inc 15345 Barranca Parkway Irvine CA 92618 U S A Phone 714 368 2300 Fax 714 368 2600 Printronix Inc c o Printronix Nederland BV Bijsterhuizen 11 38 6546 AS Nijmegen The Netherlands Phone 31 24 6489489 Fax 31 24 6489499 Printronix Schweiz GmbH 42 Changi South Street 1 Changi South Industrial Estate Singapore 486763 Phone 65 6542 0110 Fax 65 6546 1588 Printronix Commercial Shanghai Co Ltd 22F Eton Building East No 555 Pudong Av Shanghai City 200120 P R China Phone 86 400 886 5598 Fax 86 21 5138 0564 Visit the Printronix web site at www printronix com E Communication Notices Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U S A Printronix may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in other countries Consult your Printronix represen
326. rinter This section describes the options within the QUICK SETUP menu NOTE The options in your menu will vary depending on the firmware host IO emulations selected and other features available with your printer Host Interface The Host Interface menu enables you to select and configure interfaces between the printer and your host computer Device ID This parameter defines the printer emulation as IPDS 4234 2 or 5225 After the emulation has been changed a POR status is sent to the host IPDS is the default Adapter Address IP Address A numeric address such as 123 45 61 23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets e Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device gateway that translates data between two incompatible networks which can include protocol translation e MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for each printer It is read only e DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting 77 Chapter 4 78 QUICK SETUP Menu Ethernet Address IP Address A numeric address such as 123 45 61 23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN Subnet Mask A b
327. rise PNE remote management software PROTECTED INSTR No Protected Instruction Contact your authorized service Firmware error on representative controller board PS PDF ERROR Yes Fault displayed when Clear the fault Postscript PDF will JOB ABORTED Postscript PDF failed to continue with the next job process a job e g an unsupported command or a large job which requires more DRAM to process PWR SUPP VOLT No Power Supply Voltage Replace power supply board The power supply has failed QUEUE OVERRUN No In CT twinax emulation Contact your authorized service the print buffer has representative overflowed RBN AT END POINT Yes Integrated Print Install a new ribbon Change Ribbon Management System software has determined that the ribbon is out of ink 311 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User match code of firmware on the controller board i Explanation lution Displayed Message Correct planatio Solutio REGIONx MISMATCH Yes The incorrect cartridge Install Region X ribbon cartridge in Use Correct RBN type is being used forthe the printer printer X indicates the NOTE Specify the region of the region of the printer printer when ordering ribbons REMOVE USED SPX No Status message An SPX Contact your authorized service THEN PRESS ENTER is depleted because it representative has successfully re
328. rogram at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 10 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may
329. rol Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed e Disable default Reflects distance generated by the VGL feature PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed Enable Max Print Width Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C T host interface Set for 18 2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the printer All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be truncated e 13 2 inches default e Printer Width the maximum width of the printer 147 Chapter 4 5250 Params from page 124 1 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation 5250 Params Factory Default This menu appears only if the TN5250 option is installed Char Set Translation Active Char Prt Partial PTX Graphic Select Tbl Set Line Transparent Chek Err see page 149 Secondary Set Enable Lead in Chars Enable Primary Set Disable Set 1 lt gt Disable Set 2 Set 3_ _ User Defined Usr Defined HTRN Start Code 1 Start Code 2 Stop Code Alt Set 80 9F Printable Control Code Graphic Set Text Host Format Max Print Chek Cod Orientn Override Control Width 60 Left to Right Disable Disable 13 2 inches 40 FE
330. rom the host computer with their corresponding two digit hexadecimal codes Hex dumps are used to troubleshoot printer data reception problems Printable characters print as the assigned symbol nonprintable characters are indicated by a period Figure 26 shows an example of a hex dump P aSAn 0 t 20 21 22 0123456789 lt gt 7 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E JFF ABCDEFGHIJKLMNG 40 41 42 PGRSTUVWXYZLNI1 SO Si 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 SA SB SC SD SE SF abcdefghijklmno 66 61 62 63 64 635 66 67 68 69 SA 65 6C 6D AE OF pqrstuvuxyziix 70 71 728 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 20 I s 4 amp 0 9 0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 123456789 4 270 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 ABCDEFGH 4 4 amp 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 OD OA 21 22 23 24 25 26 0123456 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 789 4 2 70ABCDEF 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 GHIJALMNOPGRSTUV 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 WXYZLN1 abcdef 57 58 59 SA SB 5C SD SE SF 460 61 62 63 64 65 66 ghijklmnopqrstuv 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 wxyuztik 1 4 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 20 281 22 23 24 25 26 27 01234567 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 89 lt gt 7 ABCDEFG 38 39 34 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 HI 4 amp Z amp 48 49 OD OA 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 24 2B 8C 23D 0123456789 49 2E BF 30 31 32 33 34 3
331. rom the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 5 If LG is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 8 Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial 7 If Real Time Clock RTC option is installed 8 Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printer only 9 Based on WLAN radio installed 10 f a Feature File has been downloaded P7000 LG Firmware ACTIVE EMULATION PRINTER ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS lt t EMULATION CONTROL USER page 121 page 123 page 251 page 254 page 261 LG LinePrinter Ribbon End Point Hex Dump Mode Printer Tests IGP PGL amp LP IGP PGL Open Platen BOF Power up State Test Width IGP VGL amp LP IGP VGL 3 Bar Code Quality PMD Fault Paper Out Dots or LG5 Tear Bar Dist Power Stacker System Memory View Function Auto Elevator Print Statistics LG Unidirectional Auto Locking Software Build LinePrinter Display Language File System Feature File 9 if IGP is not installed Shuttle Timeout Shuttle Type Slow Paper Slew Alarm Power Saver Time Pwr Save Control Cancel Key Ret Status Port Set Lock Key RBN Low Warn RBN Low Action RBN End Action DATE PRINTER MGMT page 264 page 265 Hour PNE Port Minute Mgmt Protocol Year PNE Port Number 9 Month PNE Port Timeout Day Status Port Numb Mgmt Port Number lif installed 2 If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 3 f VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 4 If LP is selected fr
332. ronix has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation IBM AS 400 and Proprinter are registered trademarks and Intelligent Printer Data Stream and IPDS are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation IEEE is a registered service mark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc Printronix PGL LinePrinter Plus and IGP are registered trademarks and P7005 P7010 P7015 P7205 P7210 P7215 P7220 and SureStak are trademarks of Printronix Inc QMS is a registered trademark and Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro Systems Inc TUV is a registered certification mark of TUV Rheinland of North America Inc UL is a registered certification mark of Underwriters Laboratories Inc 1 Table of Contents laniger Uleies EE E E S 11 Printer OVerviewW acero rte noventa ci eee esuada ee tcs 11 Printronix P7000 Cartridge Ribbon Printers CRP Series 11 Consumable Monitoring With PrintNet Enterprise 13 Graphics Enhancements ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeseneeeeeeeeees 13 Taking Care Of Your Printer sss 13 Conventions In This Manual ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeseeeeseaeeeteeeeees 13 Warnings And Special Information
333. s The width of the font varies with the cpi e High Speed 100 A draft quality font printing at 100 dpi horizontally and 48 dpi vertically When chosen from the front panel it defaults to 10 cpi The cpi can then be varied but the width will not change e NLQ 200 This NLQ font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 96 vertically When chosen from the front panel it defaults to 12 cpi The cpi can then be varied but the width will not change e DP 200 This Data Processing font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 72 vertically When chosen from the front panel it defaults to 12 cpi The cpi can then be varied but the width will not change e High Speed 64 This font prints at 120 dpi horizontally and 64 vertically When chosen from the front panel it defaults to 10 cpi The cpi can then be varied but the width will not change e BARCODE 145 This Data Processing font prints at 145 dpi horizontally and 72 vertically When chosen from the front panel it defaults to 12 cpi The cpi can then be varied but the width will not change BARCODE 160 This Data Processing font prints at 160 dpi horizontally and 72 vertically When chosen from the front panel it defaults to 13 cpi The cpi can then be varied but the width will not change 160 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II Prop Spacing Proportional Spacing Each printed character is contained inside a character cell The width of the character cell includes the character
334. s 13 2 inches Buffer Print e Disable default The printer will print normally e Enable The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values Refer to page 285 for information on how to obtain a hex code printout NOTE Use of this parameter may alter print attributes set by the host computer A power cycle may be required after changing Buffer Print from enable to disable 134 CTHI from page 124 Twinax Params Twinax Params Factory Default Standard Twinax Params Char Set Active Char Prt Partial Device ID Device 5225 World Select Set Line Address Trade see page 136 Secondary Set Enable IPDS Address 1 Standard Char Primary Set Disable 5225 Address 0 6 Extended Char 4234 2 Cancel PTX Graphic Chek Graphic Chek LAC Option LAC IGP DCU Transparent Err Cod Approx Enable Lead in Chars Enable 60 Enable On Disable Set 1 96 Disable 40 FE hex Disable Off Set 2 Set 3_ _ User Defined Usr Defined HTRN Start Code 1 5F 40 FF Start Code 2 5F 40 FF Stop Code 5B 40 FF Alt Set 80 9F Printable Control Code Set Text Host Format Max Print Buffer Orientn Override Control Width Print Control By Host Disable Disable 13 2 inches Dis
335. s Emulation Factory Default Control Code Control Code Define CR Auto LF Overstrike Define LF P Series 06 08 Code Code SFCC 8 0 LPI Elongated CR CR Disable Enable LF CR LF 1 10 3 LPI Backspace CR CR LF_ Enable Disable LF LF 0 7F hex 6 0 LPI VFU Select Alt Set Character SFCC d PSeries Dbl FF valid 80 9F Set Command High at TOF EVFU Control Code see page 168 Even dot plot Normal Enable DVFU Printable Double high P3 4 6 9 Compat Disable CVFU Disable P Series Emulation with PCL Il Printer Factory Default Protocol 164 from page 164 P Series Control Code Control Code Define CR Auto LF Overstrike Define LF 06 08 Code Code 8 0 LPI Elongated CR CR Disable Enable LF CR LF 10 3 LPI Backspace CR CR LF Enable Disable LF LF 6 0 LPI P Series EVFU Select Alt Set Character SFCC 80 9F Set 1 Enable Control Code see page 170 0 7F hex Disable Printable P Series Emulation With LG P Series Emulation With LG Printer Protocol from page 165 P Series Factory Default Control Co
336. s The incorrect cartridge Install the correct ribbon cartridge Use Correct RBN type is being used forthe type in the printer printer UNDEF INTERRUPT No Undefined Interrupt Contact your authorized service Firmware error on representative controller board UNDFNED OPCODE No Undefined Opcode Contact your authorized service Firmware error on representative controller board UNKNOWN RBN1 Yes The sensor detects a bar Install a new ribbon Install New RBN code but the ribbon model is not permitted on this printer UP DRV SHORT No Upper Driver Short Cycle power to see if the message Hammer driver circuits on clears if not contact your the boards shorted to authorized service representative ground WAITING FOR N A Status message Appears No action is required ETHERNET ADAPTER when the printer is first powered on if the optional Network Interface Card is installed WELD NOT DETECT No The cartridge weld was Contact your authorized service See User Manual not detected representative WELD RESET ERROR No The cartridge weld Contact your authorized service See User Manual circuitry lost power representative WELD SNSR MISSING Yes The incorrect cartridge 1 Make sure that the correct See User Manual type is being used for the printer ribbon cartridge type is installed in the printer 2 Contact your authorized service representative Before contacting an authorized service representative power
337. s proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon motion at low speed e Shuttle Fast Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon motion at fast speed e Shuttle Only Exercises only the shuttle at fast speed e Phase Printer Checks for wavy print The initial phase value is set in the factory Run the test and check the quality The phase value prints on the left margin If the print looks too wavy change the Phase Value parameter while the test is running While the phase printer test runs press the DOWN key To change the value press the PREV or NEXT key until the desired value displays and then press ENTER e Paperout Adj Verifies the current Paper Out Dots setting which determines where the last line of text will print when there is a paper out condition Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen e Burnin Test Reserved for factory use e Print Error Log Prints the current log of errors Most non routine faults ribbon stall voltage faults are stored in the error log e Clear Error Log Clears entries in the error log Adapter Test Prints the Ethernet adapter statistics stored on the Ethernet adapter if present Ethernet Test Prints the Ethernet statistics stored on the Ethernet if present e Acoustics A particular test pattern that is used to measure acoustics Demo Demonstration of various print attributes e Dice 5 Pattern used to measure print density
338. s required 2 If the message reappears press the CANCEL key If the message disappears it was a false indication and no further attention is required If the message reappears call your authorized service representative Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Explanation lution Displayed Message Correct planatio Solutio 06 HOST REQUEST Yes Host attention message The host computer or printer controller requires attention 08 HOLD PRINT Yes Printer was offline more Press ON LINE to put printer in TIMEOUT than 10 minutes and the online state Intervention Required parameter is set to Send to Host 8 5V PWR FAIL No 8 5 Volt power failed Contact your authorized service Internal power failure representative 15 COMM CHECK Yes A message that appears Check cable connection in the CT emulation meaning the line is not active on a twinax interface 15V CTL FAIL No Controller voltage failure Contact your authorized service representative 22 INVALID ADDR Yes Unit address not Ensure that printer address recognized by printer matches host setting Twinax interface 23 5V CTL FAIL No 23 5 Volt Controller Contact your authorized service failed a voltage failure on representative the controller board 31 PAPER OUT Yes A timeout message is Load paper and run a print test If TIMEOUT sent to the host if paperis the message reappears contact not loaded 10
339. sable All Load Config The printer can store numerous configurations in memory This parameter allows you to select and load a specific configuration Save Config This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print job requirements This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings for each new job The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost if you turn off the printer If the Protect Configs parameter is enabled the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted first The factory default configuration cannot be changed See Saving Your New Configuration on page 53 for details Print Config This option is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations Store printouts of your configurations in a safe place for quick referral 85 Chapter 4 _ CONFIG CONTROL Menu Delete Config You can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations The factory default configuration cannot be deleted Power Up Config You can specify which of the nine configurations Factory or 1 8 will be the power up configuration Protect Configs You can specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an existing configuration when you activate the Save Configs parameter When disabled default the new configuration will overwrite the existing configuration When enabled the new configuration will not ov
340. sitioned fixed information entered when the form is created be overlayed onto the form positioned in a specific location after the form is created or can be dynamically merged with the form Selectable Barcodes provide you with the appropriate barcode for your application using standard wide to narrow ratios A wide selection of barcodes is available Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 UPC A UPC E MSI A through D Code 128 Subset A B and C EAN UCC 128 EAN 8 EAN 13 POSTNET PostBar Royal Mail and PDF417 UPC and EAN barcodes can specify add on data Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where needed Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size up to 11 3 inches wide and tall Compressed print sizes of 10 12 13 15 17 and 20 characters per inch cpi are available Logos are created using alphanumeric commands and add many print and shading features for a customized appearance to forms reports and labels Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design Normal expanded and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise or they can be printed upside down Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white characters on a dark background Automatic Increment Decrement Capability allows batch form processing Individual alphabetic numeric and
341. ssage and send it to your next higher support facility E32A CND 0 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E32B CND 1 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job again If the message appears load the latest emulation software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility 300 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message uL Explanation Solution E32C CND 2 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E32D CND 3 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears rec
342. ssing the boot procedure ETHERNET N A Status message No action is required DETECTED indicating that the Network Interface Card has established connection ETHERNET No Status message the No action is required INITIALIZING internal Network Interface Card is processing the boot procedure May occur with older versions of microcode EXCESS RBN WEAR Yes Status message that Install a new ribbon Install New RBN displays when ribbon reaches end of life whether the Integrated Print Management System is enabled or not EXHAUST FAN FLT Yes Sensors cannot detect Power off the printer and remove Cabinet model only current in fan circuit the paper path see Maintenance Manual Check that the fan cable connector is connected Check for obstruction of vents and fan airway and remove any obstructions Check for items beneath the printer blocking cabinet vents Power back on the printer If this message appears again contact your authorized service representative FIRMWARE ERROR No Application software tried Contact your authorized service to perform an illegal representative printer function or damaged memory detected on the controller board FM HEADER ERROR No Frame Header Error Contact your system administrator Application software has violated header parameters 305 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User See User Manual
343. ssseee 199 IGP VGL Emulation tret k enne denen FE iA 209 wc mE LEE 209 Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel 210 IGP VGL Submenu ssssssseeeseeeeneenee enne nnne 210 IGP VGL Submenu with PCL II eeeeeeneee 212 IGP VGL Submenu with LG sessee 214 IPDS Emiulatior 3 7 dcc er n terere he Pre ee eet art Eee ee eee 225 PEL Emulation 5 rto tern et no tert Eta reper rere cid dn 229 LG EMULATION EE 233 OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT PDF Emulation eseeeese 238 Postscript PDF Interpreter sssseseeeeennn 238 OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu ssssseeeeeenenenneennenn nnne 242 PRINTER CONTROL Menu seseeeeenneeenneeen eene nnns 251 ADVANCED USER Menu sessseseeeeeeeneeee nnne nnne nenne nnns 254 DIAGNOSTICS Menu ccccccccccccecccecceseeeeeccecseseeaeueceseesuueeeeseueueuaaeuees 261 Table of Contents DATE Mernu a oie Rie dmi dus 264 PRINTER MGMT Menu eeeneenneeeenneeenenennen nnne nnns nennen 265 ERI T 267 OVGIVIOW xc sade cu ein ette m CO teet Poe ee ides eui fee ode ttt dens 267 Dataproducts Parallel Interface seeeeeee 268 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals ssssssss 269 Centronics Parallel Interface sssseseeeee 270 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals
344. sssssseeeeneee 14 Related Documents eeseesssesseseseeeeeeee nennen nnne nnne 14 Contact Information essent enne 15 Printronix Customer Support Center s sss 15 Printronix Supplies Department 15 Corporate Offices esce cire pner itvse nee ene iz rs 16 Setting Up The Printer eeeesssssss 17 Betore You Begi errare iiaa epe rae E eu evt dte dita 17 Power Requirements cccccessecceeeesecceeeeeseneceeeeseaeeeeeeesaeeeensesaaaeenenees 17 Select A Site eerie eee ed c eue eren ee aa 17 Printer Dimensions essssssseseeeeenneeneeen meer nnn 18 Printer Component Locations ssssseeeeeenneenenennee 21 Operating The Printer sssessss 23 Powering On The Printer 23 Operating MOd S ara esor treten eder tete eot redeo ceo ead 23 The Control Pan l 3 n t deer e RE REN GRERER 24 Control Panel Keys sssssssssssseseseeeeeeenee ennemis 24 Cancel A Print Job ssesssssssseseseeeeeeeeenereen nene 28 Operational Procedures sssssssssssssseeeeeeenenenn nennen 29 Reload Paper eaen ee e tutem n gr b etc bees 29 Unload Papeterie ce eee 38 Integrated Print Management System cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeneees 41 Qutput Darkn ss etr e e eo eet ete eredi 41 Loading a Used Ribbon Cartridge ssss
345. ssword 01 15 The first 15 characters of the EAP password maximum number of characters is 32 EAP Password 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the EAP password maximum number of characters is 32 EAP Password 31 32 Characters 31 to 32 of the EAP password maximum number of characters is 32 Reset EAP Password Resets the EAP password to an empty string ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS Menus ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS Menus IMPORTANT The emulation types present in the printer are based on the firmware installed and the emulation options included Both are configured from the Factory and does not require any action from the user Be sure to know which type of firmware and options are purchased see Table 2 to understand the ACTIVE IGP EMUL ACTIVE EMULATION and EMULATION main menus This ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATION function allows you to activate the desired emulation There are two methods for selecting the desired emulation The first is by selecting the emulation directly from the printer menu The second is by sending a host command which will switch the emulation automatically see the appropriate Programmer s Reference Manual for details When changing from one emulation to the other the printer will load the power up configuration and the new emulation parameters Any configuration settings performed before selecting these emulations that are not saved in NVRAM will be lost Table 7
346. st frequently changed or inputted parameters during the installation of the printer ZTP SETTINGS These options allow you to set parameters for zero tear pedestal printers CONFIG CONTROL These options allow you to save print load delete name and reset entire sets of configuration parameters HOST INTERFACE These options allow you to select either the Serial RS 232 Serial RS 422 Centronics parallel Dataproducts parallel and Long Lines Ethernet IEEE 1284 parallel Auto Switching Coax or Twinax interface for the printer This menu also allows you to configure several parameters for each interface NETWORK SETUP This option allows you to select from Ethernet Address options and Ethernet Parameters options ACTIVE IGP EMUL This menu allows you to select the PGL or VGL emulation from the menu if IGP is installed ACTIVE EMULATION This menu allows you to activate the desired emulation or combination of emulations to be used with your printer EMULATION This menu allows you to configure the options which are available for the current operating active emulation For example if LinePrinter is the active emulation then the LinePrinter emulation options can be configured using this menu SURE SCAN This menu is available only for OpenPrint firmware it allows the user to configure barcode optimization that will replace graphical barcodes with PSA barcodes optimized for the P7000 technology
347. t Distance PRINTER CONTROL 252 Terminating resistor configurations 275 Terminating resistors location of 276 Test Width DIAGNOSTICS 262 Ticket Lifetime WLAN KERBEROS Menu 118 Timeout Auto Switching submenu 89 TIP MISMATCH message 315 TOF Action Centronics Parallel submenu 93 Dataproducts submenu 96 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 90 Translate Table 133 Translation Tbl 128 153 SPC Twx Params 156 3270 Params menu 143 5250 Params menu 150 Transmit Data TD RS 232 277 Transmit Power WLAN PARAMS Menu 115 Trickle Time Centronics Parallel submenu 94 Dataproducts submenu 97 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 91 Trickle Time Auto Switching submenu 89 True Form Slew 206 True Vert 1 10 216 374 Trunc Dyn Data 207 Truncate Alpha 216 Truncate PI Slew ANSI Emulation menu 194 Twinax Params menu 135 Active Char Set 137 Buffer Print 140 Cancel IGP DCU 137 Char Set Select 137 Device Address 137 Device ID 137 Format Control 140 Graphic Chek Cod 139 Graphic Chek Err 138 Host Override 139 LAC Approx 139 LAC Option 139 Max Print Width 140 Prt Partial Line 137 PTX Transparent 138 Set Text Orientn 139 5225 World Trade 137 U UNDEF INTERRUPT message 315 UNDFNED OPCODE message 315 Unidirectional PRINTER CONTROL 252 UNKNOWN RBN 1 message 315 Unload paper 38 Unsolicited Rpt LG Emulation 237 UP DRV SHORT message 315 UP or DOWN key 26 UP DOW
348. t DCD Status signal to the printer The ON condition is required for the printer to receive data Data Terminal Ready DTR Control signal from the printer Subject to configuration Chapter 5 278 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interfaces RS 422 Table 16 PSA3 RS 422 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Receive Data 1 Transmit Data 3 Chassis Signal 5 RD TD Ground Receive Data 6 Transmit Data 8 RD TD RD RD Serial data stream differentially received by printer TD TD Differentially driven serial data stream for transmitting status and control information to the host Subject to protocol selection NOTE RD and TD form signal and return paths of a differential line signal 6 Reprogramming the Security Key Reprogramming The Security Key The security key on the PSAS controller board can be reprogrammed with a Software Program Exchange SPX module The SPX is an intelligent module that plugs into the debug port on the back of printers equipped with the PSA3 Hurricane controller board The SPX is used only once it automatically overwrites itself after successfully reprogramming a security key This allows the end user or a service technician to enable features such as new emulations without having to remove covers and install a new security key on the controller board
349. t if the host asserts the prime signal Enable The parallel port will perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the prime signal TOF Action Reset default A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host This setting is used only if the prime signal parameter is enabled e Do Nothing Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host Buffer Size in K Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Dataproducts parallel port buffer You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments The default is 16K NOTE OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K Auto Trickle Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the parallel interface was busy for too long When Auto Trickle is enabled and the printer s buffers are almost full the printer will begin to trickle data in at the rate set in the Trickle Time menu until the buffers start to empty out Serial from page 87 Serial Submenu Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed In order to support this feature the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use For example if the printer is printi
350. t Garde book book oblique demi demi oblique e Helvetica plain oblique bold bld oblique narrow narrow oblique narrow bold narrow bold oblique e Palatino roman italic bold bold italic e New Century Schoolbook roman italic bold bold italic e Times roman italic bold bold italic e Symbol e Zapf Chancery medium italic e Zapf Dingbats The Ghostscript version used in the P7000 is 8 71 Resolution This parameter defines the default print resolution This selection is used when either the print resolution is not defined by the data stream or if the print resolution defined by the data stream is not supported The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P7000 STD products e 120x144 DPI default e 90x96 DPI The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P7000 HD products e 180x180 DPI default e 180x90 DPI e 90x180 DPI e 120x120 DPI e 90x90 DPI 239 Chapter 4 OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT PDF Emulation Paper Size This parameter allows selection of available paper sizes This parameter should be set according to the dimensions of the physical paper installed in the printer This parameter will be used to determine the TOF and is expected to change when new media is installed Available options include e Custom Sets a user defined paper size e Width Defines the paper width The range is 1 to 15 in 0 1 inch increments The default is 13 6 inches e Length Defines the paper lengt
351. t LPI and CPI values The UOM used is determined by this configuration setting Truncate PI Slew e Truncate at TOF default The slew is terminated when the next Top of Form is reached This function applies to the ANSI EVFU only e Disable PI slews will be completed independent of their length ETX ACK End of Text Acknowledge The host controls the flow of communcation to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an End of Text ETX signal When the printer receives the ETX signal it acknowledges the ETX thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data e Disable default Immediate Afterprint Features IGP PGL Emulation The PGL emulation is the software based Intelligent Graphics Processor IGP for the line matrix family of printers It is based upon and is compatible with the IGP 100 200 400 board using the PGL The IGP graphics processing features are detailed below Features On Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with a preprinted look for each application IGP programs control all graphic functions dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time Graphic capabilities include boxes vertical and horizontal lines with user selectable thickness logos and special alphanumeric print features Forms and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically Alphanumeric data can appear as prepo
352. t Menu with PCL II Character Set from page 183 Epson Set ASCII USA French German English Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin Am French Canadian Latin Am II OCR A OCR B Latin 8859 2 Latin 2 852 Cyrillic 866 Bulgarian Latin 9 8859 15 Polish POL1 Multinational ASCII USA EBCDIC DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859 7 PC851 LtGk 12G Greek 7 12N Greek 8 8G Hebrew Old Hebrew New Hebrew DEC IBM PC Factory Default Epson FX Emulation Epson FX Character Set Menu with LG Character Set from page 183 Epson Set ASCII USA French German English Danish I Swedish Italian Spanish I Japanese Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin Am I French Canadian Latin Am II OCR A OCR B Code Page 210 Code Page 220 Code Page 852 Code Page 855 Code Page 857 Code Page 862 Code Page 866 Lithuanian 1 Lithuanian 2 Hebrew Old Hebrew New Hebrew Dec Latin 9 8859 15 CP 858 Euro IBM PC Factory Default 187 Chapter 4 ANSI Emulation ANSI Emulation EMULATION from page 123 Factory Default
353. t Translation Column 132 Usr Defined Size Req Tbl Wrap HTRN 1920 Send to Host Disable Disable Start Code 1 960 Do Not Send Enable Enable Start Code 2 2560 Stop Code 3440 3564 PA1 PA2 Buffer SPC SPC NL At Reprint Null Supp Space Supp MPP 1 Enable Disable On Disable Enable Off SPC Coax Params Logical Buf Size Refers to the size of the printer buffer which should be set the same as the host screen buffer size If the host screen size is unknown use 1920 Do not change this parameter in the middle of a print job Intervention Req e Send to Host default The printer sends a signal to the host computer when the CANCEL key is pressed or a printer fault or hold mode time out OCCUIS e Do Not Send No signal will be sent to the host computer Buffer Print e Disable default The printer will print normally e Enable The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values Refer to page 285 for information on how to obtain a hex code printout Translation Tbl Prints a table of the Coax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the Coax interface is selected see HOXT INTEPDAXE Mevv ov naye 87 Column 132 Wrap When enabled this option causes the printer to line wrap at 132 characters despite the current print density allowing more characters per line The options include e Disable default e Enable Usr Defined HTRN This option
354. t is received from the host Choose a hex character from 40 through FE The character becomes the printer default when e the printer is powered off and then powered on e an SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default e the Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled LAC Option Allows the host system to load alternate character images into the printer This may be used for designing graphics barcodes and charts or for printing in foreign languages e Enable default Prints the LAC character as defined e Disable Ignores the LAC definition from the host and prints from the currently selected character set LAC Approx A process that reorganizes columns of dots so that clean readable printing is possible e On default Converts the emulated character cells to standard cells for the P7224 model e Off Converts character cells byte by byte and not by LAC approximation Set Text Orientn Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page This allows the printer to print languages that are printed right to left instead of left to right The options include e Control By Host default e Left to Right Right to Left Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or continues to use the current operator panel settings e Disable default Allows the following host commands to override operator panel settings line length forms length lines per
355. ta 67XX 12 5 Checksum This parameter defines the printer checksum calculation method for Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes e Standard 1 3 default The odd numbers will be multiplied by 3 and the even numbers by 1 for calculation of the checksum e Special 4 9 The odd numbers will be multiplied by 4 and the even numbers by 9 for calculation of the checksum NOTE Odd refers to the 1st 3rd 5th character in the barcode while even refers to the 2nd 4th 6th character in the barcode Default Code Pag Choose which code page to use with the IPDS emulation This option is independent of the Character Set selection in the CTHI emulation 227 Chapter 4 IPDS Emulation Code Page Subset When the Thai code page is selected as the default either from the front panel or by a host command you may choose from three different versions Default Font Choose a font quality and size from the available selections All fonts in the Default Font menu are available in standard and compressed vertical resolution see page 225 VPA Check e Enable default The printer checks for dots that fall outside the intersection of the logical and physical pages If dots fall outside the area the printer reports an error to the host if the IPDS Exception Handling Control command setting requires error reporting Disable The printer does not report dots outside the valid printable area Hexdump Mode A hex code printout or
356. ta by using the default table of the current character set e Downloaded Translates data from EBCDIC to internal code by using the downloaded translate table Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or continues to use the current operator panel settings e Disable default Allows the following host commands to override operator panel settings line length forms length lines per inch LPI characters per inch CPI print quality and text orientation Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option e Enable The operator panel settings override the host commands Format Control Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed e Disable default Reflects distance generated by the IGP VGL feature IGP PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed e Enable Does not reflect distance generated by the IGP VGL feature IGP PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed 133 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation Max Print Width Set the maximum print width at either 13 2 inches or the maximum width of the printer The default i
357. tative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Any reference to an Printronix product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Printronix product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any Printronix intellectual property rights may be used instead However it is the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non Printronix product program or service Printronix may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquires in writing to Printronix Inc 15345 Barranca Parkway Irvine CA 92618 U S A The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law PRINTRONIX PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the informatio
358. tatus is sent to the host Pressing ENTER again cancels the Buffer Reprint function and displays Buffer Reprint Disabled Early Print Cmpl Allows the printer to send print order complete status to the host before the printer is actually done printing all data This option is valid only when the printer is in DSC DSE mode e Disable default The printer will suppress the Early Print Complete response until all printing is complete e Enable The printer will send an acknowledgment to the host when it is able to accept more data NOTE When Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs you may lose data SCS Buffer Cntrl This option is used in Coax LU1 SCS mode only Don t Wait default The printer does not wait for the job to be printed before sending the print completion to the host e Wait Until Done The printer waits for the job to print before sending the print completion to the host This option speeds up the LU1 job printing for short jobs If you select Don t Wait there is a risk that you may not be able to recover the print job when the printer has fault Cancel IGP DCU e Enable default Cancels all buffers when a job is put on hold from the host or when the CANCEL key is pressed Disable Does not cancel any internal buffer in the printer when a job is put on hold from the host or when the CANCEL key is pressed 129 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation PTX Transparent Lead i
359. ted is always displayed on the control panel See Figure 5 on page 24 When the ribbon life reaches 2 a warning message RIBBON UNDER 2 Change RBN soon appears on the control panel display The control panel status indicator lamp flashes The printer will continue printing in this condition until the ribbon life reaches 096 at which time printing will stop The ribbon may be changed at any time while the printer is in the RBN END POINT Change Ribbon condition without losing data in the printer s buffer If a new ribbon is loaded the system automatically detects the change clears the condition when the platen is closed and restarts the life at 10096 If a partially used ribbon is loaded the system continues the life at the percentage indicated for the used ribbon You may also resume printing for approximately two more minutes without changing the ribbon by pressing the ON LINE CLEAR key twice This may be done as many times as needed to complete the job in progress Ribbon usage information is calculated by maintaining a count of impressions dots that is stored on the ribbon cartridge and updated periodically so that the cartridge can be used on a different printer with the information intact This allows the system administrator to have precise control over print quality and consumable costs The accurate presentation of available ribbon life allows for efficient planning of print jobs For example if the displayed ribbon life we
360. ter IGP VGL amp LP IGP VGL LinePrinter NOTE 3 The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed 61 Chapter 4 Active Emulations Table 2 Available Firmware Types and Options Firmware Type salons AGE IGE ACTIVE EMULATION 1 2 Available EMUL EMULATION LG LG IGP PGL amp LP IGP PGL P7000 LG PGL VGL N A LinePrinter IGP VGL amp LP IGP VGL LinePrinter4 44 48XX ANSI 44 48XX ANSI IGP PGL amp LP IGP PGL P7000 ANSI PGL VGL N A LinePrinter IGP VGL amp LP IGP VGL LinePrinter4 Postscript PDF Postscript PDF IGP PGL amp LP IGP PGL OpenPrint P7000 STD PGL VGL N A LinePrinter IGP VGL amp LP IGP VGL LinePrinter4 OpenPrint P7000 HD N A NA N A Postscript PDF NOTE Default Selection The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL VGL option is installed The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options IGP PGL amp LP and IGP VGL amp LP when the PGL VGL option is installed Otherwise LinePrinter replaces the options The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed 62 Main Menu Brief descriptions follow for the first level configuration menu options QUICK SETUP These options allow quick access to the mo
361. ter 1 Lighter 2 Lighter 3 Lighter 4 Lighter 5 Lighter 6 Lighter 7 Lighter 8 Lighter 9 Lighter 10 Display Accented Language Char English Standard German Tall French Italian Spanish Portuguese Ribbon End Point This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon as being expended The life count will always be from 100 to 0 but if a darker setting is selected 0 will be reached more quickly If a lighter setting is selected the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0 The range of values are as follows e Normal default e Darker 1 through Darker 6 Lighter 1 through Lighter 10 NOTE This value can be adjusted at any time and the display will automatically adjust to show the correct percentage relative to the new end point 251 Chapter 4 PRINTER CONTROL Menu Open Platen BOF Bottom of Form Some special forms have perforation areas that are too thick to pass through the print station This parameter when enabled opens and closes the platen when the perforations move across the platen When enabling this parameter you must set the forms length to match the physical distance between perforations Bar Code Quality Determines the bar code resolution for all emulations except IPDS See IPDS Emulation on page 225 to set the bar code quality for IPDS e Dark default Bar code resolution is set at 120 x 72 e Draft
362. ter Dimensions 2 Chapter Pedestal Model Figure 3 Printer Dimensions 20 Printer Component Locations Printer Component Locations Ribbon Ribbon Cartridge Tab 2 Ribbon Tractor 2 Tension Knob Blue Tractor Lock 2 Splined Shaft Hammer Bank Cover and Paper Ribbon Mask Support 2 Tab Slot 2 1 8 8l Vertical Position Knob Platen Lever Platen Stop Ribbon Cartridge Interface Air Shroud Assembly Figure 4 Printer Component Locations 21 Chapter 2 Printer Component Locations 22 3 Operating The Printer Powering On The Printer When you power on the printer it executes a self test The default power up state is online When the self test completes and the software has initialized successfully the status indicator light turns on indicating the printer is online The default value of the type of emulation you have installed appears in the upper right corner of the display The ribbon life remaining is shown on the second line If there is a fault during the self test the status indicator flashes and a specific fault message appears on the display such as LOAD PAPER The alarm also sounds if it is configured to do so See LCD Message Troubleshooting Table on page 287 for information on fault messages and solutions Operating Modes Online In online mode the printer can receive and print data sent from the host Pressing the
363. tes this choice is active Spanish 15 ENTER SWITCH Locks the ENTER key I gt LOCKED 16 ON LINE CLEAR ENTER Save Press ENTER to automatically save ONLINE No Save configuration changes Press ONLINE to l continue without saving 17A ENTER Cfg 1 Configuration changes have been saved as Power Up Cfg Configuration 1 and will be set as the 4 Power Up config The printer will then be brought online 17B ON LINE CLEAR ONLINE Places the printer online without f Ribbon Life 100 permanently saving the configuration l changes 18 The printer is ready for operation 52 Auto Save Configuration Auto Save Configuration After any changes are made to the Factory Default configuration menu items you will be prompted to save the changes to Config when you place the printer online represents the next available unassigned configuration number When prompted press one of the following e Enter Saves to Config 1 or the next available Config and becomes the power up config e Online Changes will be implemented but saved only temporarily until deliberately saved as a new configuration or until you power off the printer All changes will be lost when you power off the printer Saving Your New Configuration The Save Config option allows you to save up to eight custom configurations to meet different print job requirements Once you have changed all of the necessary parameters you may save them as
364. the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu 3 f VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial 5 If Real Time Clock RTC option is installed Available for pedestal printers only 7 Based on WLAN radio installed 8 If a Feature File has been downloaded 67 Chapter 4 Main Menu P7000 PCL II Firmware OFFLINE QUICK ZTP CONFIG HOST NETWORK SETUP SETTINGS CONTROL INTERFACE SETUP page 77 page 333 page 85 page 87 page 105 HOST INTERFACE ZTP Function Load Config Auto Switching Adapter Address 1 Adapter Address 1 ZTP TearDistance Save Config Centronics Adapter Params 1 Ethernet Address ZTP Data Time Print Config Dataproducts Ethernet Address WLAN Address 1 ZTP Wait Time Delete Config IEEE 1284 Ethernet Params ZTP DataTime 8 ZTP Platen Open Power Up Config Serial WLAN Address ZTP WaitTime 9 Protect Configs E Net Adapter WLAN Params ZTP TearDist Name Configs Ethernet WLAN Kerberos 9 68 ACTIVE EMULATION PGL SFCC 2 VGL SFCC Printer Protocol 4 Form Length 4 Form Width 4 Select CPI 4 Select LPI 4 P Series SFCC 4 Page Length Rep 5 Max Line Width 5 Ribbon End Point Save Config Power Up Config Reset Cfg Names Auto Save If installed WLAN LEAP WLAN EAP 2 If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu 3 If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu f LP is selected from the AC
365. the configuration menu above and in all the configuration menus in this chapter the factory default values are indicated by an asterisk Your print jobs may require parameter values which vary from the default settings This section provides an example procedure for changing individual parameter values Changing Parameters Example The following procedure shows how to change and save the settings for the Barcode Quality and Language options Use these guidelines to navigate the configuration menus and change other parameters Step Press LCD Notes 1 Make sure the printer is on 2 ON LINE CLEAR OFFLINE i i QUICK SETUP 3 ENTER SWITCH Allows you to make configuration changes QN UNLOCKED T OFFLINE QUICK SETUP OFFLINE UNTIL lt gt UNTIL lt gt OR C 9 ENTER PRINTER CONTROL PRINTER CONTROL Ribbon End Point PRINTER CONTROL Barcode Quality Barcode Quality Dark Barcode Quality Draft Barcode Quality Draft Cycle through the choices The indicates this choice is active 51 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Step Press LCD Notes 10 PRINTER CONTROL CA Barcode Quality 11 PRINTER CONTROL Display Language UNTIL 12 Display Language LD English 13 Display Language Press until the desired parameter displays Spanish OR 14 ENTER Display Language The indica
366. the original barcode on both the left and the right Replacement Barcode Original id 245 Chapter 4 246 OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu If form elements interfere with this placement on the right or the left the barcode will automatically adjust away from these obstacles Form obstacles may force a center aligned barcode to look left or right aligned For instance in the below picture a center aligned barcode has text 0 2 inches away from the right edge of the original barcode With a horizontal quiet zone of 0 2 inches the resulting replacement barcode position is exactly the same regardless of whether center right or left alignment is chosen Regardless of the first attempted position the barcode will need to shift to the left until the horizontal quiet zone can be observed Replacement Barcode li I i Here is i obstacle Quiet Zone text Distance picket aM ee S a 5 E Original Barcode Right The first attempted position of the rightmost bar of the replacement barcode will be the same position as the rightmost bar of the original barcode For instance if the replacement barcode is shorter than the original barcode it will be placed as follows Replacement Barcode u TI a n oe ee oe a i d x Pd Original Barcode OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu If the replacement barcode is larger than the original barcode the replacement barcode will end at the ri
367. the platen lever to match the See SHUTTLE JAM on page 313 thickness of paper but not too tightly Check and adjust the platen gap Inspect the ribbon mask for deformation that snags and interferes with shuttle movement If fault source is not apparent contact your authorized service representative 313 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Can User Corrupted Firmware error on controller board i Explanation lution Displayed Message Correct planatio Solutio SHUTTLE TYPE NOT No The shuttle type was not Contact your authorized service SUPPORTED detected at power up or representative the shuttle installed in the printer is not supported by the firmware SOFTWARE ERROR No Application software tried Contact your authorized service CYCLE POWER to perform illegal printer representative function or damaged logic circuits found on controller board SPX FOUND ERROR No The controller board does Contact your authorized service KEY NOT DETECTED not have a security key representative SPX NOT NEEDED No The user has attempted Contact your authorized service OPTIONS ENABLED to use the SPX to turn on representative printer options that are already enabled STACK OVERFLOW No Firmware error on Contact your authorized service controller board representative STACK UNDERFLOW No Firmware error o
368. the top of one print line to the top of the next print line The options are e 6 0 default 8 0 9 0 e 10 0 Auto Uppercase This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using the ALPHA command e Disable default The printer will print text in upper and lowercase e Enable The printer will print text in uppercase only Skip Cmd Prefix This parameter determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL command is received e Enable default The printer ignores all data on the current line before an IGP command e Disable The printer will print all data on the current line before an IGP command Forms Handling This submenu allows the user to handle the form in the following ways e Disable default No effect e Auto Eject Automatically ejects a page at the end of the job to spill out the last page e Auto TOF Automatically does a form feed FF at the end of each form to the next top of form 201 Chapter 4 IGP PGL Emulation Power On IGP PGL You can set the IGP feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer is powered on e Enable default The PGL is enabled when the printer is powered on The PGL feature is initialized in the Normal mode Disable The PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on The PGL feature is initialized to the Quiet mode Ext Execute Copy e Disable default Dynamic data and overlay data are not allowed
369. tically incremented or decremented by any amount beginning from a specified reference point Standard Character Sets provide you with many different character sets Based on the Multinational Character Set you can create your own character sets using characters defined and stored in flash memory 209 Chapter 4 IMPORTANT IGP VGL Emulation Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel You can select VGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by control codes as explained in the GP VGL Programmer s Reference Manual The VGL parameters are described on the following pages Parameters marked with an asterisk indicate the default value The printer must be offline to enter the configuration structure all of the current settings BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP VGL print a configuration sheet to see Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another level in the configuration menu or exit the menu completely IGP VGL Submenu EMULATION from page 123 Factory Default IGP VGL SFCC amp LPI Graphics Error Ignore DB8 Pwrup Options Handling Setup VGL SFCC 6 see page 211 Error Msgs Ignore Chars 5E 7 Enable Disable Power up X 8 Disable Char 1 Disable 9 Error Markers Char 2 Enable 10 Enable Char 1 amp 2 Power up F Disable
370. tion parameters such as Barcode Quality and Print Quality Doing so however will decrease the printer speed If you have optimized the printer for print quality you can change it to optimal speed by selecting the values as follows e Bar Code Quality Printer Control menu Select Draft See page 63 for the Configuration Main Menu and see page 252 fora written description of Bar Code Quality e Print Quality IGP PGL emulation Select Dataprocessing See page 197 for the IGP PGL Configuration Menu and see page 206 for a written description of Print Quality e Print Quality IGP VGL emulation Select Dataprocessing See page 210 for the IGP VGL Configuration Menu and see page 217 for a written description of Print Quality Coax Twinax Emulation You can increase print speed by selecting the Enable mode for the Early Print Complete configuration parameter in the Coax Twinax Emulation However if an error occurs while in Enable mode you may lose data For more information refer to Early Print Complete on page 227 For the Coax Twinax Emulation menu see page 124 OpenPrint Postscript PDF Emulations The printer has been configured at the Factory for optimal print quality through the Resolution configuration parameter Postscript PDF menu However users can reduce the horizontal vertical or both DPI values of this menu to increase printer speed The downside of using a lower DPI value is as follows e Print quali
371. tion printout Reset WEP Keys Allows you to reset all four WEP keys WEP Key 1 through WEP Key 4 at one time WPA Mode Selects the WPA wireless security mode e Disable default WPA security is disabled e Personal Selects personal or pre shared key mode for WPA security 116 WPA Cipher Selects the WPA wireless security cipher setting Options include TKIP default WLAN KERBEROS e AES e TKIP AES e Disable WPA P Phs Allows you to set the individual bytes of the WPA passphrase Reset WPA P Phs Allows you to reset all 32 bytes of the WPA passphrase at once WLAN Factory Default Kerberos Only if a Symbol 4121 radio card is installed from page 105 Kerberos Kerb Reset KDC Port Clock Enable Passwd Kerb Pwd Number Skew Disable Kerb Pwd 01 15 88 Clock Skew Units Enable Kerb Pwd 16 30 0 65535 Seconds Kerb Pwd 31 40 Minutes Clock Skew Sec 300 Ticket Renew Lifetime Lifetime Tckt Lifetime Units Seconds Minutes Hours Days Tckt Lifetime SEC 43200 Renew Life Units Seconds Minutes Hours Days Renew Life SEC 0 Kerberos Enable Disable default Disables Kerberos authentication in the wireless network interface Enable Enables Kerberos authentication in the wireless network interface 117 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP Menu Kerb Passwd e Kerb Pwd 01 1
372. to 2 147 483 647 print lines e 11 inch Pages The cumulative number of pages the printer has printed The range in print pages is 0 to 2 147 483 647 total inches of paper movement divided by 11 e Poweron Pages The number of pages the printer has printed since power up Software Build Displays the part number and version of the printer firmware Feature File Displays the part number of the file if one has been downloaded to the printer Shuttle Type Displays the type of shuttle installed i e 2000s 1500 1000 500 or high definition 263 Chapter 4 DATE Menu DATE Menu 264 DATE from page 65 Factory Default 1 Appears only if the real time clock option is installed 67 69 71 73 and 75 Hour Minute Year Month Day 00 00 2099 Jan 01 00 23 00 59 2000 2099 Jan Dec 01 31 Hour This option allows you to set the hour The factory default is 00 and the range is from 00 to 23 hours Minute This option allows you to set the minutes The factory default is 00 and the range is from 00 to 59 minutes Year This option allows you to set the year The factory default is 2099 and the range is from the year 2000 to 2099 Month This option allows you to set the month The factory default is Jan and the range is from Jan to Dec Day This option allows you to set the day The factory default is 01 and the range is from 01 to
373. to low the host indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state ninit Resets init interface from the host Terminating Resistor Configurations V6 Controller Board For parallel interface configurations the printer is equipped with 470 Ohm and and 1K Ohm terminating reistors on the controller board These are suitable for most applications See Figure 23 If the standard terminating resistor pack is not compatible with the particular interface driver requirements of the host computer other RP1 and RP2 values may be required 220 Ohm and 330 Ohm alternate terminating resistors are provided with the printer If you install the 220 Ohm resistor you must also install the 330 Ohm resistor Possible terminating resistor combinations are shown below Configuration RP1 RP2 Factory Default 470 Ohm 1K Ohm Alternate 220 Ohm 330 Ohm 275 Chapter 5 RS 232 And RS 422 Serial Interfaces J LI h ETH 5 qj e oo 4 oc oo dr B a IE nn i J a Ho d z en me xs z Lem Bt EN
374. ts per inch Barcode Speed This parameter chooses the vertical print quality of barcode labels e High default Barcodes are printed with less vertical dots increasing printing speed but decreasing print quality e Select By Host The application decides the quality of the labels Low Barcodes are printed with more vertical dots decreasing printing speed but increasing print quality IPDS Emulation Barcode Size This parameter will emulate the barcode sizes of the selected printer model e 4234 default IBM 4234 e 67XX Decision Data 67XX e 64XX IBM 6400 series e 4224 IBM 4224 Early Print Comp Complete This parameter chooses when to send a Print Comp to the controller e Off default Print Comp is sent if page is printed completely e On Print Comp is sent immediately The next page will be created This improves the print performance when starting the next page NOTE When Early Print Comp is enabled and an error occurs you may lose data Graphics Scaling This parameter chooses the scaling factor for graphics when the Mapping Control option of the IPDS Write Graphics Control command is SCALE TO FIT e Rounded default Calculations are rounded up in the desired output resolution e Exact Graphics will be scaled as accurately as possible Graphic CharSize This parameter will emulate the graphic character size of the selected printer model e 4234 default IBM 4234 e 67XX Decision Da
375. ttempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E31B EVENT 1 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E31C EVENT 2 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E31D EVENT 3 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted again If the message appears in the application load the latest emulation program software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E31E EVENT 4 BP Yes An illegal or unsupported Cycle Power Run the print job See User Manual instruction was attempted in the application program
376. ty is reduced and it can be difficult to read small characters e Barcodes may not get detected and optimized barcodes are not searched for DPI values less than 120 Users are encouraged to use the Resolution menu to find the right combination of Print Quality Barcode Optimization and Print Speed 59 Chapter 4 Dynamic Menu Options Dynamic Menu Options The main menus for each of the different firmware types have several footnotes based on the possible options installed with the printer This includes HOST IO connectivity various hardware mechanical options and software emulations and features The P7000 products dynamically detect options installed and only include relevant menus for the user to configure The following is a description of the types of installation options and their effect on the main menu e HOST INTERFACE Coax Twinax Ethernet and WLAN related menus are only present when the hardware is installed enabled e NETWORK SETUP The NETWORK SETUP menu is only present when Ethernet or WLAN is installed The WLAN options can vary based on the type of radio card installed with the printer WLAN Kerberos is included with the Symbol LA4121 radio card WLAN LEAP is included with the Cisco radio card and WLAN EAP is included with the Symbol LA5127 radio card e ZTP SETTINGS The ZTP SETTINGS menu and its contents are only included with the Zero Tear Pedestal printer e DATE This main menu is only present when the
377. ubmenu 95 Data Carrier Detect DCD RS 232 277 Data Lines 1 through 8 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 271 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 269 Data Polarity Centronics Parallel submenu 92 Dataproducts submenu 95 Data Protocol Serial submenu 98 Data Set Ready DSR RS 232 277 Data Strobe Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 271 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 269 Data Term Ready Serial submenu 100 Data Terminal Ready DTR RS 232 277 Dataproducts Parallel Interface 268 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 269 Buffer Clear 269 Cable Verify 269 Data Lines 1 through 8 269 Data Strobe 269 Demand Data Request 269 Online 269 Paper Instruction Pl 269 Parity Error 269 Ready 269 Dataproducts submenu 95 Auto Trickle 96 Buffer Size in K 96 Data Bit 8 95 Data Polarity 95 Latch Data On 96 PI Ignored 95 Prime Signal 96 357 Resp Polarity 96 TOF Action 96 Trickle Time 97 DATE Menu 264 Day 264 Hour 264 Minute 264 Month 264 Year 264 Day DATE Menu 264 Default Code Page IPDS Emulation 227 Default configurations 48 Default Font IPDS Emulation 228 Default WEP Key WLAN PARAMS Menu 116 Define CR Code 165 199 ANSI Emulation menu 192 Epson FX Emulation 183 Proprinter XL Emulation 179 P Series XQ Emulation 172 Serial Matrix Emulation 175 Define LF Code 166 200 ANSI Emulation menu 192 Epson FX Emulation 183 Proprinter XL Emulation 179 P Series XQ E
378. ulation menu 194 Barcode Errors 221 Barcode Options 202 Al 00 Spaces 203 C39 Compatbl 204 2 5 Selection 203 Optimized Ratio 203 Select SO Char 203 UPC Descenders 202 User Def Ratio 203 Barcode Quality IPDS Emulation 226 Barcode Size IPDS Emulation 227 Barcode Speed IPDS Emulation 226 Barcodes on Page 250 Baud Rate Serial submenu 100 BC Check Digit ANSI Emulation menu 194 Bcodes Optimized 250 Buffer Clear Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals 269 BUFFER OVERRUN message 291 Buffer Print 134 140 153 SPC Twx Params 156 Buffer Reprint 129 154 Buffer Size in K Centronics Parallel submenu 93 Dataproducts submenu 96 Ethernet submenu 103 104 IEEE 1284 Parallel Bidirectional Submenu 90 Serial submenu 101 Busy On Strobe Centronics Parallel submenu 93 Busy Centronics Parallel Interface Signals 271 Byte Mode IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface 272 BOO STATUS SDRAM DETECTION 166MHZ message 288 B01 STATUS 8245 SDRAM TEST 32MB message 288 B10 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED message 288 B11 ERROR RAM TEST FAILED message 288 B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING message 289 B13 ERROR NOT COMPATIBLE message 289 B19 ERROR DC RETURNED message 289 B20 STATUS 00 DOWNLOAD MODE message 289 B21 STATUS PRINTER RESET message 289 B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE message 289 B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS CKSUM message 289 B30 STATUS INITIALIZING 289 B35 WAITING FOR EC STATUS 289 B40 ERROR PROM CKSUM BAD message 29
379. ult Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return e CRz CR LF Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return Auto LF This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the forms width setting e Enable default Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width e Disable Discards any data past the forms width Define LF Code The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Line Feed code hex 0A from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a Line Feed it inserts an additional Carriage Return code hex OD into the data stream This feature is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer e LF LLF default Does not add a carriage return with a line feed e LFz CR LF Adds an extra carriage return with each line feed 1838 Chapter 44 LinePrinter Plus Emulation With PCL II Printer Select e Disable default Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes e Enable Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received Character Set This parameter selects a character set for the Epson emulation as shown in the Exoov oz Xnapaytep Let Mevv ov naye 185 NOTE When OCR A or OCR B is selected as the print language the Font Attribute Typeface option under the L
380. us report to the host e Big Enables extended unsolicited status reports and sends an extended status report to the host Print Mode Opt When enabled this option affects the SPI SHS and DECSHORP commands The printer will no longer be forced into these commands and print speed improves significantly when in portrait orientation For SHS and DECSHORP the character size will change with the selected pitch In addition SGR attributes such as bold crossed out and italics will be done in print mode with greater efficiency e Enable default Enables the print mode option Disable Disables the fpirnt mode option This provides compatibility with older LG printer products Plot Mode Opt When enabled this option will plot with greater efficiency particularly with respect to the Postnet barcode Postnet is printed in the same density as the current print mode font so that reverse motion will be inhibited when possible e Enable default Enables the print mode option Disable Disables the print mode option This provides compatibility with older LG printer products l 2 5 Guard Bars e Enable default Horizontal guard bars are printed above and below each Interleaved 2 5 bar code This option only applies to Interleaved 2 5 bar codes e Disable Interleaved 2 5 bar codes are printed normally with no guard bars 237 Chapter 4 OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT PDF Emulation OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT PDF Emulation
381. ve Char Set This option selects which group of character sets Primary or Secondary will be active Secondary Set is the default Prt Partial Line e Enable default Forces the printer to print a partial line i e line not ending with a LF before moving to the top of form on the next page e Disable The last partial line of data will not be printed Device ID This parameter defines the printer emulation as IPDS 5225 or 4234 2 After the emulation has been changed a POR status is sent to the host IPDS is the default Device Address Allows you to set the device address from 0 through 6 The host directs data and commands on the twinax line to a specific device based on its unique device address After the address has been changed a POR status is sent to the host 5225 World Trade The 5225 emulation has a standard multinational character set that serves as a base and 14 extended world trade character set assortments Cancel IGP DCU e Enable default Cancels all buffers when a job is put on hold from the host or the CANCEL key is pressed Disable Does not cancel any internal buffer in the printer when a job is put on hold from the host or the CANCEL key is pressed 137 Chapter 4 Coax Twinax CTHI Emulation PTX Transparent Lead in Chars You can enable additional features that are not available in standard Twinax emulations To access these features send text commands in the data stream The comma
382. ve only when the printer is offline and will not operate if the printer is in a fault condition The paper moves down to the print position and aligns to the top of form Refer to the Quick Setup Guide for complete instructions on how to set the top of form NOTE If there is any data in the buffer the paper will move to the last print position uer PRT CONFIG In offline mode PRT CONFIG prints the current short configuration This key requires a confirmation with the ENTER key pressing any other key will exit from this function See The Configuration Menus on page 47 for an explanation of configuration menus F JOB SELECT In offline mode this key allows for fast selection of any of the previously stored configurations Pressing this key causes the printer to cycle through the following messages Load Config Factory Config Load Config 1 Load Config 2 Load Config 3 Load Config 8 lt l ENTER When navigating the configuration menus ENTER selects the currently displayed option value as the active value An asterisk appears next to the active value on the display ENTER is also used for starting and stopping printer tests and generating a configuration printout NOTE The ENTER key must be unlocked in order to function See UP DOWN below The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a key combination other than A V see page 259 UP or DOWN A or V Moves up or down between levels in
383. ved from the host User Defined HTRN This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation The range is ASCII character This option allows users to define ther own lead in characters for the Printronix Specific commands Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option e Start Code 1 e Start Code 2 Stop Code EVFU e Enable The EVFU parameter allows vertical format control by the host in all four printer type modes e Disable Vertical format control is only allowed in IMPACT P SERIES mode SPC Char Set Allows you to select the print language character set Translation Tbl Prints out a table of the Twinax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the Twinax interface is selected Buffer Print e Disable default The printer will print normally e Enable The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values Refer to page 285 for information on how to obtain a hex code printout 156 LinePrinter Plus Emulation LinePrinter Plus Emulation NOTE When the printer is set to SPC Twx Params or SPC Coax Params no EMULATION from page 123 LinePrinter LP menu items will take effect on the same offline The LP Emulation resets when the printer is taken offline Factory Default Printer CPI LPI
384. will be active Secondary Set is the default Prt Partial Line e Enable default Forces the printer to print if a partial line is in the printer i e line not ending with a LF e Disable The last partial line of data will not be printed PA1 PA1 is only valid when the printer is in the offline state and the coax Systems Network Architecture Character String SCS data stream is active This function displays the PA1 ENABLED message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is put back in Online mode Refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual for more information about SCS NOTE Selecting the PA1 menu item again PA1 DISABLED appears on the operator panel or selecting the PA2 menu item will reset the pending PA1 function Coax Emulation PA2 PA2 is only valid when the printer is in the Offline state and the coax SCS data stream is active This function displays the PA2 ENABLED message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is put back in online mode NOTE Selecting the PA2 menu item again PA2 DISABLED appears on the operator panel or selecting the PA1 menu item will reset the pending PA2 function Buffer Reprint This option is valid only when the printer is printing in SCS mode When the ENTER key is pressed Buffer Reprint Enabled is displayed and an Intervention Required s
385. ws you to make configuration changes The LCD flashes You will rename config 2 Cycle through the choices until T displays 56 Saving Your New Configuration Step Press LCD Notes 11 2 Saves the first character T_ 12 2 Cycle through the choices until E displays CR UNriL TE 13 2 Saves the second character TE_ 14 2 Cycle through the choices until S displays lt A gt UNTIL TES 15 2 Saves the third character e TES 16 2 Cycle through the choices until T displays lt A gt UNTIL TEST 17 2 Saves the fourth character e TEST 18 ENTER Name Configs The configuration is renamed TEST TEST 19 CONFIG CONTROL I gt Name Configs 20 CONFIG CONTROL Save Config UNTIL 21 Save Config 3 Sa 57 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Step Press LCD Notes 22 Save Config TEST now appears as one of configuration TEST choices 23 ENTER Saving Configuration Save Config Your configuration is saved as TEST TEST 24 ENTER SWITCH Locks the ENTER key lt A gt LOCKED 25 ON LINE CLEAR ONLINE Ribbon Life 100 Now you have the saved configuration for later use if needed 58 Optimizing Print Quality LP IGP PGL and IGP VGL Emulations You can optimize print quality for darker and sharper barcodes and characters Doing so however will decrease the printer speed
386. y work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement 348 These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it

P7000 Cartridge Ribbon Printer User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents